®
Netopia R2020 Dual Analog Router
for data communication
User’s Reference Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
Welcome to the Netopia R2020 Dual Analog Router User’s Reference Guide. This guide is designed
to be your single source for information about your Netopia R2020 Dual Analog Router. It is
intended to be viewed on-line, using the powerful features of the Adobe Acrobat Reader. The
information display has been deliberately designed to present the maximum information in the
minimum space on your screen. You can keep this document open while you perform any of the
procedures described, and find useful information about the procedure you are performing.
This Table of Contents page you are viewing consists of hypertext links to the chapters and
Contents .......................................................................................i
Configuration options for your Netopia R2020 Dual Analog Router..1
1. Small Office connection to the Internet........................... 2
2. Small Office connection to the Internet........................... 3
G
Auxiliary port .................................................................... 6
Chapter 1 — Introduction.......................................................... 1-1
Overview....................................................................... 1-1
Features and capabilities ............................................... 1-1
How to use this guide .................................................... 1-2
Find a location............................................................... 2-1
What you need .............................................................. 2-1
Identify the connectors and attach the cables .................. 2-2
Netopia R2020 Dual Analog Router Back Panel Ports ....... 2-4
Netopia R2020 Dual Analog Router Status Lights ............ 2-6
Before running SmartStart ............................................. 3-1
Setting up your Router with the SmartStart Wizard ........... 3-3
SmartStart Wizard configuration screens ............... 3-3
Easy option.......................................................... 3-4
Advanced option .................................................. 3-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ii
User’s Reference Guide
computers ........................................................... 3-9
Configuring TCP/ IP on Macintosh computers ........ 3-13
Connecting to an Ethernet network.................................. 4-3
10Base-T............................................................. 4-3
Adding an external modem ............................................. 4-4
Connecting to a LocalTalk network ................................. 4-5
Wiring guidelines for PhoneNET cabling.................. 4-6
Chapter 5 — Console-based Management.................................. 5-1
Connecting through a Telnet session ............................... 5-2
Configuring Telnet software ................................... 5-3
Connecting a local terminal console cable to your router... 5-3
Navigating through the console screens .......................... 5-4
How to access the Easy Setup console screens ..... 6-1
Easy Setup profile ................................................ 6-3
IP Easy Setup ...................................................... 6-4
Easy Setup Security.............................................. 6-6
Chapter 7 — WAN and System Configuration ............................. 7-1
Creating a new Connection Profile ................................... 7-2
Viewing or editing connection profiles .................... 7-5
Deleting connection profiles .................................. 7-7
System Configuration screens ........................................ 7-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol)..... 7-12
Security............................................................. 7-12
Upgrade Feature Set .......................................... 7-12
Logging ............................................................. 7-13
Installing the Syslog client .................................. 7-13
Connection Budgets page ................................... 8-18
Connection Budget Configuration page ................. 8-19
Budget Statistics page ....................................... 8-20
Console-based management screens ............................ 8-23
Chapter 9 — Virtual Private Networks ....................................... 9-1
Overview....................................................................... 9-1
About PPTP tunnels ........................................................ 9-4
PPTP Configuration ............................................... 9-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
iv
User’s Reference Guide
About ATMP Tunnels..................................................... 9-16
10-1
IP profile parameters ........................................ 10-18
Default Answer Profile ...................................... 10-20
NAT Associations ....................................................... 10-22
MultiNAT Configuration Example .................................. 10-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Static routes ............................................................. 10-31
IP address serving..................................................... 10-35
DHCP NetBIOS Options ..................................... 10-37
DHCP Relay Agent ............................................ 10-40
MacIP (Kip Forwarding) Options ......................... 10-41
NetBIOS ............................................................ 11-3
IPX Spoofing ...................................................... 11-3
IPX setup........................................................... 11-3
IPX in the answer profile ..................................... 11-5
IPX routing tables ........................................................ 11-7
Installing AppleTalk ...................................................... 12-4
Configuring AppleTalk ................................................... 12-6
EtherTalk Setup.................................................. 12-6
LocalTalk Setup ................................................. 12-7
AURP setup ....................................................... 12-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
vi
User’s Reference Guide
Served IP Addresses .................................................. 13-10
System Information.................................................... 13-12
SNMP ....................................................................... 13-12
The SNMP Setup screen ................................... 13-13
SNMP traps ..................................................... 13-14
Viewing filter sets ............................................. 14-16
Modifying filter sets .......................................... 14-17
Deleting a filter set........................................... 14-17
A sample IP filter set ........................................ 14-17
IPX filters .................................................................. 14-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Securing network environments ......................... 14-36
Using the SecurID token card............................ 14-36
Security authentication components .................. 14-37
Configuring for security authentication ............... 14-37
Connecting using security authentication ........... 14-38
Factory defaults ........................................................... 15-7
Transferring configuration and firmware files with TFTP.... 15-7
Uploading configuration files ............................. 15-10
Transferring configuration and firmware files with XMODEM.....
15-10
Updating firmware ............................................ 15-11
Downloading configuration files ......................... 15-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
viii
User’s Reference Guide
Uploading configuration files ............................. 15-12
Console connection problems ............................... A-2
Network problems ................................................ A-2
Power outages ............................................................... A-3
Technical support .......................................................... A-3
How to reach us ................................................... A-3
Deciding on an ISP account ............................................ B-2
Setting up a Netopia R2020 account ..................... B-2
SmartIP™............................................................ B-3
Appendix C — Understanding IP Addressing ..............................C-1
What is IP?.................................................................... C-1
About IP addressing....................................................... C-1
Subnets and subnet masks .................................. C-2
Example: Using subnets on a Class C IP internet.... C-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using address serving.......................................... C-8
Tips and rules for distributing IP addresses ............ C-9
Appendix E — Further Reading.................................................. E-1
Environment ........................................................ F-2
Software and protocols ......................................... F-3
Important safety instructions ................................ F-5
Appendix G — About 56K Line Access.......................................G-1
Glossary.................................................................................. GL-1
Index ..................................................................................Index-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
x
User’s Reference Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration options for your Netopia R2020 Dual Analog
Router
The Netopia R2020 can be used in different ways depending on your needs. In general, you
will probably want to use it in one or more of the following ways: (Click on one of these links)
■ “1. Small Office connection to the Internet” with several computers in your office sharing
a single IP address (Network Address Translation enabled)
■ “2. Small Office connection to the Internet” with a block of IP addresses (Network
Address Translation disabled),
■ “3. Direct Connection to a Corporate Office (Telecommuter)”
■ “4. Configured to accept incoming dial-up connections”
■ “5. Configured for two onboard and one external modem on the Auxiliary port”
This section is intended to give you a path to the appropriate installation and configuration
instructions based on your intended use for the Netopia R2020.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. Small Office connection to the Internet
For Small Office connections to the Internet, using a single dynamic IP address with Network
Address Translation (NAT) enabled, you should use the following configuration option:
■ the SmartStart™ Wizard, included on your Netopia R2020 CD.
This is the fastest and simplest way to get you up and running with the minimum
difficulty.
For instructions on this option, see “Setting up your Router with the SmartStart Wizard”
on page 3-3.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Small Office connection to the Internet
For Small Office connections to the Internet, using a block of IP addresses (Network Address
Translation disabled), you should use the following configuration tool:
■ Easy Setup configuration using console-based management. This option allows maximum
flexibility for experienced users and administrators.
For instructions on this option, see “Console-based Management” on page 5-1 and
“Easy Setup” on page 6-1.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Direct Connection to a Corporate Office (Telecommuter)
For direct connections to a Corporate Office, you can use either one of two configuration
options:
■ If you will be using Network Address Translation, use the SmartStart™ Wizard, included
on your Netopia R2020 CD.
For instructions on this option, see “Setting up your Router with the SmartStart Wizard”
on page 3-3.
■ If your corporate office assigns you a static IP address, use Easy Setup under
console-based management. This option allows maximum flexibility for experienced users
and administrators.
For instructions on this option, see “Console-based Management” on page 5-1 and
“Easy Setup” on page 6-1.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Configured to accept incoming dial-up connections
To configure the Netopia R2020 to accept incoming dial-up connections, you should use the
following configuration method:
■ To create one or more dial-in Connection Profiles for each dial-in user, see “Creating a
new Connection Profile” on page 7-2.
You do this using console-based management.
For instructions on using console-based management, see “Console-based
Management” on page 5-1
For instructions on creating a Connection Profile to dial out to an ISP or corporate site,
see “Easy Setup” on page 6-1.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Configured for two onboard and one external modem on the Auxiliary port
To configure the Netopia R2020 to use the two onboard modems and a third external modem
on the Auxiliary serial port, you should use the following configuration options. This might be
done to allow three separate simultaneous dial-in/ dial-out connections or one or two
aggregated dial-in/ dial-out calls using Multilink PPP.
■ Install the special optional modem cable available from your reseller or directly from
Netopia.
■ use the SmartStart™ Wizard, to configure your outbound connection to an ISP. For
instructions on this option, see “Setting up your Router with the SmartStart Wizard” on
page 3-3.
■ manual configuration using console-based management. You simply attach your modem
using the special modem cable, and enter the telephone number and modem init string
in your WAN configuration. For instructions on this option, see “Adding an external
modem” on page 4-4.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
User’s Reference Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction 1-1
Chapter 1
Introduction
Overview
The Netopia R2020 Dual Analog Router is a full-featured, stand-alone, multiprotocol router for connecting
diverse local area networks (LANs) to the Internet and other remote networks. The Netopia R2020 Dual Analog
Router uses two 56Kbps V.90 modems communicating over standard analog telephone lines to provide your
whole network with a high-speed connection to the outside world.
This section covers the following topics:
■
■
“Features and capabilities” on page 1-1
“How to use this guide” on page 1-2
Features and capabilities
The Netopia R2020 Dual Analog Router provides the following features:
■
■
■
WAN connection over two analog phone lines using two built-in 56Kbps V.90 modems
Support for a third (external) modem via the Auxiliary port
Support for Multilink PPP to aggregate the separate analog modems into a single virtual data pipe of
112Kbps using the built-in modems or 168Kbps by adding an external 56Kbps modem
■
■
■
Connectivity to Ethernet LANs via built-in 8 port 10Base-T hub with uplink switch
Status lights (LEDs) for easy monitoring and troubleshooting
SmartStart™ Wizard software for easy configuration over an Ethernet network connection. The SmartStart
Wizard may include an optional automatic registration with one of several major ISPs, making the process
as simple as completing a registration form. Using the alternate manual setting to configure the router for
an ISP that’s not listed, the software allows you to configure your internal connection by entering just five
fields: username, password, dialup number, DNS, and IP gateway.
■
■
Built-in Basic Firewall and NetBIOS filtering
Support for secure Virtual Private Networks (VPN). This feature allows seamless integration with the
Microsoft Windows NT Server’s mobile user-to-LAN built-in VPN solution via Dial-up Networking, as well as
suitability for LAN-to-LAN VPN applications using Netopia routers at both ends.
■
Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol (PPTP) with Microsoft Point-to-Point Encryption (MPPE) for authentica-
tion and payload encryption for communicating with remote Windows NT servers.
■
RFC 2107 Ascend Tunneling Management Protocol (ATMP) with 56-bit DES for authentication and
extensions to include payload encryption.
■
SmartIP™ makes it simple and economical to connect a workgroup of users to the Internet or a remote IP
network by using Network Address Translation and a single IP address. Multiple Network Address
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-2 User’s Reference Guide
Translation (MultiNAT) adds significant flexibility and security for a wide range of applications.
■
■
1-to-1 static NAT mapping
Multiple Many-to-1 NAPT mappings on a single interface. NAPT addresses can be assigned to specific
private address subnets
■
■
■
Mapped services (exports) can use multiple public addresses
Co-existent mapped and unmapped interfaces
NAT rules per interface, similar to filter rules
■
Connection Metering offers system-wide time and packet-based connection metering and budgeting
through web-based management screens. It allows monitoring and enforcing preset budget rules on three
separate Connection Profiles. Internet browsers such as Netscape Navigator™ and Microsoft’s Internet
Explorer™ can be used.
■
■
Support for IP and IPX routing for Internet and Intranet connectivity
DHCP IP address serving (over Ethernet or a WAN link) which allows local or remote network nodes to
automatically acquire an IP address dynamically from a designated pool of available addresses
■
■
Support for Console-based management
Support for remote configuration by your reseller, your network administrator, or technicians at Netopia,
Inc.
■
■
Wall-mountable, Bookshelf (Side-stackable), or Desktop-stackable design for efficient space usage
AppleTalk support (available as a separate add-on AppleTalk kit, including a firmware feature set
enhancement and custom HD-15 dual RJ-11 PhoneNET™ connector) allows for LocalTalk to Ethernet
routing, assigning IP addresses to Macintosh users (MacIP), IP functionality for LocalTalk users, and AURP
tunneling for connectivity between remote AppleTalk networks.
■
Upgradeable to other WAN interfaces including ISDN and DSL. You can exchange one WAN module for a
higher-speed module or an always-on connection and use the remaining V.90 modem for integrated
backup.
How to use this guide
This guide is designed to be your single source for information about your Netopia R2020 Dual Analog Router.
It is intended to be viewed on-line, using the powerful features of the Adobe Acrobat Reader. The information
display has been deliberately designed to present the maximum information in the minimum space on your
screen. You can keep this document open while you perform any of the procedures described, and find useful
information about the procedure you are performing.
You can also print out all of the manual, or individual sections, if you prefer to work from hard copy rather than
on-line documentation. The pages are formatted to print on standard 8 1/ 2 by 11 inch paper. We recommend
that you print on 3-hole punched paper, so that you can put the pages in a binder for future reference. For your
convenience, a printed copy is available from Netopia. Order part number TER2121/ Doc.
This guide is organized into chapters describing the Netopia R2020’s advanced features. You may want to read
each chapter’s introductory section to familiarize yourself with the various features available.
Use the guide’s table of contents and index to locate informational topics.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Making the Physical Connections 2-1
Chapter 2
This section tells you how to make the physical connections to your Netopia R2020 Dual Analog Router. This
■
■
■
■
“Find a location” on page 2-1
“What you need” on page 2-1
“Identify the connectors and attach the cables” on page 2-2
“Netopia R2020 Dual Analog Router Status Lights” on page 2-6
Find a location
When choosing a location for the Netopia Router, consider:
■
■
Available space and ease of installation
Physical layout of the building and how to best use the physical space available in relation to connecting
your Netopia Router to the LAN
■
■
■
■
■
Available wiring and jacks
Distance from the point of installation to the next device (length of cable or wall wiring)
Ease of access to the front of the unit for configuration and monitoring
Ease of access to the back of the unit for checking and changing cables
Cable length and network size limitations when expanding networks
For small networks, install the Netopia R2020 near one of the LANs. For large networks, you can install the
Netopia R2020 in a wiring closet or a central network administration site.
What you need
Locate all items that you need for the installation.
Included in your router package are:
■
■
■
■
■
■
The Netopia R2020 Dual Analog Router
A power adapter and cord with a mini-DIN8 connector
An RJ-45 Ethernet cable
Two standard RJ-11 telephone cables
A dual DE-9 and mini-DIN8 to DE-9 console cable (for a PC or a Macintosh)
The Netopia CD containing the SmartStart Wizard, an Internet browser, Adobe® Acrobat® Reader for
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-2 User’s Reference Guide
Windows and Macintosh, ZTerm terminal emulator software and NCSA Telnet 2.6 for Macintosh
You will need:
■
A Windows 95-based PC or a Macintosh with Ethernet connectivity for configuring the Netopia R2020. This
may be built-in Ethernet or an add-on card, with TCP/ IP installed and configured. See “Before running
SmartStart” on page 3-1.
■
Two telephone lines, each with its own jack.
Identify the connectors and attach the cables
Identify the connectors and switches on the back panel and attach the necessary Netopia Router cables.
1 Ethernet
2 Telco
3
Power
8
Ethernet
1
Line 2
Auxiliary
Power
Console
Line 1
Normal
Uplink
1. Connect the mini-DIN8 connector from the Power Adapter to the Power port, and plug the other end into an
electrical outlet.
2. Connect one end of one of the RJ-11 cables to the “Line 1" port, and the other end to one of your wall
outlets.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Making the Physical Connections 2-3
If you have two phone lines on a single wall outlet, this is the only Telco connection you need to make. The
pinout configuration for the lines on the Line 1 port is shown in the following diagram:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Telco 1
Telco 2
Your first Telco number is carried on the inner pair and the second number on the outer pair.
3. If you have a second phone line with its own separate wall outlet, and want to use both built-in modems,
connect one end of one of the RJ-11 cables to the “Line 2" port, and the other end to your second wall
outlet.
4. Connect the Ethernet cable to any of the Ethernet ports on the router.
(If you are connecting the router to an existing Ethernet hub, use Ethernet port #1 on the router and set the
crossover switch to the Uplink position.)
You should now have: the power adapter plugged in; the Ethernet cable connected between the router and
your computer; and the telephone cables connected between the router and the wall outlets.
5. Insert your Netopia CD and follow the instructions to install an Internet browser and the Adobe Acrobat
Reader, if you don’t already have them.
6. Now, run the SmartStart application.
SmartStart requires the following:
■
your computer must be Ethernet-capable, that is it must have both an Ethernet card and TCP/ IP stack
■
■
your computer and the Netopia R2020 are powered ON.
the computer running SmartStart and the Netopia R2020 to be configured must be on the same Ether-
net segment; there can be no intervening routers. Repeaters, such as 10Base-T hubs, are acceptable.
Go to the section “Setting up your Router with the SmartStart Wizard” on page 3-3 for details on running
SmartStart.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-4 User’s Reference Guide
Netopia R2020 Dual Analog Router Back Panel Ports
The figure below displays the back of the Netopia R2020 Dual Analog Router.
Netopia R2020 Dual Analog Router back panel
Line ports
Ethernet
8
4
7
3
6
2
5
1
Auxiliary
Console
Power
Line 2
Line 1
Normal/Uplink
1
Crossover switch
Auxiliary port
Power port
8 port Ethernet hub
Console port
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Making the Physical Connections 2-5
The following table describes all the Netopia R2020 Dual Analog Router back panel ports.
Port
Power port
Description
a mini-DIN8 power adapter cable connection.
Line 1 port
a red RJ-11 telephone jack labelled “Line 1".
Console port
a DE-9 Console port for a direct serial connection to the console screens. You
may use this if you are an experienced user and choose not to use SmartStart.
See “Connecting a local terminal console cable to your router” on page 5-3.
Auxiliary port
Line 2 port
an HD-15 Auxiliary port for attaching an external modem or the optional
AppleTalk kit.
a red RJ-11 telephone jack labelled “Line 2".
If you have only one telephone wall jack, supporting either one or two telephone
numbers, use the “Line 1" port. “Line 1" supports two phone connections on a
single line; “Line 2" supports a single phone connection.
Crossover switch
a crossover switch with Normal and Uplink positions. If Ethernet Port #1 is used
for a direct Ethernet connection between a computer and the router, set the
switch to the Normal position. If you are connecting the router to an Ethernet
hub, use Ethernet port #1 on the router and set the switch to the Uplink
position.
8-port Ethernet hub
Eight Ethernet jacks. You will use one of these to configure the Netopia R2020.
For a new installation, you use the Ethernet connection. SmartStart only works
over Ethernet. Later, if you want to do some advanced configuration, you can
Telnet to the Console-based management screens via the Ethernet connection.
You may also use the Console connection to run the Console-based
management using a direct serial connection. You may either connect your
computer directly to any of the Ethernet ports on the router, or connect both
your computer and the router to an existing Ethernet hub on your LAN.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-6 User’s Reference Guide
Netopia R2020 Dual Analog Router Status Lights
The figure below represents the Netopia R2020 status light (LED) panel.
Netopia R2020 LED front panel
2 3 4 5
6 7
8 9 1011 12 13 1415161718192021
1
E t h e r n e t
L in k /R e c e iv e
WA N 1
WA N 2
L A N
The following table summarizes the meaning of the various LED states and colors:
When this happens...
the LEDs...
when the corresponding line is ringing
when the modem has carrier
2 and 8 flash yellow
3 and 9 are green.
3 and 9 flash green
when the router initiates an incoming or
outgoing call
when data is transmitted or received
when carrier is asserted
4 and 10 flash yellow.
6 and 7 are green.
6 and 7 flash yellow.
12 flashes yellow.
when console data is transmitted or received
when data is transmitted or received by the
ethernet controller
when the Ethernet interface detects a collision 13 flashes red.
when link is detected
14 though 21 are solid green.
when data is received on their respective ports 14 though 21 flash green
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting up your Router with the SmartStart Wizard 3-1
Chapter 3
Setting up your Router with the SmartStart Wizard
Once you’ve connected your router to your computer and your telecommunications line and installed a web
browser, you’re ready to run the Netopia SmartStart™ Wizard. The SmartStart Wizard will help you set up the
router and share the connection. The SmartStart Wizard walks you through a series of questions and based on
your responses automatically configures the router for connecting your LAN to the Internet or to your remote
corporate network.
The SmartStart Wizard will:
■
automatically check your Windows 95, 98, or NT PC’s TCP/ IP configuration to be sure you can accept a
dynamically assigned IP address, and change it for you if it is not set for dynamic addressing
■
■
■
check the physical connection from your computer to your router without your having to enter an IP address
assign an IP address to your router
allow you to register with a new ISP if you don’t already have one. For a list of ISPs that support Netopia
Routers in North America, see the Netopia website at http:/ / www.netopia.com.
■
allow you to enter your dial-up telephone numbers and other information, dial up and test your connection
to your chosen ISP or other remote site
Before running SmartStart
Be sure you have connected the cables and power source as described in Step 1 “Connect the Router” guide
contained in your Netopia folio.
Before you launch the SmartStart application, make sure your computer meets the following requirements:
MacOS 7.5 or later
System
software
Windows 95, 98, or NT operating system
Connectivity
software
TCP/ IP must be installed and properly
configured. See “Configuring TCP/ IP on
Windows 95, 98, or NT computers” on
page 3-9
MacTCP or Open Transport TCP/ IP must be
installed and properly configured. See
“Configuring TCP/ IP on Macintosh
computers” on page 3-13.
Connectivity
hardware
Ethernet card (10Base-T)
Either a built-in or third-party Ethernet card
(10Base-T)
Browser
software
Netscape Communicator™ or Microsoft Internet Explorer, included on the Netopia CD.
Required for web-based registration and web-based monitoring.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-2 User’s Reference Guide
PC
Macintosh
Note s :
• The computer running SmartStart must be on the same Ethernet cable segment as the Netopia R2020.
Repeaters, such as 10Base-T hubs between your computer and the Netopia R2020, are acceptable, but
devices such as switches or other routers are not.
• SmartStart for the PC will set your TCP/ IP control panel to “Obtain an IP address automatically” if it is
not already set this way. This will cause your computer to reboot. If you have a specified IP address
configured in the computer, you should make a note of it before running SmartStart, in case you do not
want to use the dynamic addressing features built in to the Netopia Router and need to restore the fixed IP
address.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting up your Router with the SmartStart Wizard 3-3
Setting up your Router with the SmartStart Wizard
The SmartStart Wizard is tailored for your platform, but it works the same way on either a PC or a Macintosh.
Insert the Netopia CD, and in the desktop navigation screen that appears, launch the SmartStart Wizard
application.
SmartStart Wizard configuration screens
The screens described in this section are the default screens shipped on the Netopia CD. They
derive from two initialization (.ini) files included in the same directory as the SmartStart
application file. Your reseller or your ISP may have supplied you with customized versions of
these files.
■
If you have received a CD or diskette that has been customized by your reseller or ISP, you
can run the SmartStart Wizard directly from the CD or diskette and follow the instructions
your reseller or ISP provides. This makes your Netopia R2020 configuration even easier.
■
If you have received only the .ini files from your reseller or ISP, perform the following:
■
■
■
Copy the entire directory folder containing the SmartStart Wizard application from the
Netopia CD to your hard disk.
Copy the customized .ini files to the same directory folder that contains the Smart-
Start Wizard application, allowing the copy process to overwrite the original .ini files.
Run the SmartStart Wizard from your hard disk. You can then follow the instructions
your reseller or ISP provides.
The SmartStart Wizard presents a series of screens to guide you through the preliminary configuration of a
Netopia R2020. It will then create a connection profile using the information you supply to it.
Welcome screen. The first screen welcomes you to the
SmartStart Wizard configuration utility.
Click the Ne xt button after you have responded to the
interactive prompts in each screen.
The He lp button will display useful information to assist
you in responding to the interactive prompts.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-4 User’s Reference Guide
Easy or Advanced options screen. You can choose either
Eas y or Advance d setup.
■
router. This is the best choice if you are creating a
new network or don’t already have an IP addressing
scheme on your new network.
screen,” like the one shown below while SmartStart
checks the connection to your router.
■
If you choose Advance d, skip to page 3-8 now. The
SmartStart Wizard displays the “Router IP Address
screen” on page 3-8, in which you can choose ways
to modify your router’s IP address.
Easy option
Connection Test screen. SmartStart tests the
connection to the router. While it is testing the
connection, a progress indicator screen is displayed and
the router’s Ethernet LEDs flash.
When the test succeeds, SmartStart indicates success.
If the test fails, the wizard displays an error screen. If the test fails, check the following:
■
■
■
Check your cable connections. Be sure you have connected the router and the computer properly, using the
correct cables. Refer to the Step 1 “Connect the Router” sheet in your Netopia R2020 documentation folio.
Make sure the router is turned on and that there is an Ethernet connection between your computer and the
(Macintosh) is selected. If you are using a Windows PC, SmartStart will automatically detect a static IP
address and offer to configure the computer for automatic addressing. On a Macintosh computer, you must
manually set the TCP/ IP Control Panel to DHCP. See “Configuring TCP/ IP on Macintosh computers” on
page 3-13. If you currently use a static IP address outside the 192.168.1.x network, and want to continue
using it, use the Advanced option to assign the router an IP address in your target IP range. See “Advanced
option” on page 3-8.
■
If all of the above steps fail to resolve the problem, reset the router to its factory default settings and rerun
SmartStart.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting up your Router with the SmartStart Wizard 3-5
When the test is successful, you will see the “Manual or Automated Connection Profile screen,” shown below.
Manual or Automated Connection Profile screen. The
SmartStart Wizard asks you to select a method of
creating a connection profile. The connection profile tells
your router how to communicate with your ISP or other
remote site, such as your corporate office. You can select
either ISP Automation or Manual Entry.
Options are explained below.
Make your selection and click Ne xt.
If you select ISP Automation, SmartStart offers you the option of choosing one of several Netopia ISP
partners that support the Netopia R2020. You then see the “Internet Service Provider Selection screen” on
page 3-5.
If you select Manual Entry, you must be prepared with the following information. You must enter:
■
■
■
■
Your dial-up number, sometimes referred to as an ISP POP number
Your Login name and Password. (These are case-sensitive.)
Any PBX or Centrex phone system dialing prefix (such as “9” for an outside line)
Your PPP authentication method. Options are: PAP (Password Authentication Protocol), CHAP (Challenge
■
■
Your Domain Name Server (DNS); this entry must be an IP address in dotted decimal format. (for example,
192.168.4.10, not “joe.isp.com”)
Optionally, an alternate DNS if your ISP provided one
If you select Manual Entry, the “Connection Profile screen,” shown “Connection Profile screen” on page 3-6
appears.
Internet Service Provider Selection screen. Select an
ISP from the list of Netopia ISP partners who have
provided information for automatic setup. Choose
Ge ne ric ISP if your ISP is not included on the list. If you
don’t already have an account with the selected ISP, call
and order service using the listed customer service
telephone number.
When you have done this, click Ne xt.
■
Most ISPs will provide you with information for you to enter in the “Connection Profile screen” on page 3-6
over the phone using the toll-free phone number shown in the scrolling list. Generally, they will provide you
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-6 User’s Reference Guide
with:
■
■
Your dial-up number, sometimes referred to as an ISP POP number
Your Login name and Password. (These are case-sensitive.)
Note : Your ISP may provide you with additional values such as “Remote IP Gateway” or “Subnet Mask.”
These entries are not required for the SmartStart Wizard to configure your router.
If you have a PBX or Centrex phone system, you may need a dialing prefix (such as “9” for an outside line).
You will enter that information in the “Connection Profile screen,” shown below.
Connection Profile screen. Enter your ISP-supplied
configuration information mentioned above. All fields
must be filled in except the Alternate DNS field if your ISP
does not provide one. If your ISP appeared in the
your ISP will already have provided much of the
information required for the connection, and these fields
will appear grayed-out.
When you have done this, click Ne xt.
The “Name and Password screen” on page 3-6 appears;
this is where you enter the username and password for
your connection to your ISP.
Name and Password screen. Enter the username and
password that identifies you to your ISP. Your name and
password can be up to 32 characters each.
Note : Some automated profiles already specify name and
you and automatically skipped.
When you have done this, click Ne xt.
The SmartStart Wizard then posts your connection profile
information to your router.
Now the “Connection Profile Test screen,” (shown below)
appears. It allows you to test your connection to your ISP
using the connection profile you have just created.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting up your Router with the SmartStart Wizard 3-7
Connection Profile Test screen. SmartStart tests your
connection profile by attempting to connect to your ISP.
To test the connection profile with your ISP, click Ne xt.
While the test is running, SmartStart reports its progress
in a brief succession of dialog boxes as described below.
Available Line Test Progress screen. SmartStart tests to
see if the router can place calls on your telephone line.
While it is testing the connection, a dialog box is
displayed and the LEDs flash.
Connection Test Progress screen. SmartStart displays a
dialog box showing you that your connection profile is
being tested. If this test fails, check the physical
connections between the computer, the router, and the
wall jack or jacks. Check for errors in any manual entries
you made during the configuration process.
Final screen. When the connection tests successfully,
SmartStart displays a screen telling you that your
configuration is now complete.
In most cases, this SmartStart configuration is all that you need to get your router up and running and
connected to the Internet. However, you may want to take advantage of additional features or special
configuration options available through the console-based configuration interface. For detailed instructions, see
“Console-based Management” on page 5-1.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-8 User’s Reference Guide
Advanced option
Router IP Address screen. If you selected the Advanced
page 3-4, SmartStart asks you to choose between
entering the router’s current IP address and assigning an
IP address to the router.
If the router has already been assigned an IP address,
select the first radio button. If you do this, the “Known IP
Address screen,” appears (shown below.)
If you want to reconfigure the router with a new IP address
and subnet mask, select the second radio button. If you
do this, the “New IP Address screen” on page 3-8
appears.
When you have done this, click Ne xt.
Known IP Address screen. SmartStart displays a
recommended address for the router based on the IP
address of the computer.
recommended address.
When you have done this, click Ne xt.
SmartStart tests the connection to your router.
SmartStart then returns you to an “Connection Profile
screen” on page 3-6.
New IP Address screen. If you want to change the router’s
IP address, you enter the new IP address, the subnet mask,
and the router’s serial number in this screen. Remember,
the serial number is on the bottom of the router. It is also
found in your documentation folio.
Note : Forcing a new IP address may turn off the Netopia
R2020’s IP address serving capabilities, if you assign an IP
address and subnet mask outside the router’s current IP
address serving pool. The Netopia R2020 does not allow
caution.
When you have done this, click Ne xt.
SmartStart forces the new IP address into the router, tests the connection, and then resets the
router.
SmartStart then returns you to the “Manual or Automated Connection Profile screen” on page 3-5.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting up your Router with the SmartStart Wizard 3-9
Sharing the Connection
Configuring TCP/IP on Windows 95, 98, or NT computers
Configuring TCP/ IP on a Windows computer requires the following:
■
■
An Ethernet card (also known as a network adapter)
The TCP/ IP protocol must be “bound” to the adapter or card
Dynamic configuration (recommended)
If you configure your Netopia R2020 using SmartStart, you can accept the dynamic IP address assigned by your
router. The Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) server, which enables dynamic addressing, is enabled
by default in the router. If your PC is not set for dynamic addressing, SmartStart will offer to do this for you
when you launch it. In that case, you will have to restart your PC and relaunch SmartStart. If you configure your
PC for dynamic addressing in advance, SmartStart need only be launched once. To configure your PC for
dynamic addressing do the following:
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-10 User’s Reference Guide
1. Go to the Start
Menu/ Settings/ Control
Panels and double click
the Ne twork icon. From
the Network components
list, select the
Configuration tab.
2. Select TCP/ IP-->Your Network Card. Then select
Prope rtie s. In the TCP/ IP Properties screen (shown
below), select the IP Addre s s tab. Click “Obtain an IP
Address automatically.”
3. Click on the DNS Configuration tab. Click Dis able DNS.
DNS will be assigned by the router with DHCP.
4. Click OK in this window, and the next window. When
prompted, reboot the computer.
Note : You can also use these instructions to configure other computers on your network to accept IP addresses
served by the Netopia R2020.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting up your Router with the SmartStart Wizard 3-11
Static configuration (optional)
If you are manually configuring for a fixed or static IP address, perform the following:
1. Go to Start Menu/ Settings/ Control Panels and double click the Ne twork icon. From the Network
components list, select the Configuration tab.
2. Select TCP/ IP-->Your Network Card. Then select Properties. In the TCP/ IP Properties screen (shown below),
select the IP Addre s s tab. Click “Specify an IP Address.”
Enter the following:
IP Addre s s: 192.168.1.2
Subne t Mas k: 255.255.255.0
This address is an example of one that can be used to configure the router with the Easy option in the
SmartStart Wizard. Your ISP or network administrator may ask you to use a different IP address and subnet
mask.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Click on the Gate way tab (shown below).
Under “New gateway,” enter
192.168.1.1. Click Add. This is the
Netopia R2020’s pre-assigned IP
address.
Click on the DNS Configuration tab. Click Enable DNS.
Enter the following
information:
Hos t: Type the name
you want to give to
this computer.
Domain: Type your
domain name. If you
don't have a domain
name, type your ISP's
domain name; for
example,
netopia.com.
DNS Se rve r Se arch
Orde r: Type the
primary DNS IP
address given to you
by your ISP. Click
Add. Repeat this process for the secondary DNS.
Domain Suffix Se arch Orde r: Enter the same domain
name you entered above.
4. Click OK in this window, and the next window. When prompted, reboot the computer.
Note : You can also use these instructions to configure other computers on your network with manual or static
IP addresses. Be sure each computer on your network has its own IP address.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting up your Router with the SmartStart Wizard 3-13
Configuring TCP/IP on Macintosh computers
The following is a quick guide to configuring TCP/ IP for MacOS computers. Configuring TCP/ IP in a Macintosh
computer requires the following:
■
You must have either Open Transport or Classic Networking (MacTCP) installed.
Note : If you want to use the Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) server built into your Netopia
R2020 to assign IP addresses to your Macintoshes, you must be running Open Transport, standard in
MacOS 8, and optional in earlier system versions. You can have your Netopia R2020 dynamically assign IP
addresses using MacTCP; however, to do so requires that the optional AppleTalk kit be installed which can
only be done after the router is configured.
■
You must have built-in Ethernet or a third-party Ethernet card and its associated drivers installed in your
Macintosh.
Dynamic configuration (recommended)
If you configure your Netopia R2020 using SmartStart, you can accept the dynamic IP address assigned by your
router. The Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP), which enables dynamic addressing, is enabled by
default in the router. To configure your Macintosh computer for dynamic addressing do the following:
1. Go to the Apple menu. Select Control Pane ls and then
TCP/ IP.
2. With the TCP/ IP window open, go to the Edit menu and
select Us e r Mode . Choose Bas ic and click OK.
3. In the TCP/ IP window, select “Connect via: Ethernet” and
“Configure: Using DHCP Server.”
Note : You can also use these instructions to configure other computers on your network to accept IP addresses
served by the Netopia R2020.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-14 User’s Reference Guide
Static configuration (optional)
If you are manually configuring for a fixed or static IP address,
perform the following:
1. Go to the Apple menu. Select Control Pane ls and then
TCP/ IP or MacTCP.
2. With the TCP/ IP window open, go to the Edit menu and
select Us e r Mode . Choose Advance d and click OK.
Or, in the MacTCP window, select Ethe rne t and click the
More button.
3. In the TCP/ IP window or in the MacTCP/ More window, select or type information into the fields as shown in
the following table.
Option:
Connect via:
Select/ Type:
Ethernet
Configure:
Manually
IP Address:
192.168.1.2
255.255.255.0
192.168.1.1
Subnet mask:
Router address:
Name server address:
Enter the primary and secondary name
server addresses given to you by your ISP
Implicit Search Path:
Starting domain name:
Enter your domain name; if you do not have
a domain name, enter the domain name of
your ISP
4. Close the TCP/ IP or MacTCP control panel and save the settings.
5. If you are using MacTCP, you must restart the computer. If you are using Open Transport, you do not need
to restart. These are the only fields you need to modify in this screen.
Note : You can also use these instructions to configure other computers on your network with manual or static
IP addresses. Be sure each computer on your network has its own IP address.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting up your Router with the SmartStart Wizard 3-15
Dynamic configuration using MacIP (optional)
If you want to use MacIP to dynamically assign IP addresses to the Macintosh computers on your network you
must install the optional AppleTalk feature set kit.
Note: You cannot use MacIP dynamic configuration to configure your Netopia R2020 Dual Analog Router
because you must first configure the router in order to enable AppleTalk.
Once the AppleTalk kit is installed, you can configure your Macintoshes for MacIP. To configure dynamically
using MacIP, perform the following:
Using Open Transport TCP/ IP
1. Go to the Apple menu. Select Control Panels and then TCP/ IP.
2. With the TCP/ IP window open, go to the Edit menu and select User Mode. Choose Advanced and click OK.
3. In the TCP/ IP window, select or type information into the fields as shown in the following table.
TCP/ IP Option:
Connect via:
Select/ Type:
AppleTalk (MacIP)
Configure:
Using MacIP server
MacIP Server zone:
Name server address:
(select available zone)
Enter the primary and secondary name server
addresses given to you by your ISP
Implicit Search Path:
Enter your domain name; if you do not have a
Starting domain name:
domain name, enter the domain name of your ISP
4. Close the TCP/ IP control panel and save the settings.
These are the only fields you need to modify in these screens.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-16 User’s Reference Guide
Using Classic Networking (MacTCP)
1. Go to the Apple Menu. Select Control Panels and then Network.
2. In the Network window, select EtherTalk.
3. Go back to the Apple menu. Select Control Panels and then MacTCP.
4. Select EtherTalk.
From the pull-down menu under EtherTalk, select an available zone; then click the More button.
In the MacTCP/ More window select the Server radio button. If necessary, fill in the Domain Name Server
Information given to you by your administrator.
5. Restart the computer.
These are the only fields you need to modify in these screens.
Note: More information about configuring your Macintosh computer for TCP/ IP connectivity through a Netopia
R2020 can be found in Technote NIR_026, “Open Transport and Netopia Routers,” located on the Netopia Web
site.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting Your Local Area Network 4-1
Chapter 4
This chapter describes how physically to connect the Netopia R2020 to your local area network (LAN). Before
configuration for your particular LAN requirements using Console-based Management (see “Console-based
■
■
■
■
■
“Readying computers on your local network” on page 4-1
“Connecting to an Ethernet network” on page 4-3
“Adding an external modem” on page 4-4
“Connecting to a LocalTalk network” on page 4-5
Overview
You can connect the Netopia R2020 to an IP or IPX network that uses Ethernet.
If you have purchased the AppleTalk feature expansion kit, you can also connect the Router to a LocalTalk
Additionally, you can connect a third (external) modem. See “Adding an external modem,” below.
Caution!
Before connecting the Netopia R2020 to any AppleTalk LANs that contain other AppleTalk routers, you should
read “Routers and seeding” on page 12-3.
See the sections later in this chapter for details on how to connect the Netopia R2020 to different types of
networks.
Readying computers on your local network
PC and Macintosh computers must have certain components installed before they can communicate through
the Netopia R2020. The following illustration shows the minimal requirements for a typical PC or Macintosh
computer.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-2 User’s Reference Guide
Application software
TCP/ IP stack
Ethernet/ EtherTalk/ LocalTalk Driver
Your PC
or Macintosh
computer
To the Netopia R2020
newsgroups, etc. These applications may require some configuration. Examples include the Eudora e-mail
TCP/ IP stack: This is the software that lets your PC or Macintosh communicate using Internet protocols.
TCP/ IP stacks must be configured with some of the same information you used to configure the Netopia
R2020. There are a number of TCP/ IP stacks available for PC computers. Windows 95 includes a built-in
TCP/ IP stack. See “Configuring TCP/ IP on Windows 95, 98, or NT computers” on page 3-9. Macintosh
computers use either MacTCP or Open Transport. See “Configuring TCP/ IP on Macintosh computers” on
page 3-13.
Ethernet: Ethernet hardware and software drivers enable your PC or Macintosh computer to communicate on
the LAN.
EtherTalk and LocalTalk: These are AppleTalk protocols used over Ethernet.
Once the Netopia R2020 is properly configured and connected to your LAN, PC and Macintosh computers that
have their required components in place will be able to connect to the Internet or other remote IP networks.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting Your Local Area Network 4-3
Connecting to an Ethernet network
The Netopia R2020 supports Ethernet connections through its eight Ethernet ports. The Router automatically
detects which Ethernet port is in use.
10Base-T
You can connect a standard 10Base-T Ethernet network to the Netopia R2020 using any of its available
Ethernet ports.
Netopia R2020 back panel
Ethernet
8
4
7
3
6
2
5
1
Auxiliary
Console
Power
Line 2
Line 1
Normal/Uplink
1
The Netopia R2020 in a 10Base-T network
To connect your 10Base-T network to the Netopia
R2020 through an Ethernet port, use a 10Base-T
cable with RJ-45 connectors.
8
Ethernet
1
If you have more than eight devices to connect,
you can attach additional devices using another
10Base-T hub.
Nor-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-4 User’s Reference Guide
If you add devices connected through a hub, connect the hub to Ethernet port number 1 on the Netopia R2020
and set the Normal/ Uplink switch to Uplink.
8
Ethernet
1
Nor-
PC
Macintosh
PC
10Base-T
Hub
Adding an external modem
You may wish to add a third (external) modem to gain additional speed for your Internet connection. You will
need to obtain the special external modem cable either from your reseller or directly from Netopia. Refer to the
sheet of optional feature set add-ons in your Netopia R2020 documentation folio.
Netopia R2020 Auxiliary port for connecting a third modem
Ethernet
8
4
7
3
6
2
5
1
Auxiliary
Console
Power
Telco 2
Telco 1
Normal/Uplink
1
Auxiliary connection port
By default, the Auxiliary port on your Netopia R2020 is enabled for an external asynchronous modem. This
means that all you have to do is connect your modem to the Auxiliary port and configure its settings in the Line
Configuration screens under the WAN Configuration menu. For detailed configuration instructions see
“Specifying telephone connections” on page 8-1.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting Your Local Area Network 4-5
For pinout information on the HD-15 to DB-25 modem cable, see “Pinouts for Auxiliary Port Modem Cable,” in
Appendix F, “Technical Specifications and Safety Information.”
Connecting to a LocalTalk network
If you have purchased the AppleTalk feature expansion kit, you can also connect the Router to an AppleTalk
network that uses either Ethernet or LocalTalk. Refer to the sheet of optional feature set add-ons in your
Netopia R2020 documentation folio.
The AppleTalk feature expansion kit includes a dual RJ-11 PhoneNET® connector that attaches to the Auxiliary
port on the Netopia R2020.
Netopia R2020 Auxiliary port for connecting to LocalTalk
Ethernet
8
4
7
3
6
2
5
1
Auxiliary
Console
Power
Line 2
Line 1
Normal/Uplink
1
Auxiliary connection port
HD-15 (female)
Connect the male HD-15 end of the LocalTalk cable to the Auxiliary port on your Netopia R2020. Connect the
other end of the cable to your LocalTalk network. You can use only one connection on the Auxiliary port. You
cannot use both the PhoneNET connector and an external modem.
If your LocalTalk network is not based on standard PhoneNET cabling, use a PhoneNET-to-LocalTalk adaptor
cable available from Farallon division of Netopia. Connect the adaptor cable’s RJ-11 connector to the AppleTalk
cable’s PhoneNet connector. Connect the cable’s mini-DIN-3 connector to your LocalTalk network.
Be sure to observe the standard rules governing maximum cable lengths and limits on the number of nodes on
a PhoneNET network. The dual RJ-11 PhoneNET connector allows insertion in the LocalTalk daisy chain, or at
the end. If the device is connected at the end of the daisy chain, you must install the accompanying terminator.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-6 User’s Reference Guide
Wiring guidelines for PhoneNET cabling
22 gauge
.642 mm
24 gauge
.510 mm
26 gauge
.403 mm
Topology
daisy chain
n/ a
n/ a
1800 ft.
549 m
backbone
4500 ft.
1372 m
3000 ft.
229 m
1800 ft.
549 m
4-branch passive star*
1125 ft.
750 ft.
450 ft.
LocalTalk StarController
12-branch active star
3000 ft.
914 m
2000 ft.
610 m
1200 ft.
366 m
* distance is per branch
For detailed configuration instructions see “AppleTalk Setup” on page 12-1.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Console-based Management 5-1
Chapter 5
Console-based Management
Console-based management is a menu-driven interface for the capabilities built in to the Netopia R2020.
Console-based management provides access to a wide variety of features that the router supports. You can
customize these features for your individual setup. This chapter describes how to access and navigate the
This section covers the following topics:
■
■
■
“Connecting through a Telnet session” on page 5-2
“Connecting a local terminal console cable to your router” on page 5-3
“Navigating through the console screens” on page 5-4
Console-based management screens contain seven entry points to the Netopia Router configuration and
monitoring features. The entry points are displayed in the Main Menu shown below:
Netopia R2020 v4.4
Easy Setup...
WAN Configuration...
System Configuration...
Utilities & Diagnostics...
Statistics & Logs...
Quick Menus...
Quick View...
You always start from this main screen.
■
■
The Easy Setup menus display and permit changing the values contained in the default Connection Profile
you created when you ran the SmartStart Wizard for initial configuration. Experienced users can also use
Easy Setup to initially configure the router directly through a console session without using SmartStart.
Easy Setup menus contain up to five descendant screens for viewing or altering these values. The number
of screens depends on whether you have optional features installed.
The WAN Configuration menu displays and permits changing your Connection Profile(s), creating or
deleting additional Connection Profiles, and configuring or reconfiguring the manner in which you may be
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-2 User’s Reference Guide
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
Filter Sets. See “Security” on page 14-1.
SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol). See “SNMP” on page 13-12.
Security. See “Security” on page 14-1.
Upgrade Feature Set. See “Upgrade Feature Set” on page 7-12.
Logging. See “Logging” on page 7-13.
■
The Utilities & Diagnostics menus provide a selection of tools for monitoring and diagnosing the router's
behavior, as well as updating the firmware and rebooting the system. See “Utilities and Diagnostics” on
page 15-1 for detailed information.
■
■
■
The Statistics & Logs menus display several sets of tables and device logs that show information about
your router, your network and their history. See “Statistics & Logs” on page 13-4 for detailed information.
The Quick Menus screen is a shortcut entry point to the most commonly used configuration menus that
are accessed through the other menu entry points.
The Quick View menu displays at a glance current real-time operating information about your router. See
“Quick View status overview” on page 13-1 for detailed information.
Connecting through a Telnet session
Features of the Netopia R2020 may be configured through the console screens.
■
a network connection locally to the router or IP access to the router through the WAN port. This could be
the same connection as the one you used with SmartStart.
Note: Alternatively, you can have a direct serial console cable connection using the provided console cable
for your platform (PC or Macintosh) and the “Console” port on the back of the router. For more information
on attaching the console cable, see “Connecting a local terminal console cable to your router” on
page 5-3.
■
Telnet software installed on the computer you will use to configure the router
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Console-based Management 5-3
Configuring Telnet software
If you are configuring your router using a Telnet session, your computer must be running a Telnet software
program.
■
If you connect a PC with Microsoft Windows, you can use a Windows Telnet application or simply run Telnet
from the Start menu.
■
If you connect a Macintosh computer, you can use the NCSA Telnet program supplied on the Netopia
R2020 CD. You install NCSA Telnet by simply dragging the application from the CD to your hard disk.
Connecting a local terminal console cable to your router
You can perform all of the System Configuration activities for your Netopia R2020 through a local serial console
connection using terminal emulation software, such as HyperTerminal provided with Windows95 on the PC, or
ZTerm, included on the Netopia CD, for the Macintosh.
The Netopia R2020 back panel has a connector labeled “Console” for attaching the Router to either a PC or
Macintosh computer via the serial port on the computer. (On a Macintosh, the serial port is called the Modem
port or the Printer port.) This connection lets you use the computer to configure and monitor the Netopia R2020
via the console screens.
Ethernet
8
4
7
3
6
2
5
1
Auxiliary
Console
Power
Line 2
Line 1
Normal/Uplink
1
Console connection port
DE-9 (male)
To connect the Netopia R2020 to your computer for serial console communication, use the supplied dual
console cable connector end appropriate to your platform:
■
■
■
one DE-9 connector end attaches to a PC
the mini-DIN8 connector end attaches to a Macintosh
the DE-9 end of the Console cable attaches to the Netopia R2020’s Console port
If you are configuring your router via a terminal session, your computer must be running a standard terminal
emulation or communications software program, such as those used with modems.
■
If you connect a PC with Microsoft Windows 95 or NT, you can use the HyperTerminal application bundled
with the operating system.
■
If you connect a Macintosh computer, you can use the ZTerm terminal emulation program on the supplied
Netopia R2020 CD.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-4 User’s Reference Guide
Launch your terminal emulation software and configure the communications software for the following values.
These are the default communication parameters that the Netopia R2020 uses.
Parameter
Terminal type
Suggested Value
PC: ANSI, VT100
Mac: ANSI, VT-100, or VT-200
Data bits
Parity
8
None
Stop bits
Speed
1
Options are: 9600, 19200, 38400, or 57600 bits per second
None
Flow Control
Note: The router firmware contains an autobaud detection feature. If you are at any screen on the
serial console, you can change your baud rate and press Return (HyperTerminal for the PC
requires a disconnect). The new baud rate is displayed at the bottom of the screen.
Navigating through the console screens
Use your keyboard to navigate the Netopia R2020’s configuration screens, enter and edit information, and
make choices. The following table lists the keys to use to navigate through the console screens.
To...
Use These Keys...
Move through selectable items in a screen or pop-up menu
Up, Down, Left, and
Right Arrow
To set a change to a selected item or open a pop-up menu of
options for a selected item like entering an upgrade key
Return or Enter
Change a toggle value (Yes/ No, On/ Off)
Restore an entry or toggle value to its previous value
Move one item up
Tab
Esc
Up arrow or Control + k
Move one item down
Down arrow or Control + j
Display a dump of the device event log
Display a dump of the WAN event log
Refresh the screen
Control + e
Control + f
Control + L
Go to topmost selectable item
Go to bottom right selectable item
<
>
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Easy Setup 6-1
Chapter 6
Easy Setup
This chapter describes how to use the Easy Setup console screens on your Netopia R2020 Dual Analog Router.
The Easy Setup console screens provide an alternate method for experienced users to set up their router’s
Connection Profiles without using SmartStart. After completing the Easy Setup console screens, your router will
be ready to connect to the Internet or another remote site.
Easy Setup console screens
Using three Easy Setup console screens, you can:
■
■
■
modify a Connection Profile for your Router for the connection to your ISP or remote location;
set up IP addresses and IP address serving;
How to access the Easy Setup console screens
To access the console screens, Telnet to the Netopia Router over your Ethernet network, or you can physically
connect with a serial console cable and access the Netopia Router with a terminal emulation program. See
“Connecting through a Telnet session” on page 5-2 or “Connecting a local terminal console cable to your
router” on page 5-3.
Note: Before continuing, make sure that you have the information that your telephone service provider, ISP, or
network administrator has given you to configure the Netopia Router.
The Netopia Router’s first console screen, Main Menu, appears in the terminal emulation window of the
attached PC or Macintosh when:
■
■
■
the Netopia Router is turned on
the computer is connected to the Netopia Router
the Telnet or terminal emulation software is running and configured correctly.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-2 User’s Reference Guide
A screen similar to the following appears:
Netopia R2020 v4.4
Easy Setup...
WAN Configuration...
System Configuration...
Utilities & Diagnostics...
Statistics & Logs...
Quick Menus...
Quick View...
Return/Enter goes to Easy Setup -- minimal configuration.
If you do not see the Main Menu, verify that:
■
the computer used to view the console screen has its serial port connected to the Netopia R2020’s
“Console” port or an Ethernet connection to one of its Ethernet ports. See “Connecting a local terminal
console cable to your router” on page 5-3 or “Connecting through a Telnet session” on page 5-2.
■
■
the Telnet or terminal emulation software is configured for the recommended values.
if you are connecting via the Console port, the console’s serial port is not being used by another device,
such as an internal modem, or an application. Turn off all other programs (other than your terminal
emulation program) that may be interfering with your access to the port.
■
you have entered the correct password, if necessary. Your Netopia R2020’s console access may be
password protected from a previous configuration. See your system administrator to obtain the password.
See Appendix A, “Troubleshooting,” for more suggestions.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Easy Setup 6-3
Beginning Easy Setup
To begin Easy Setup, select Easy Setup in the Main Menu, then press Return.
The Easy Setup Profile screen appears.
Connection Profile 1: Easy Setup Profile
Number to Dial:
212 555 1212
Address Translation Enabled:
IP Addressing...
Yes
Numbered
Local WAN IP Address:
Local WAN IP Mask:
Remote IP Address:
Remote IP Mask:
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
127.0.0.2
255.255.255.255
PPP Authentication...
Send User Name:
Send Password:
PAP
PREVIOUS SCREEN
NEXT SCREEN
Enter the directory number for the remote network connection.
Enter basic information about your WAN connection with this screen.
Easy Setup profile
The Easy Setup Profile screen is where you configure the parameters that control the Netopia R2020’s
connection to a specific remote destination, usually an ISP or a corporate site.
On a Netopia R2020 Dual Analog Router you can add up to 15 more connection profiles, for a total of 16. See
“Creating a new Connection Profile” on page 7-2.
1. Select Number to Dial and enter the telephone number you received from your ISP. This is the number the
Netopia R2020 dials to reach your ISP. Enter the number as you would dial it, including any required
prefixes (such as area, access, and long-distance dialing codes). You may also use punctuation.
Note: When placing a multi-channel call, the answering equipment must either:
■
■
be in a “hunt group,” where a single telephone number services multiple lines, or
to use.
ISPs or corporate IS groups will meet these conditions. For other non-standard dialup connections, you
should verify that one or the other of these conditions is true.
2. To enable address translation, toggle Address Translation Enabled to Yes. For more information on
Network Address Translation, see “Multiple Network Address Translation and IP Setup” on page 10-1.
3. Select IP Addressing and press Return. From the pop-up menu choose Numbered or Unnumbered (the
default).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-4 User’s Reference Guide
4. Select Local WAN IP Address and enter the local WAN address your ISP gave you.
The default address is 0.0.0.0, which allows for dynamic addressing, when your ISP assigns an address
each time you connect. However, you may enter another address if you want to use static addressing.
■
■
When using numbered interfaces, the Netopia Router will use its local WAN IP address and subnet
mask to send packets to the remote router. Both routers have WAN IP addresses and subnet masks
associated with the connection.
When using unnumbered interfaces, the Netopia Router will use either its local Ethernet IP address or
its NAT address (if so configured) and subnet mask to send packets to the remote router. Neither
router has a WAN IP address or subnet mask associated with this connection.
Note: If your ISP has not given you their IP or subnet mask addresses, then you can enter an IP address
such as 127.0.0.2, and an IP subnet mask such as 255.0.0.0. With these settings the router will get this
information dynamically when it connects to the remote site.
5. If your ISP uses unnumbered (system-based routing), select Remote IP Address and enter the IP address
your ISP gave you.
Then select Remote IP Mask and enter the IP subnet mask of the remote site you will connect to.
6. Select the PPP Authentication pop-up menu and choose the type of connection security your ISP told you
to use (PAP, CHAP, PAP-TOKEN, or CACHE-TOKEN). If you choose any of these authentication methods, go
to the next step. If your ISP does not use any of these authentication methods, choose None and skip to
the last step. When you create a connection profile from Easy Setup, the default setting is PAP.
7. If your ISP uses PAP or PAP-TOKEN, select Send User Name and enter the user name your ISP gave you to
connect. If you selected PAP, select Send Password and enter your password. If you selected PAP-TOKEN,
you don’t enter the password now. Your name and password can be up to 32 characters each.
If your ISP uses CHAP, select Send Host Name and enter the user name your ISP gave you to connect. Then
select Send Secret and enter the secret (CHAP term for password) your ISP gave you.
If your ISP uses CACHE-TOKEN, select Send User Name and enter the user name your ISP gave you to
connect. Select Send Password and enter your password.
8. Select NEXT SCREEN and press Return. The IP Easy Setup screen appears.
IP Easy Setup
The IP Easy Setup screen is where you enter information about your Netopia Router’s:
■
■
■
■
■
IP address
Subnet mask
Default gateway IP address
Domain name server IP address
IP address serving information, such as the number of client IP addresses and the 1st client address
You should consult with your network administrator to obtain the information you will need. For more information
about setting up IP, see “Multiple Network Address Translation and IP Setup” on page 10-1.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Easy Setup 6-5
IP Easy Setup
Ethernet IP Address:
Ethernet Subnet Mask:
192.168.1.1
255.255.255.0
Domain Name:
Primary Domain Name Server:
0.0.0.0
Default IP Gateway:
IP Address Serving:
127.0.0.2
On
Number of Client IP Addresses:
1st Client Address:
100
192.168.1.100
PREVIOUS SCREEN
NEXT SCREEN
Enter an IP address in decimal and dot form (xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx).
Set up the basic IP & IPX attributes of your Netopia in this screen.
1. Select Ethernet IP Address and enter the first IP address from the IP address range your ISP has given
you. This will be the Netopia Router’s IP address.
If Network Address Translation is enabled in the Easy Setup connection profile, the Ethernet IP Address
defaults to an address within a range reserved by the Internet address administration authority for use
within private networks, 192.168.1.1.
Because this is a private network address, it should never be directly connected to the Internet. Using NAT
for all your connection profiles will ensure this restriction. See “Multiple Network Address Translation and
IP Setup” on page 10-1 of this guide for more information.
2. Select Ethernet Subnet Mask and enter the subnet mask your ISP has given you. The Ethernet Subnet
Mask defaults to a standard class C mask (for unlimited user models; smaller, for restricted user models).
3. Select Domain Name and enter the domain name your ISP has given you.
4. Select Primary Domain Name Server and enter the IP address your ISP has given you.
5. The Default IP Gateway defaults to the remote IP address you entered in the Easy Setup connection
profile. If the Netopia Router does not recognize the destination of any IP traffic, it forwards that traffic to
this gateway.
Do not confuse the remote IP address and the default gateway’s IP address with the block of local IP
addresses you receive from your ISP. You use the local IP addresses for the Netopia R2020’s Ethernet port
and for IP clients on your local network. The remote IP address and the default gateway’s IP address
should point to your ISP’s router.
6. To use DHCP and (if installed) MacIP address serving, toggle IP Address Serving to On.
Note: For information about dynamic IP address serving, see “Multiple Network Address Translation and IP
Setup” on page 10-1.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-6 User’s Reference Guide
7. If IP Address Serving is On, select Number of Client IP Addresses. Then enter the number of available
host addresses for the Netopia R2020 Dual Analog Router to allocate to the client computers on your
network. This number defaults to the balance of the subnet addresses above the Netopia Router’s
address.
8. If IP Address Serving is On, select 1st Client Address and enter the first IP address in the set of allocated
served IP addresses.
9. Press Return. The Easy Setup Security Configuration screen appears.
Easy Setup Security
The Easy Setup Security Configuration screen lets you password-protect your Netopia R2020. Input your Write
Access Name and Write Access Password with names or numbers totaling up to eleven digits.
If you password protect the console screens, you will be prompted to enter the name and password you have
specified every time you log in to the console screens. Do not forget your name and password. If you do, you
will be unable to access any of the configuration screens.
Additional security features are available. See “Security” on page 14-1.
Easy Setup Security Configuration
It is strongly suggested that you password-protect configuration access to your
Netopia. By entering a Name and Password pair here, access via serial,
Telnet, SNMP and Web Server will be password-protected.
Be sure to remember what you have typed here, because you will be prompted for
it each time you configure this Netopia.
You can remove an existing Name and Password by clearing both fields below.
Write Access Name:
Write Access Password:
PREVIOUS SCREEN
TO MAIN MENU
RESTART DEVICE
Configure a Configuration Access Name and Password here.
configuration settings take effect.
1. Select RESTART DEVICE. A prompt asks you to confirm your choice.
2. Select CONTINUE to restart the Netopia Router and have your selections take effect.
Note: You can also restart the system at any time by using the restart utility (see “Restarting the system” on
page 15-13) or by turning the Netopia Router off and on with the power switch.
Easy Setup is now complete.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
User’s Reference Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WAN and System Configuration 7-1
Chapter 7
WAN and System Configuration
This chapter describes how to use the console-based management screens to access and configure advanced
features of your Netopia R2020 Dual Analog Router. You can customize these features for your individual setup.
These menus provide a powerful method for experienced users to set up their router’s connection profiles and
system configuration.
The next chapter “Managing Data Calls” on page 8-1 explains more of the Netopia R2020’s special features for
■
■
■
■
“Creating a new Connection Profile” on page 7-2
“System Configuration screens” on page 7-7
“Navigating through the System Configuration screens” on page 7-8
“System Configuration features” on page 7-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-2 User’s Reference Guide
Creating a new Connection Profile
Connection Profiles define the telephone and networking protocols necessary for the router to make a remote
connection. A Connection Profile is like an address book entry describing how the router is to get to a remote
site, or how to recognize and authenticate a remote user dialing in to the router. For example, to create a new
Connection Profile, you navigate to the WAN Configuration screen from the Main Menu, and select Add
Connection Profile.
WAN
Configuration
Main
Menu
Add Connection
Profile
The Add Connection Profile screen appears.
Add Connection Profile
Profile Name:
Profile Enabled:
Office
Yes
Data Link Encapsulation is
Data Link Options...
PPP
Yes
No
IP Enabled:
IP Profile Parameters...
IPX Enabled:
Telco Options...
ADD PROFILE NOW
CANCEL
Return/Enter to discard changes you have made. Profile will not be added.
Configure a new Conn. Profile. Finished? ADD or CANCEL to exit.
On a Netopia R2020 Dual Analog Router you can add up to 15 more connection profiles, for a total of 16.
1. Select Profile Name and enter a name for this connection profile. It can be any name you wish. For
example: the name of your ISP.
2. Toggle the Profile Enabled value to Yes or No. The default is Yes.
3. If you are creating a Virtual Private Network (VPN) profile (see “Virtual Private Networks” on page 9-1), you
can choose either PPTP or ATMP from the Data Link Encapsulation pop-up menu. Otherwise, accept the
default PPP.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WAN and System Configuration 7-3
4. Select Datalink Options and press Return. The Datalink Options screen appears.
Note: The Datalink Options shown below are for the default Data Link Encapsulation method PPP. (For VPN
Data Link Options see “Virtual Private Networks” on page 9-1.)
Datalink (PPP/MP) Options
Data Compression...
Standard LZS
PAP
Send Authentication...
Send User Name:
Send Password:
Receive User Name:
Receive Password:
Maximum Packet Size:
1500
In this Screen you will configure the PPP/MP specific connection params.
You can accept the defaults, or change them if you wish.
Data Compression options are: Ascend LZS, Standard LZS (the default), or None.
Send Authentication options are: PAP (Password Authentication Protocol), CHAP (Challenge Handshake
Authentication Protocol), the secure token protocols PAP-TOKEN and CACHE-TOKEN, or None, the default.
For more information about token security see “Token Security Authentication” on page 14-36. If your ISP
does not use any of these authentication methods, choose None. The Send Authentication information is
used to authenticate your call to your service provider. The Receive User Name and Password information
is used to authenticate attempted dial-in connections.
■
If your ISP uses PAP or PAP-TOKEN, select Send User Name and enter the user name your ISP gave you
to connect. If you selected PAP, select Send Password and enter your password. If you selected
PAP-TOKEN, you don’t enter the password now.
■
■
If your ISP uses CHAP, select Send Host Name and enter the user name your ISP gave you to connect.
Then select Send Secret and enter the secret (CHAP term for password) your ISP gave you.
If your ISP uses CACHE-TOKEN, select Send User Name and enter the user name your ISP gave you to
connect. Select Send Password and enter your password.
You can specify user name and password for both outgoing and incoming calls. Your name and pass-
word can be up to 32 characters each.
■
Enter a Maximum Packet Size between 128 and 1510 bytes. 1500 is the default.
Return to the Add Connection Profile screen by pressing Escape.
5. Select IP Profile Parameters and press Return. The IP Profile Parameters screen appears.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-4 User’s Reference Guide
IP Profile Parameters
Address Translation Enabled:
IP Addressing...
Yes
Numbered
NAT Rule List...
NAT Server List...
Local WAN IP Address:
Local WAN IP Mask:
Remote IP Address:
Remote IP Mask:
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
Filter Set...
Remove Filter Set
Receive RIP:
Both
Toggle to Yes if this is a single IP address ISP account.
Configure IP requirements for a remote network connection here.
6. Toggle or enter any IP Parameters you require and return to the Add Connection Profile screen by pressing
Escape. For more information, see “Multiple Network Address Translation and IP Setup” on page 10-1.
7. If you will be connecting with an IPX remote network, toggle IPX Enabled to Yes, and press Return.
Otherwise, accept the default No.
If you enable IPX routing, an IPX Profile Parameters menu item becomes available. Select IPX Profile
Parameters and press Return. The IPX Profile Parameters screen appears.
IPX Profile Parameters
Remote IPX Network:
Path Delay:
NetBios Packet Forwarding:
00000000
10
Off
Incoming Packet Filter Set...
Outgoing Packet Filter Set...
<<NONE>>
<<NONE>>
Incoming SAP Filter Set...
Outgoing SAP Filter Set...
<<NONE>>
<<NONE>>
Periodic RIP Timer:
Periodic SAP Timer:
60
60
Configure IPX requirements for a remote network connection here.
8. Toggle or enter any IPX Parameters you require and return to the Add Connection Profile screen by pressing
Escape. For more information, see “IPX Setup” on page 11-1.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WAN and System Configuration 7-5
9. Select Telco Options and press return. the Telco Options screen appears.
NOTE: If you are creating a VPN Connection Profile, the Telco Options menu is not used and becomes
unavailable.
Telco Options
Dial...
Dial In/Out
Dialing Prefix:
Number to Dial:
Alternate Site to Dial:
Dial on Demand:
Idle Timeout (seconds):
Yes
300
CNA Validation Number:
Callback:
No
Return/Enter to allow dialing out, dialing in, or both.
In this Screen you configure options for the ways you will establish a link.
Select Dial and press Return. A pop-up menu appears. You can select the dialing options for this
Connection Profile as Dial In Only, Dial Out Only, or Dial In/ Out.
You can:
■
■
■
■
add a dialing prefix, such as “9” for an outside line on a PBX or Centrex phone system.
add the number to dial for this Connection Profile
add an alternate number to use if the first number fails to connect
change any of the default parameter settings
When you are finished with these entries, press Escape to return to the Add Connection Profile screen.
10. Select ADD PROFILE NOW and press Return. Your new Connection Profile will be added.
Viewing or editing connection profiles
If you want to view or edit the connection profiles in your router, return to the WAN Configuration screen, and
select Display/ Change Connection Profile. The list of Connection Profiles is displayed in a scrolling pop-up
screen.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-6 User’s Reference Guide
WAN Configuration
+-Profile Name---------------------IP Address----IPX Network-+
+------------------------------------------------------------+
| Easy Setup Profile
127.0.0.2
0.0.0.0
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| Profile 02
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
+------------------------------------------------------------+
Up/Down Arrow Keys to select, ESC to dismiss, Return/Enter to Edit.
Select the connection profile you want to view or edit and press Return. The profile is displayed, and you can
change any of the parameters. Changes take effect immediately without rebooting the router.
Change Connection Profile
Profile Name:
Profile Enabled:
Profile 01
Yes
Data Link Encapsulation...
Data Link Options...
PPP
Yes
No
IP Enabled:
IP Profile Parameters...
IPX Enabled:
Telco Options...
Return/Enter to configure options for your WAN connection.
Modify Connection Profile here. Changes are immediate.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WAN and System Configuration 7-7
Deleting connection profiles
You can delete a connection profile by returning to the WAN Configuration menu and selecting Delete
Connection Profile.
A scrolling pop-up screen appears. Select the profile you want to delete and press Return. When prompted,
select CONTINUE, and the connection profile will be deleted.
WAN Configuration
+-Profile Name---------------------IP Address----IPX Network-+
+------------------------------------------------------------+
| Easy Setup Profile
127.0.0.2
0.0.0.0
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| Profile 02
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
+------------------------------------------------------------+
Up/Down Arrow Keys to select, ESC to dismiss, Return/Enter to Delete.
You can connect to the Netopia R2020’s System Configuration screens:
■
■
Using Telnet with the Router’s Ethernet port IP address
Through the console port, using a local terminal (see “Connecting a local terminal console cable to your
router” on page 5-3)
You can also retrieve the Netopia R2020’s configuration information and remotely set its parameters using the
Simple Network Management Protocol (see “SNMP” on page 13-12).
Open a Telnet connection to the IP address you set in the router with SmartStart, for example “192.168.1.1.”
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-8 User’s Reference Guide
The console screen will open to the Main Menu, similar to the screen shown below:
Netopia R2020 v4.4
Easy Setup...
WAN Configuration...
System Configuration...
Utilities & Diagnostics...
Statistics & Logs...
Quick Menus...
Quick View...
Return/Enter goes to Easy Setup -- minimal configuration.
You always start from this main screen.
Navigating through the System Configuration screens
To help you find your way to particular screens, some sections in this guide begin with a graphical path guide
similar to the following example:
System
Configuration
Main
Menu
Network Protocols
Setup
IP Setup
This particular path guide shows how to get to the Network Protocols Setup screens. The path guide represents
these steps:
1. Beginning in the Main Menu, select the System Configuration item and press Return.
2. Select the Network Protocols item in the System Configuration screen and press Return.
3. Select the IP Setup item in the Network Protocols Setup screen and press Return.
To go back in this sequence of screens, use the Escape key.
System Configuration features
SmartStart may be all you need to configure your Netopia R2020. Some users, however, require advanced
settings or prefer manual control over the default selections that SmartStart automatically chooses. For these
users, the Netopia R2020 provides System Configuration options.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WAN and System Configuration 7-9
To help you determine whether you need to use the System Configuration options, review the following
requirements. If you have one or more of these needs, use the System Configuration options described in the
later chapters.
■
Two or more outgoing connection profiles to connect to more than one remote location (for example, to
connect to the Internet and to a network at another office).
■
■
■
■
■
■
System Configuration of dynamic IP address distribution through DHCP, MacIP, or BootP.
Customized incoming call profile to control received calls.
Scheduled connections.
Greater network security through the use of filters, CallerID, callback, and SecurID.
System Configuration of AppleTalk LAN settings.
System Configuration of connections to AppleTalk networks through the Internet or any IP network, using
AURP (AppleTalk “tunneling”).
■
System Configuration of connection profiles. See the table below for a partial list of the options available
through System Configuration.
Layer Category
Parameter Type
Options
Default settings
Protocol Layer
IP Parameters
Filter Sets:
Basic Firewall
NetBIOS Filter
Receive RIP:
Both
Off
Transmit RIP:
IPX Parameters
Path Delay:
1 second
No
NetBios Packet Forwarding:
Incoming/ outgoing Packet &
SAP filter:
On
Periodic RIP/ SAP timers:
60 seconds
Standard LZS
PAP
Datalink Layer
PPP/ MP Parameters Data Compression:
Send Authentication:
Channel Usage:
Dynamic
BAP
Bandwidth Allocation:
Maximum Packet Size:
1500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-10 User’s Reference Guide
Layer Category
Parameter Type
Options
Dial is set to:
Default settings
Physical Layer
Telco Parameters
Dial In/ Out
Yes
Dial On Demand is set to:
Callback is set to:
No
Idle Time-out is set for:
300 seconds
To access the System Configuration screens, select System Configuration in the Main Menu, then press
Return.
The System Configuration Menu screen appears:
System Configuration
Network Protocols Setup...
Filter Sets (Firewalls)...
IP Address Serving...
Date and Time...
Console Configuration...
SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol)...
Security...
Upgrade Feature Set...
Logging...
Return/Enter to configure Networking Protocols (such as TCP/IP).
Use this screen if you want options beyond Easy Setup.
Network Protocols Setup
These screens allow you to configure your network’s use of the standard networking protocols:
■
■
■
IP: details are given in “Multiple Network Address Translation and IP Setup” on page 10-1.
IPX: details are given in “IPX Setup” on page 11-1.
AppleTalk: details are given in “AppleTalk Setup” on page 12-1.
Filter Sets (Firewalls)
These screens allow you to configure security on your network by means of filter sets and a basic firewall.
■
Details are given in “Security” on page 14-1.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WAN and System Configuration 7-11
IP Address Serving
These screens allow you to configure IP Address serving on your network by means of DHCP, WANIP, BootP, and
with the optional AppleTalk kit, MacIP.
■
Details are given in “IP address serving” on page 10-35.
Date and Time
You can set the system’s date and time in the Set Date and Time screen.
Select Date and Time in the System Configuration screen and press Return to go to the Set Date and Time
screen.
Set Date and Time
System Date Format:
Current Date (MM/DD/YY):
MM/DD/YY
6/14/1999
System Time Format:
Current Time:
AM or PM:
AM/PM
02:48
PM
Follow these steps to set the system’s date and time:
1. Select System Date Format and press Return. A pop-up menu offers you the choice of date format:
MM/ DD/ YY (the default), DD/ MM/ YY, or YY/ MM/ DD.
2. Select Current Date and enter the date in the appropriate format. Use one- or two-digit numbers for the
month and day, and the last two digits of the current year. The date’s numbers must be separated by
forward slashes (/ ).
3. Select Current Time and enter the time in the format HH:MM, where HH is the hour (using either the
12-hour or 24-hour clock) and MM is the minutes.
4. Select AM or PM and choose AM or PM.
Console Configuration
You can change the default terminal communications parameters to suit your requirements.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-12 User’s Reference Guide
To go to the Console Configuration screen, select Console Configuration in the System Configuration screen.
Console Configuration
Baud Rate...
57600
Yes
Hardware Flow Control:
SET CONFIG NOW
CANCEL
Follow these steps to change a parameter’s value:
1. Select the parameter you want to change.
2. Select a new value for the parameter. Return to step 1 if you want to configure another parameter.
3. Select SET CONFIG NOW to save the new parameter settings. Select CANCEL to leave the parameters
unchanged and exit the Console Configuration screen.
SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol)
These screens allow you to monitor and configure your network by means of a standard Simple Network
Management Protocol (SNMP) agent.
■
Security
These screens allow you to add users and define passwords on your network.
■
Details are given in “Security” on page 14-1.
Upgrade Feature Set
You can upgrade your Netopia R2020 by adding new feature sets through the Upgrade Feature Set utility.
See the release notes that came with your router or feature set upgrade or visit the Netopia web site at
www.netopia.com for information on new feature sets, how to obtain them, and how to install them on your
Netopia R2020.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WAN and System Configuration 7-13
Logging
You can configure a UNIX-compatible syslog client to report a number of subsets of the events entered in the
router’s WAN Event History. See “WAN Event History” on page 13-6.The Syslog client (for the PC only) is
supplied as a .ZIP file on the Netopia CD.
Select Logging from the System Configuration menu.
The Logging Configuration screen appears.
Logging Configuration
WAN Event Log Options
Log Boot and Errors:
Log Line Specific:
Log Connections:
Log PPP, DHCP, CNA:
Log IP and IPX:
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Syslog Parameters
Syslog Enabled:
Hostname or IP Address:
Facility...
No
Local 0
Return/Enter accepts * Tab toggles * ESC cancels.
By default, all events are logged in the event history.
■
■
■
■
By toggling each event descriptor either Yes or No, you can determine which ones are logged and which are
ignored.
You can enable or disable the syslog client dynamically. When enabled, it will report any appropriate and
previously unreported events.
You can specify the syslog server’s address either in dotted decimal format or as a DNS name up to 63
characters.
You can specify the UNIX syslog Facility to use by selecting the Facility pop-up.
Installing the Syslog client
The Goodies folder on the Netopia CD contains a Syslog client daemon program that can be configured to
report the WAN events you specified in the Logging Configuration screen.
To install the Syslog client daemon, exit from the graphical Netopia CD program and locate the CD directory
structure through your Windows desktop, or through Windows Explorer. Go to the Goodies directory on the CD
and locate the Sds15000.exe program. This is the Syslog daemon installer. Run the Sds15000.exe program
and follow the on screen instructions for enabling the Windows Syslog daemon.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-14 User’s Reference Guide
When using syslog with a switched connection, if the host you are logging into is located on the WAN, the act of
tearing down the call generates WAN events. This requires the torn down line to come back up, effectively
making a call that will go up and down continuously. This will only occur when the router tears down the call. If
the call is cleared remotely the redial restriction takes precedence and the packets are transparently aged out
of the queue.
The following screen shows a sample syslog dump of WAN events:
April 5 10:14:06 tsnext.netopia.com Link 1 down: PPP PAP failure
April 5 10:14:06 tsnext.netopia.com >>Issued Speech Setup Request from our DN: 5108645534
April 5 10:14:06 tsnext.netopia.com Requested Disc. from DN: 917143652500
April 5 10:14:06 tsnext.netopia.com Received Clear Confirm for our DN: 5108645534
April 5 10:14:06 tsnext.netopia.com Link 1 down: Manual disconnect
April 5 10:14:06 tsnext.netopia.com >>Issued Speech Setup Request from our DN: 5108645534
April 5 10:14:06 tsnext.netopia.com Requested Disc. from DN: 917143652500
April 5 10:14:06 tsnext.netopia.com Received Clear Confirm for our DN: 5108645534
April 5 10:14:06 tsnext.netopia.com Link 1 down: No answer
April
5
10:14:06
tsnext.netopia.com
--Device
restarted-----------------------------------------
April 5 10:14:06 tsnext.netopia.com >>WAN: 56K Modem 1 activated at 115 Kbps
April 5 10:14:06 tsnext.netopia.com Connect Confirmed to our DN: 5108645534
April 5 10:14:06 tsnext.netopia.com PPP: Channel 1 up, Answer Profile name: Default Profile
April 5 10:14:06 tsnext.netopia.com
PPP: NCP up, session 1, Channel 1 Final (fallback)
negotiated auth: Local PAP , Remote NONE
April 5 10:14:06 tsnext.netopia.com PPP: PAP we accepted remote, Channel 1 Remote name: guest
April 5 10:14:06 tsnext.netopia.com
0000C5700624 0
PPP: MP negotiated, session 1 Remote EDO: 06 03
April 5 10:14:06 tsnext.netopia.com PPP: CCP negotiated, session 1, type: Ascend LZS Local
mode: 1, Remote mode: 1
April 5 10:14:06 tsnext.netopia.com PPP: BACP negotiated, session 1 Local MN: FFFFFFFF, Remote
MN: 00000001
April 5 10:14:06 tsnext.netopia.com
local: 192.168.1.1
PPP: IPCP negotiated, session 1, rem: 192.168.10.100
April 5 10:14:06 tsnext.netopia.com >>WAN: 56K Modem 1 deactivated
April 5 10:14:06 tsnext.netopia.com Received Clear Ind. from DN: 5108645534, Cause: 0
April 5 10:14:06 tsnext.netopia.com Issued Clear Response to DN: 5108645534
April 5 10:14:06 tsnext.netopia.com Link 1 down: Remote clearing
April 5 10:14:06 tsnext.netopia.com PPP: IPCP down, session 1
April 5 10:14:06 tsnext.netopia.com >>Received Speech Setup Ind. from DN: (not supplied)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Managing Data Calls 8-1
Chapter 8
Managing Data Calls
You can set a Netopia Router to make scheduled connections using designated connection profiles. This is
useful for creating and controlling regularly scheduled periods when the router can be used by hosts on your
The Netopia R2020 Dual Analog Router can answer calls as well as initiate them. To answer calls, the Netopia
R2020 uses a Default Answer Profile. The Default Answer Profile controls how incoming calls are set up,
■
■
■
■
“Specifying telephone connections” on page 8-1
“Default Answer Profile for Dial-in Connections” on page 8-4
“Scheduled connections” on page 8-7
“Connection Metering” on page 8-12
Specifying telephone connections
You can configure telephone connections in the WAN Configuration screen under the Main Menu. Select WAN
(Wide Area Network) Setup.
WAN Configuration
WAN (Wide Area Network) Setup...
Display/Change Connection Profile...
Add Connection Profile...
Delete Connection Profile...
Default Answer Profile...
VPN Default Answer Profile...
Scheduled Connections...
Accounting Configuration...
Establish WAN Connection...
Disconnect WAN Connection...
Return/Enter for WAN line configuration.
From here you will configure yours and the remote sites' WAN information.
The Internal Modem Configuration screen appears.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-2 User’s Reference Guide
Internal Modem Configuration
Modem Dialing Prefix:
PBX Dialing Prefix:
ATDT
Line 1 Directory Number:
Answer on Ring Type...
Any
Any
Line 2 Directory Number:
Answer on Ring Type...
Speaker On...
Speaker Volume...
Always
2-Medium
Aux Serial Port...
Async Modem
57.6
AT&F&C1&D2E0S0=1
Data Rate (kbps)...
Aux Modem Init String:
Aux Modem Directory Number:
Enter the dialing prefix to be sent to all modems.
Enter Information supplied to you by your telephone company.
■
■
You can enter a PBX or Centrex Dialing Prefix such as “9” if you are on a PBX or Centrex phone system and
require a prefix for an outside line.
Enter the optional telephone or Directory Numbers for the two onboard modems to provide the Netopia
R2020 with the information needed to establish a two-channel call using MP or BAP. This will advise the
remote side of an inbound data call how to connect to a second channel.
Note: When placing multi-channel calls, the answering equipment must either:
■
■
be in a “hunt group,” where a single telephone number services multiple lines, or
the answering side must implement MP or BAP as a method to advise the calling side what number(s)
to use.
ISPs or corporate IS groups will meet these conditions. For other non-standard dialup connections, you
should verify that one or the other of these conditions is true.
■
You may choose to selectively Answer inbound calls, based on a distinctive ring pattern, on each onboard
modem. This permits you to set up a party line configuration where a fax machine or other device shares
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Managing Data Calls 8-3
the line, but uses a different telephone number and ring pattern. Supported options are:
Ring Type:
Any
Description:
(the default) any pattern
Ring A
Ring B
Ring C
2.0 sec ON, 4.0 sec OFF (normal North American ring pattern)
0.8 sec ON, 0.4 sec OFF, 0.8 sec ON, 4.0 sec OFF
0.4 sec ON, 0.2 sec OFF, 0.4 sec ON, 0.2 sec OFF, 0.8 sec ON, 4.0 sec
OFF
Never
the line will not answer to any ring pattern
■
You can choose when the Netopia R2020’s modem connection tones are audible. Supported options are:
Selection:
Never
Behavior:
Turns off all speaker activity and hides the Speaker Volume control.
The default. Allows call placement and handshaking tones to be heard.
Same as above, but blocks dialing tones.
Until Carrier
During
Answer
Always
Allows carrier tones to be heard, as well.
■
You can specify how to use the auxiliary serial port on the Netopia R2020’s back panel. By default, this
port is enabled for an external asynchronous modem. If you have installed the optional AppleTalk feature
set, then this port defaults to a LocalTalk connection. See “AppleTalk Setup” on page 12-1 for more
information on how to use the optional AppleTalk feature set.
Netopia R2020 back panel
Ethernet
8
4
7
3
6
2
5
1
Auxiliary
Console
Power
Line 2
Line 1
Normal/Uplink
1
Auxiliary serial port
HD-15 (female)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-4 User’s Reference Guide
For external modem applications, the Data Rate pop-up offers a variety of clock rates from 9600 to
230 Kbps. The default is 57.6 kbps.
You can also specify the Modem Init String for your modem and the Directory Number of the telephone
line connected to the third port.
Note: If you change the modem init string, you must restart the system. From the Main Menu, go to
Utilities & Diagnostics and select Restart System. The router will reboot, and your changes will be in effect.
Default Answer Profile for Dial-in Connections
The Netopia R2020 Dual Analog Router can answer calls as well as initiate them. To answer calls, the Netopia
R2020 uses a Default Answer Profile. The Default Answer Profile controls how incoming calls are set up,
authenticated, filtered, and more.
How the Default Answer Profile works
The Default Answer Profile works like a guard booth at the gate to your network: it scrutinizes incoming calls.
Like the guard booth, the Default Answer Profile allows calls based on a set of criteria that you define.
The main criterion used to check calls is whether they match one of the Connection Profiles already defined. If
PAP or CHAP authentication is being used, the default profile checks that the incoming call’s name and pass-
word/ secret match the receive name and password/ secret of a Connection Profile. If PAP or CHAP is not being
used, an incoming call is matched to a Connection Profile using the remote network’s IP address (that is, the
caller is defined as the destination of a particular connection profile).
If an incoming call is matched to an existing Connection Profile, the call is accepted. All of that Connection
Profile’s parameters, except for authentication, are adopted for the call.
You could set up the Default Answer Profile to allow calls in even if they fail to match a Connection Profile.
Continuing the guard booth analogy, this would be like removing the guards or having them wave all calls in,
regardless of their source.
If an incoming call is not required to match a connection profile, and fails to do so, it is accepted as a standard
IP connection. Accepted, unmatched calls adopt the call parameter values set in the Default Answer Profile.
To determine the call parameter values that unmatched calls will adopt, customize the Default Answer Profile
parameters in the Default Answer Profile screen.
Customizing the default profile
You can customize the Netopia Router’s default profile in the Default Answer Profile screen.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Managing Data Calls 8-5
1. Select Default Answer Profile in the WAN Configuration screen. Press Return. The Default Profile screen
appears.
Default Answer Profile
Calling Number Authentication... Preferred
Must Match a Defined Profile:
Yes
PPP Authentication...
PAP
Configure values which may be used when receiving a call in this screen.
2. To enable CNA-authentication, select Calling Number Authentication in the Default Answer Profile screen
and choose one of the following settings:
Ignored: Calling Number Authentication (CNA) is not in effect.
Preferred: This is the default setting. Authentication is attempted if the calling number is available. If
authentication fails, or the calling number is not available, the call proceeds as usual and the caller may
still connect successfully. Use this setting if you expect to receive both regular and CNA-authenticated
calls.
Required: Authentication is attempted if the calling number is available. If authentication fails, or the
calling number is not available, the Netopia Router disconnects the caller. Use this setting if you require all
calls to be CNA-authenticated.
Calling Number Authentication (CNA), is an application of CallerID. It is a method of verifying that an
incoming call is originating from an expected site. Using CNA, you can increase the security of your network
by requiring that callers not only possess the correct PPP authentication information, but also are calling
from a particular physical location.
CNA works by checking the calling number that the Netopia Router receives during the initial setup phase
of an incoming call against a set of stored numbers. Each number in the stored set is defined in a specific
connection profile. When a match occurs, the incoming call is handled by the connection profile containing
the matched number.
Using CNA can also provide cost savings because calls are not billed during the CNA phase. With CNA, a
caller can set up a connection to the Netopia Router without incurring any charges by accessing a dial-back
connection profile. If the caller’s rates are higher than those charged to the Netopia Router’s return call,
then using CNA has saved the difference.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-6 User’s Reference Guide
CNA should be available where CallerID services are available. You will need to consult with your telephone
service provider to find out if your line is provisioned for CallerID.
Also note that if the calling side has instructed the phone company to block delivery of its caller ID, the
answering side will not be able to authenticate.
If your line does not support the appropriate service, CNA may not work properly.
3. To force incoming calls to match connection profiles, select Must Match a Defined Profile and toggle it to
Yes. Incoming calls that cannot be matched to a connection profile are dropped. To allow unmatched calls
to be accepted as standard IP or IPX connections, toggle Must Match a Defined Profile to No.
If Must Match a Defined Profile is set to Yes, the answer profile only accepts calls that use the same
authentication method defined in the Authentication item. If PAP or CHAP are involved, the caller must
have a name and password or secret that match one of the connection profiles. The caller must obtain
these from you or your network administrator before initiating the call.
For example, if Must Match a Defined Profile is set to Yes, and Authentication is set to PAP, then only
incoming calls that use PAP and match a connection profile will be accepted by the answer profile.
If authentication in the Default Answer Profile is set to CHAP, the value of the CHAP Challenge Name item
must be identical to the value of the Send Host Name item of the Connection Profile to be matched by the
caller.
If Must Match a Defined Profile is set to No, Authentication is assumed to be None, even if you’ve set it
to PAP or CHAP. The answer profile uses the caller’s IP address to match a connection profile. However,
the answer profile cannot discover a caller’s subnet mask; it assumes that the caller is not subnetting its
IP address:
Class A addresses are assumed to have a mask of 255.0.0.0
Class B addresses are assumed to have a mask of 255.255.0.0
Class C addresses are assumed to have a mask of 255.255.255.0. Class C address ranges are generally
the most common subnet allocated.
If a remote network has a non-standard mask (that is, it uses subnetting), the only way for it to successfully
connect to the Netopia Router is by matching a connection profile. In other words, you will have to set up a
connection profile for that network.If Must Match a Defined Profile is set to No, you can also set the
following parameters for accepted calls that do not match a connection profile:
Call acceptance scenarios
The following are a few common call acceptance scenarios and information on how to configure the Netopia
R2020 for those purposes.
■
To accept all calls, regardless of whether they match a connection profile:
Toggle Must Match a Defined Profile to No.
To only accept calls that match a connection profile through use of a name and password (or secret):
■
■
■
■
Toggle Must Match a Defined Profile to Yes, and
Set Authentication to PAP or CHAP.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Managing Data Calls 8-7
Note: The authentication method you choose determines which connection profiles are accessible to
callers. For example, if you choose PAP, callers using CHAP or no authentication will be dropped by the
answer profile.
■
■
To allow calls that only match a connection profile’s remote IP and/ or IPX address:
■
■
Toggle Must Match a Defined Profile to Yes, and
set Authentication to None.
To not allow any incoming calls to connect to the Netopia Router:
■
■
Toggle Must Match a Defined Profile to Yes, and
Set the Dial option in the Telco Options screen of every connection profile to Dial Out Only
Scheduled connections
Main
Menu
Scheduled
Connections
WAN Configuration
You can set a Netopia Router to make scheduled connections using designated connection profiles. This is
useful for creating and controlling regularly scheduled periods when the router can be used by hosts on your
network. It is also useful for once-only connections that you want to schedule in advance.
To go to the Scheduled Connections screen, select Scheduled Connections in the WAN Configuration screen.
Scheduled Connections
Display/Change Scheduled Connection...
Add Scheduled Connection...
Delete Scheduled Connection...
Return/Enter to modify an existing Scheduled Connection.
Navigate from here to add/modify/change/delete Scheduled Connections.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-8 User’s Reference Guide
Viewing scheduled connections
To display a table of view-only scheduled connections, select Display/ Change Scheduled Connection in the
Scheduled Connections screen. Each scheduled connection occupies one row of the table.
Scheduled Connections
+-Days----Begin At---HH:MM---When----Conn. Prof. Name----Enabled-----+
+--------------------------------------------------------------------+
| mtWtfss 08:30PM
06:00 weekly Profile 01
No
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
+--------------------------------------------------------------------+
The first column in the table shows a one-letter representation of the Days of the week, from Monday (M or m)
to Sunday (S or s). If a letter representing a day is capitalized, the connection will be activated on that day; a
lower-case letter means that the connection will not be activated on that day. If the scheduled connection is
configured for a once-only connection, the word “once” will appear instead of the days of the week.
The other columns show:
■
■
■
■
■
The time of day that the connection will Begin At
The duration of the connection (HH:MM)
Whether it’s a recurring Weekly connection or used Once Only
Which connection profile (Conn. Prof.) is used to connect
Whether the scheduled connection is currently Enabled
The router checks the date and time set in scheduled connections against the system date and time.
Adding a scheduled connection
To add a new scheduled connection, select Add Scheduled Connection in the Scheduled Connections screen
and press Return. The Add Scheduled Connection screen appears.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Managing Data Calls 8-9
Add Scheduled Connection
Scheduled Connection Enable:
On
How Often...
Weekly
Forced Up
Schedule Type...
Set Weekly Schedule...
Use Connection Profile...
ADD SCHEDULED CONNECTION
CANCEL
Scheduled Connections dial remote Networks on a Weekly or Once-Only basis.
Follow these steps to configure the new scheduled connection:
■
■
■
To activate the connection, select Scheduled Connection Enable and toggle it to On. You can make the
scheduled connection inactive by toggling Scheduled Connection Enable to Off.
Decide how often the connection should take place by selecting How Often and choosing Weekly or Once
Only from the pop-up menu.
The Schedule Type item directly below How Often allows you to set the type of schedule. Options are:.
Selection:
Forced Up
Behavior:
(the default) establishes and maintains the connection for the
schedule period specified
Forced Down
tears down and prevents any connection for the schedule
period specified
Demand-Allowed
Demand-Blocked
Periodic
permits demand calls for the schedule period specified
blocks demand calls for the schedule period specified
establishes and maintains the connection for a specified
period for the duration of the scheduled connection
■
If How Often is set to Weekly, the item directly below Schedule Type reads Set Weekly Schedule. If How
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-10 User’s Reference Guide
Often is set to Once Only, the item directly below How Often reads Set Once-Only Schedule.
Set Weekly Schedule
If you set How Often to Weekly, select Set Weekly Schedule and go to the Set Weekly Schedule screen.
■
Select the days for the scheduled connection to occur and toggle them to Yes.
Set Weekly Schedule
Monday:
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Tuesday:
Wednesday:
Thursday:
Friday:
Saturday:
Sunday:
Scheduled Window Start Time:
AM or PM:
11:50
AM
Scheduled Window Duration Per Day:
00:00
■
■
Select Scheduled Window Start Time and enter the time to initiate the scheduled connection.
You must enter the time in the format H:M, where H is a one- or two-digit number representing the hour and
M is a one- or two-digit number representing the minutes. The colon is mandatory. For example, the entry
1:3 (or 1:03) would be accepted as 3 minutes after one o’clock. The entry 7:0 (or 7:00) would be accepted
as seven o’clock, exactly. The entries 44, :5, and 2: would be rejected.
■
■
Select AM or PM and choose AM or PM from the pop-up menu.
Select Scheduled Window Duration Per Day and enter the maximum duration allowed for this scheduled
connection, per call.
■
If you selected Periodic as your Schedule Type in the previous screen, an additional item “Every...”
appears. Set the period of time between connections, for example every 15 minutes.
You are finished configuring the weekly options. Return to the Add Scheduled Connection screen to continue.
Set Once-Only Schedule
If you set How Often to Once Only, select Set Once-Only Schedule and go to the Set Once-Only Schedule
screen.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Managing Data Calls 8-11
Set Once-Only Schedule
Place Call on (MM/DD/YY):
05/07/1998
Scheduled Window Start Time:
AM or PM:
11:50
AM
Scheduled Window Duration:
00:00
■
■
Select Place Call On (Date) and enter a date in the format MM/ DD/ YY or MM/ DD/ YYYY (month, day,
year).
Note: You must enter the date in the format specified. The slashes are mandatory. For example, the entry
5/ 7/ 98 would be accepted as May 7, 1998. The entry 5/ 7 would be rejected.
Select Scheduled Window Start Time and enter the time to initiate the scheduled connection.
Note: You must enter the time in the format H:M, where H is a one- or two-digit number representing the
hour and M is a one- or two-digit number representing the minutes. The colon is mandatory. For example,
the entry 1:3 (or 1:03) would be accepted as 3 minutes after one o’clock. The entry 7:0 (or 7:00) would be
accepted as seven o’clock, exactly. The entries 44, :5, and 2: would be rejected.
■
■
Select AM or PM and choose AM or PM.
Select Scheduled Window Duration and enter the maximum duration allowed for this scheduled
connection. Use the same format restrictions noted above.
You are finished configuring the once-only options. Return to the Add Scheduled Connection screen to continue.
■
In the Add Scheduled Connection screen, select Use Connection Profile and choose from the list of
connection profiles you have already created. A scheduled connection must be associated with a
connection profile to be useful. The connection profile becomes active during the times specified in the
associated scheduled connection, if any exists.
■
Select ADD SCHEDULED CONNECTION to save the current scheduled connection. Select CANCEL to exit
the Add Scheduled Connection screen without saving the new scheduled connection.
Modifying a scheduled connection
To modify a scheduled connection, select Change Scheduled Connection in the Scheduled Connections screen
to display a table of scheduled connections.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-12 User’s Reference Guide
Select a scheduled connection from the table and go to the Change Scheduled Connection screen. The
parameters in this screen are the same as the ones in the Add Scheduled Connection screen (except that ADD
SCHEDULED CONNECTION and CANCEL do not appear). To find out how to set them, see “Adding a scheduled
connection” on page 8-8.
Deleting a scheduled connection
To delete a scheduled connection, select Delete Scheduled Connection in the Scheduled Connections screen
to display a table of scheduled connections.
Select a scheduled connection from the table and press the Return key to delete it. To exit the table without
deleting the selected scheduled connection, press the Escape key.
Connection Metering
The Netopia R2020 offers system-wide and per-Connection Profile enhanced connection metering and
budgeting. You use this feature to track first minutes (an ISDN tariff factor) and additional minutes or
megabytes per time period for initiated data and voice calls, either through the Web-based management pages
or the console-based management screens.
Web-based management pages
The Web-based management pages replace the SmartView monitoring tool and add significant new features for
managing your router.
You access the Web-based management pages by launching your Web browser and entering the URL:
http:/ / router_IP_address
where router_IP_address is the address of your router. The default address is 198.162.1.1.
The System Information page appears.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Managing Data Calls 8-13
System Information page
This is the initial page you link to when you connect to the Web-based management pages.
It displays useful general information about your router:
Ethernet Address. The router’s hardware or MAC address
Firmware Version. The router’s model number and current firmware revision level
Current Date. The current date and time, as you have configured them
IP Address. The router’s internal IP address
IPX Network Address. The router’s IPX network address, if you have it enabled and are on an IPX network
The display contains two frames, a navigation frame on the left and the information and configuration page on
the right.
The left frame permits you to navigate to:
■
System
Information screen displays the router’s hardware (MAC) address, the model number and firmware ver-
sion currently installed, the current date and time, the router’s IP address, and the IPX address, if any.
Connection
“Connection Status page” on page 8-15 (for frame relay configured devices only): displays a snapshot
■
■
■
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
of the activity for your Frame relay DLCIs.
■
“Connection Status page” on page 8-15 (for switched interfaces only): displays the current state of
your switched connection.
■
“Connect/ Disconnect page” on page 8-16 (for switched interfaces only): displays a list of your Con-
nection Profiles, allowing you to initiate connections using any one of them.
■
If you have a leased line with an unswitched interface, these options do not appear.
■
■
“Router Budget Configuration page” on page 8-17: allows you to display and edit your aggregate con-
“Connection Budgets page” on page 8-18: allows you to set up and track three connection budgets for
■
Event History
■
“WAN Event History page” on page 8-21: displays the most recent events that the router reports for
your WAN connections.
■
“Device Event History page” on page 8-22: displays the most recent events that the router reports of
its own internal activity.
If you click any link in the left frame, that page is displayed in the right frame.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Managing Data Calls 8-15
Connection Status page
For switched interface connections, the Connection Status page displays information for your active Connection
Profile and, if applicable, any POTS calls currently active.
The table gives the following information:
Profile. The name you have assigned to the Connection Profile that is currently connected.
Rate. The data rate of this connection.
% Usage. The average percent use of the maximum capacity of the channels in use for the connection.
Established by. Whether the connection was locally (“Lcl”) or remotely (“Rmt”) established.
Remote IP Address. The address of the connection on the remote end.
Remote IPX Network. If you are routing IPX traffic, the address of the remote IPX source.
More Info: In order of priority, the NAT address in use for this connection, the IPX address in use (if IP is also in
use), or the ISDN caller identification (if available).
To update the information displayed, click the update this table link.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-16 User’s Reference Guide
Connect/Disconnect page
The Connect/ Disconnect page displays a list of your configured Connection Profiles and allows you to connect
or disconnect any of them.
To initiate a connection using any of the displayed Connection Profiles, simply click the Connect link.
To disconnect from an active Connection Profile, click the Disconnect link.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Managing Data Calls 8-17
Router Budget Configuration page
The Router Budget Configuration page allows you to modify the parameters for your overall connection
accounting policy.
From this page you can:
■
■
■
turn Router Budget either On or Off from the pull-down menu
change the Reset Date (day) on which the counters begin counting again
change the total aggregate Time Limit in minutes covered by all of your budgets
If you make any changes in this screen, click the Submit button.
To reset the aggregate minute counters to zero again, click the Reset button.
The table displays the following information:
Total First Minutes. The number of first minutes of outbound calls to be placed during the recording interval for
all your configured budgets
Total Additional Minutes. The total time of all outbound calls to be placed during the recording interval for all
your configured budgets
Remaining Minutes. The time remaining during the recording interval for all your configured budgets
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-18 User’s Reference Guide
Connection Budgets page
The Connection Budgets page displays information for three budgets or Connection Profiles for tracking and
controlling connection usage on a per-Connection Profile basis.
The status of your Connection Budgets is summarized on this page.
You configure your budgets in the Budget Configuration page. To configure a budget, click the Edit link for that
budget. The Connection Budget Configuration page appears. (See page 8-19.)
To view the statistics for each budget, click the Show Statistics link. The Budget Statistics page appears. (See
page 8-20.)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Managing Data Calls 8-19
Connection Budget Configuration page
You can configure budgets to be:
■
Enforced, meaning that when you reach the usage limit for the assigned time period, the Connection Profile
will allow no more connections. If the budget is not enforced, the system will merely keep track of its
usage. To enforce this budget, check the Enforced checkbox.
■
in Override mode. Checking this option allows you to exceed your budget during the current time period
without tearing down active connections. At the end of the current time period this option is automatically
deactivated. If you want to be able to exceed your enforced budget again, you must check this option for
each new time period.
Checking Override disables call blocking, even if the call is over its limit. The override flag is automatically
reset to be off at the start of a new period. This is so that you don’t need to disable Enforced to by-pass
the limit and or remember to turn it back on when the new period starts.
■
■
■
set to a predefined Limit of minutes of usage
set to the Time Period, weekly or monthly, that you specify for your own budgeting requirements
started on a specific day of the week or month by selecting the day you want to start from the pull-down
menu. If you set a weekly schedule, you choose the day of the week to start it; if you set a monthly
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-20 User’s Reference Guide
schedule, you choose the day of the month to start it.
Click the Submit button to enable your entries and be returned to the Connection Budgets page or click the
Cancel button to discard all your entries. Click the Reset button to reset all counters and archives to zero.
Budget Statistics page
You can view statistics for all of your budgets at once or one at a time.
■
To view the statistics for a single budget or all enforced budgets, select the budget you want to view from
the Budget Account pull-down menu.
■
■
Select the Format you want to view, either 1st Minute/ Additional Minutes or Channel 1/ Channel 2.
Select the Time Period you want to view, either Weekly or Monthly.
The information display will immediately change to show the information you specified in the format you chose.
To return to the Connection Budgets page, click the Go to Budgets link.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Managing Data Calls 8-21
Event History pages
The Netopia R2020 records certain relevant occurrences in event histories. Event histories are useful for
diagnosing problems because they list what happened before, during, and after a problem occurs. You can view
two different event histories: one for the router’s system and one for the WAN. The Netopia R2020’s built-in
battery backup prevents loss of event history from a shutdown or reset.
The router’s event histories are structured to display the most recent events first and to make it easy to
distinguish error messages from informational messages. Error messages are prefixed with an asterisk. Both
the WAN Event History and Device Event History pages retain records of up to 128 of the most recent events.
WAN Event History page
You can refresh the WAN Event History log by clicking the update this page link.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Managing Data Calls 8-23
Console-based management screens
You access the console-based management screens either by running your Telnet application or your terminal
emulator to the serial console. For details on how to do this, see Chapter 5, “Console-based Management.”
Navigate to the Accounting screens.
WAN
Configuration
Main
Menu
Accounting
Configuration
The Accounting Configuration screen appears.
Accounting Configuration
Router Budgets
Enable Router Budget:
On
Day for auto-reset of timers:
Maximum Aggregate connect time:
0
0:00
+----------+
+----------+
| Budget 1 |
| Budget 2 |
| Budget 3 |
+----------+
Connection Budgets
Budgets...
To edit your budgets select Budgets, and from the pop-up menu, select the budget you want to edit.
The Budget Setup screen appears.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-24 User’s Reference Guide
Connection Budget Setup
Budget 1
Name:
Use Connection Profile...
Easy Setup Profile
Enforced:
Override:
Off
Off
Units:
Limit:
Minutes
300
Time Period...
1st Day of Week...
Week
Sunday
Choose the Connection Profile this budget is for.
Configuration is similar to the Web-based management configuration screens.
■
■
■
Selecting Use Connection Profile displays a pop-up list of all of your Connection Profiles. Choose the
Connection Profile you want this budget to apply to and press Return.
Toggle Enforced to either On or Off to enforce whether the connection is torn down when the budget limit is
reached.
Toggle Override to either On or Off. With Override on you can exceed your budget during the current time
period without tearing down active connections. At the end of the current time period this option is
automatically deactivated. If you want to be able to exceed your enforced budget again, you must toggle
this option to On for each new time period.
Toggling Override to On disables call blocking, even if the call is over its limit. The override flag is
automatically reset to be Off at the start of a new period. This is so that you don’t need to disable
Enforced to by-pass the limit or remember to turn it back on when the new period starts.
■
■
■
The Units field is not editable.
In the Limit field enter the number of minutes your budget allows.
From the Time Period pop-up menu select either Week or Month, depending on your budgeting
requirements.
■
If you set the time period to Week, from the 1st Day of Week pop-up menu select the day of the week on
which your budget starts, or
if you set the time period to Month, from the 1st Day of Month pop-up menu select the day of the month on
which your budget starts.
You can monitor your usage against your budget by reviewing the Connection Budget Statistics screen in the
Accounting Statistics. From the Main Menu navigate to the Connection Budget Statistics screen.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Managing Data Calls 8-25
Statistics &
Logs
Main
Menu
Accounting
Statistics
Connection
Budget Statistics
The Budget Statistics screen appears.
Budget Statistics (in HHHH:MM)
Budget Name------First Minutes----Additional Minutes-------Cutoff--Expired
Budget 1
Budget 2
Budget 3
0:00
0:00
0:00
0:00
0:00
0:00
2:00
5:00
10:00
You can view statistics for all your budgets at once or one at a time.
■
■
■
■
■
Budget Name shows the names of your budgets.
First Minutes displays the number of first minutes of outbound calls placed during the recording interval.
Additional Minutes displays the remaining time of all outbound calls placed during the recording interval.
Cutoff displays the number of hours budgeted for this Connection Profile.
Expired displays the amount of time used against the budgeted amount.
To clear the counters and reset the statistics, use the down arrow key to select a budget and press Return. A
pop-up window will ask you to confirm that you want to clear this budget’s statistics. You can cancel if you
change your mind.
To return to the Accounting Statistics screen, press Escape.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-26 User’s Reference Guide
Date and time setting
Note: If you have Connection Budgets configured, changing the date setting will reset the Connection Budgets
■
■
If the new date is greater than the old date and the new date falls outside of the current budget window; or
If the new date is in the past and the date is not the current date (i.e., yesterday or earlier).
A warning message is displayed in the console window when a budget is reset.
See “Date and Time” on page 7-11 for more information on setting the date and time.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Virtual Private Networks 9-1
Chapter 9
Virtual Private Networks
The Netopia R2020 Dual Analog Router offers both PPTP and ATMP Layer 2 tunneling support for Virtual Private
Networks (VPN) as a component of a connection profile.
Overview
When you make a long distance telephone call from your home to a relative far away, you are creating a private
network. You can hold a conversation, and exchange information about the happenings on opposite sides of the
state, or the continent, that you are mutually interested in. When your next door neighbor picks up the phone to
call her daughter at college, at the same time you are talking to your relatives, your calls don't overlap, but each
is separate and private. Neither house has a direct wire to the places they call. Both share the same lines on
the telephone poles (or underground) on the street.
These calls are virtual private networks. Virtual, because they appear to be direct connections between the
calling and answering parties, even though they travel over the public wires and switches of the phone
company; private, because neither pair of calling and answering parties interacts with the other; and networks,
because they exchange information.
Computers can do the same thing; it's called Virtual Private Networks (VPNs). Equipped with Netopia Routers
running the version 4.4 firmware, a single computer or private network (LAN) can establish a private connection
with another computer or private network over the public network (Internet).
The Netopia Router can be used in VPNs either to initiate the connection or to answer it. When used in this way,
the routers are said to be tunnelling through the public network (Internet). The advantages are that, like your
long distance phone call, you don't need a direct line between one computer or LAN and the other, but use the
local connections, making it much cheaper; and the information you exchange through your tunnel is private and
secure.
Tunneling is a process of creating a private path between a remote user or private network and another private
network over some intermediate network, such as the IP-based Internet. A VPN allows remote offices or
employees access to your internal business LAN through means of encryption allowing the use of the public
Internet to look “virtually” like a private secure network. When two networks communicate with each other
through a network based on the Internet Protocol, they are said to be tunneling through the IP network.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-2 User’s Reference Guide
Transit Internetwork
Virtual Private Network
Logical
Equivalent
Unlike the phone company, private and public computer networks can use more than one protocol to carry your
information over the wires. Two such protocols are in common use for tunnelling, Point-to-Point Tunnelling
Protocol (PPTP) and Ascend Tunnel Management Protocol (ATMP). The Netopia Router can use either one.
■
Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol (PPTP) is an extension of Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP) and uses a client
either the client (PAC) or the server (PNS). As a client, a Netopia R-series router can provide all users on a
LAN with secure access over the Internet to the resources of another LAN by setting up a tunnel with a
Windows NT server running Remote Access Services (RAS) or with another Netopia Router. As a server, a
Netopia R-series router can provide remote users a secure connection to the resources of the LAN over a
dial-up, cable, DSL, or any other type of Internet access. Because PPTP can create a VPN tunnel using the
Dial-Up Networking (DUN) (see “Dial-Up Networking for VPN” on page 9-10) utility built into Windows 95,
98, or NT, no additional client software is required.
■
Ascend Tunnel Management Protocol (ATMP) is the protocol that is implemented in many Ascend routers.
ATMP is a simple protocol for connecting nodes and/ or networks together over the Internet via a tunnel.
ATMP encapsulates IP or other user data without PPP headers within General Routing Encapsulation (GRE)
protocol over IP. ATMP is more efficient than PPTP for network-to-network tunnels.
When used to initiate the tunnelled connection, the Netopia Router is called a PPTP Access Concentrator (PAC,
in PPTP language), or a foreign agent (in ATMP language). When used to answer the tunnelled connection, the
Netopia Router is called a PPTP Network Server (PNS, in PPTP language) or a home agent (in ATMP language).
In either case, the Netopia Router wraps, or encapsulates, information that one end of the tunnel exchanges
with the other, in a wrapper called General Routing Encapsulation (GRE), at one end of the tunnel, and unwraps,
or decapsulates, it at the other end.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Virtual Private Networks 9-3
Configuring the Netopia Router for use with either of the two protocols is done through the console-based menu
screens. Each type is described in its own section:
■
■
“About PPTP tunnels” on page 9-4
“About ATMP Tunnels” on page 9-16
Your configuration depends on which protocol you (and the router at the other end of your tunnel) will use, and
whether or not you will be using the VPN client software in a standalone remote connection.
Summary
A Virtual Private Network (VPN) connects the components of one network over another network. VPNs
accomplish this by allowing you to tunnel through the Internet or another public network in a manner that
provides the same security and features formerly available only in private networks.
VPNs allow networks to communicate across an IP network. Your local networks (connected to the Netopia
Router) can exchange data with remote networks that are also connected to a VPN-capable router.
This feature provides individuals at home, on the road, or in branch offices with a cost-effective and secure way
to access resources on remote LANs connected to the Internet with Netopia Routers. The feature is built
around two key technologies: PPTP and ATMP.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-4 User’s Reference Guide
About PPTP tunnels
To set up a PPTP tunnel, you create a Connection Profile including the IP address and other relevant information
for the remote PPTP partner. You use the same procedure to initiate a PPTP tunnel that terminates at a remote
PPTP server or to terminate a tunnel initiated by a remote PPTP client.
PPTP Configuration
To set up the router as a PPTP Network Server (PNS) capable of answering PPTP tunnel requests you must also
configure the VPN Default Answer Profile. See “VPN Default Answer Profile” on page 9-8 for more information.
PPTP is a Datalink Encapsulation option in Connection Profiles. It is not an option in device or link configuration
screens, as PPTP is not a native encapsulation. Consequently, the Easy Setup Profile does not offer PPTP
datalink encapsulation. See “Creating a new Connection Profile” on page 7-2 for information on creating
Connection Profiles.
Channel 4 (and higher) events, such as connections and disconnections, reported in the WAN Event Histories
are VPN tunnel events.
To define a PPTP tunnel, navigate to the Add Connection Profile menu from the Main Menu.
WAN
Configuration
Main
Menu
Add Connection
Profile
Add Connection Profile
Profile 2
Profile Name:
Profile Enabled:
+-------------+
+-------------+
| PPP
Data Link Encapsulation...
Data Link Options...
|
| Frame Relay |
| ATM FUNI
| ATMP
|
|
|
IP Enabled:
IP Profile Parameters...
| PPTP
+-------------+
ADD PROFILE NOW
CANCEL
When you define a Connection Profile as using PPTP by selecting PPTP as the datalink encapsulation method,
and then select Data Link Options, the PPTP Tunnel Options screen appears.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Virtual Private Networks 9-5
PPTP Tunnel Options
PPTP Partner IP Address:
Tunnel Via Gateway:
173.167.8.134
0.0.0.0
Data Compression...
Authentication...
None
CHAP
Send Host name:
Send Secret:
tony
*****
Receive Host name:
Receive Secret:
kimba
******
Initiate Connections:
On Demand:
Yes
Yes
Idle Timeout (seconds):
300
Return accepts * ESC cancels * Left/Right moves insertion point * Del deletes.
In this Screen you will configure the GRE/PPTP specific connection params.
Note: Profiles using PPTP do not offer a Telco Options screen.
■
Enter the PPTP Partner IP Address. This specifies the address of the other end of the tunnel.
If you do not specify the PPTP Partner IP Address the gateway cannot initiate tunnels, i.e., act as a PPTP
Access Concentrator (PAC) for this profile. It can only accept tunnel requests as a PPTP Network Server
(PNS).
■
If you specify the PPTP Partner IP Address, and the address is in the same subnet as the Remote IP
Address you specified in the IP Profile Parameters, the Tunnel Via Gateway option becomes visible. You
can enter the address by which the gateway partner is reached.
If you do not specify the PPTP Partner IP Address, the router will use the default gateway to reach the
partner and the Tunnel Via Gateway field is hidden. If the partner should be reached via an alternate port
(i.e. the LAN instead of the WAN), the Tunnel Via Gateway field allows this path to be resolved.
■
You can specify a Data Compression algorithm, either None or Standard LZS, for the PPTP connection.
Note: When the Authentication protocol is MS-CHAP, compression is set to None, and the Data
Compression option is hidden.
■
■
From the pop-up menu select an Authentication protocol for the PPP connection. Options are PAP, CHAP, or
MS-CHAP. The default is PAP. The authentication protocol must be the same on both ends of the tunnel.
When the authentication protocol is MS-CHAP, you can specify a Data Encryption algorithm for the PPTP
connection. Available options are MPPE and None (the default). For other authentication protocols, this
option is hidden. When MPPE is negotiated, the WAN Event History reports that it is negotiated as a CCP
(compression) type. This is because the MPPE protocol uses a compression engine, even though it is not
itself a compression protocol.
■
■
You can specify a Send Host Name which is used with Send Secret for authenticating with a remote PNS
when the profile is used for initiating a tunnel connection.
You must specify a Send Secret (the CHAP term for password), used for authenticating the tunnel when
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-6 User’s Reference Guide
initiating a tunnel connection.
■
You can specify a Receive Host Name which is used with the Receive Secret for authenticating a remote
PPTP client.
■
■
You must specify a Receive Secret, used for authenticating the remote PPTP client.
You can specify that this router will Initiate Connections (acting as a PAC) or only answer them (acting as a
PNS).
■
■
Tunnels are normally initiated On Demand; however, you can disable this feature. When disabled, the
tunnel must be manually established via the call management screens or may be scheduled using the
You can specify the Idle Timeout, an inactivity timer, whose expiration will terminate the tunnel. A value of
zero disables the timer. Because tunnels are subject to abrupt termination when the underlying datalink is
torn down, use of the Idle Timeout is strongly encouraged.
An alternate way to force a tunnel to stay up is to define a forced up scheduled connection for the profile.
For more information, see “Scheduled connections” on page 8-7.
■
■
Return to the Connection Profile screen by pressing Escape.
Select IP Profile Parameters and press Return.
The IP Profile Parameters screen appears.
IP Profile Parameters
Address Translation Enabled:
Yes
NAT Map List...
NAT Server List...
Easy-PAT
Easy-Servers
Local WAN IP Address:
0.0.0.0
Remote IP Address:
Remote IP Mask:
173.167.8.10
255.255.0.0
Filter Set...
Remove Filter Set
Receive RIP:
Both
Enter a subnet mask in decimal and dot form (xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx).
■
Enter the Remote IP Address and Remote IP Mask for the host to which you want to tunnel.
Note: A peculiarity associated with VPNs is that when a PAC has NAT applied to a Connection Profile set for
PPTP data link encapsulation, the PNS and devices behind it, cannot Ping the PAC’s tunnel end-point IP
address. This is because ICMP packets have no port association, and thus will be discarded rather than being
processed by NAT.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Virtual Private Networks 9-7
Ordinarily, Ping is an excellent troubleshooting tool, but it will not be effective in this circumstance. Instead, use
another TCP- or UDP-based network service for troubleshooting. Since the Netopia Router is capable of serving
Telnet and HTTP, we recommend using these services instead of Ping.
Encryption support
Encryption is a method for altering user data into a form that is unusable by anyone other than the intended
recipient. The recipient must have the means to decrypt the data to render it usable to them. The encryption
process protects the data by making it difficult for any third party to get at the original data.
Netopia PPTP is fully compatible with Microsoft Point-to-Point Encryption (MPPE) data encryption for user data
transfer over the PPTP tunnel. Microsoft Windows NT Server provides MPPE encryption capability only when
Microsoft Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol (MS-CHAP) is enabled. Netopia complies with this
feature to allow MPPE only when MS-CHAP is negotiated. MS-CHAP and MPPE are user-selectable options in the
PPTP Tunnel Options screen. If either the client or the server side specifies encryption, then encryption
becomes mandatory for both.
Netopia’s ATMP implementation supports Data Encryption Standard (DES) data encryption for user data
transfer over the ATMP tunnel between two Netopia routers. The encryption option, none or DES, is a selectable
option in the ATMP Tunnel Options screen.
Notes:
■
■
Do not set your NT Server to enforce MS-CHAP V2, as the router does not currently support MS-CHAP
V2.
Do not set your NT Server to “Require strong data encryption” in RAS Network Configuration, as the
router does not currently support 128-bit encryption.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-8 User’s Reference Guide
VPN Default Answer Profile
The WAN Configuration menu offers a VPN Default Answer Profile option. Use this selection when your router is
acting as the server for VPN connections, that is, when you are on the answering end of the tunnel
establishment. The VPN Default Answer Profile determines the way the attempted tunnel connection is
answered.
WAN Configuration
WAN (Wide Area Network) Setup...
Display/Change Connection Profile...
Add Connection Profile...
Delete Connection Profile...
WAN Default Profile...
VPN Default Answer Profile...
Frame Relay Configuration...
Frame Relay DLCI Configuration...
Establish WAN Connection...
Disconnect WAN Connection...
From here you will configure yours and the remote sites' WAN information.
To set the parameters under which the router will answer attempted VPN connections, select VPN Default
Answer Profile and press Return. The Default VPN Profile screen appears.
Default VPN Profile
Answer VPN connections:
No
PPTP Configuration Options:
Receive Authentication...
Data Compression...
PAP
None
Configure Default VPN Connection Parameters here.
■
Toggle Answer VPN Connections to Yes if you want the router to accept VPN connections or No (the
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Virtual Private Networks 9-9
default) if you do not. This applies to both ATMP and PPTP connections.
■
■
For PPTP tunnel connections only, you must define what type of authentication these connections will use.
Select Receive Authentication and press Return. A pop-up menu offers the following options: PAP (the
default), CHAP, or MS-CHAP.
If you chose PAP or CHAP authentication, from the Data Compression pop-up menu select either None (the
default) or Standard LZS.
If you chose MS-CHAP authentication, the Data Compression option is not required, and this menu item
becomes hidden.
VPN QuickView
You can view the status of your VPN connections in the VPN QuickView screen.
From the Main Menu select QuickView and then VPN QuickView.
Main
Menu
VPN
QuickView
QuickView
The VPN QuickView screen appears.
VPN Quick View
Profile Name----------Type--Rx Pckts--Tx Pckts------Est.-Partner Address------
HA <-> FA1 (Jony Fon ATMP
HA <-> FA3 (Sleve M. ATMP
99
13
99
14
Rmt 173.166.82.8
Rmt 63.193.117.91
Profile Name: Lists the name of the Connection Profile being used, if any.
Type: Shows the data link encapsulation method (PPTP or ATMP).
Rx Pckts: Shows the number of packets received via the VPN tunnel.
Tx Pckts: Shows the number of packets transmitted via the VPN tunnel.
Est: Indicates whether the connection was locally (“Lcl”) or remotely (“Rmt”) established.
Partner Address: Shows the tunnel partner’s IP address.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-10 User’s Reference Guide
Dial-Up Networking for VPN
Microsoft Windows Dial-Up Networking software permits a remote stand-alone workstation to establish a VPN
tunnel to a PPTP server such as a Netopia Router located at a central site. Dial-Up Networking also allows a
mobile user who may not be connected to a PAC to dial into an intermediate ISP and establish a VPN tunnel to,
for example, a corporate headquarters, remotely. Netopia Routers also can serve as a PAC at the workstation's
site, making it unnecessary for the standalone workstation to initiate the tunnel. In such a case, the Dial-Up
Networking software is not required, since the Netopia Router initiates the tunnel.
This section is provided for users who may require the VPN client software for Dial-Up Networking in order to
connect to an ISP who provides a PPTP account.
Microsoft Windows Dial-Up Networking (DUN) is the means by which you can initiate a VPN tunnel between your
individual remote client workstation and a private network such as your corporate LAN via the Internet. DUN is a
software adapter that allows you to establish a tunnel.
DUN is a free add-on available for Windows 95, and comes standard with Windows 98 and Windows NT. The
VPN tunnel behaves as a private network connection, unrelated to other traffic on the network. Once you have
installed Dial-Up Networking, you will be able to connect to your remote site as if you had a direct private
connection, regardless of the intervening network(s) through which your data passes. You may need to install
the Dial-Up Networking feature of Windows 95, 98, or 2000 to take advantage of the virtual private networking
feature of your Netopia router.
Note: For the latest information and tech notes on Dial-Up Networking and VPNs be sure to visit the Netopia
website at http:/ / www.netopia.com and, for the latest software and release notes, the Microsoft website at
http:/ / www.microsoft.com.
Installing Dial-Up Networking
Check to see if Dial-Up Networking is already installed on your PC. Open your My Computer (or whatever you
have named it) icon on your desktop. If there is a folder named Dial-Up Networking, you don’t have to install it.
If there is no such folder, you must install it from your system disks or CDROM. Do the following:
1. From the Start menu, select Settings and then Control Panel.
2. In the Control Panel window, double-click the Add/ Remove Programs icon.
The Add/ Remove Programs Properties window appears.
3. Click the Windows Setup tab.
4. Double-click Communications.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Virtual Private Networks 9-11
The Communications window appears.
5. In the Communications window, select Dial-Up Networking and click the OK button.
This returns you to the Windows Setup screen. Click the OK button.
6. Respond to the prompts to install Dial-Up Networking from the system disks or CDROM.
7. When prompted, reboot your PC.
Creating a new Dial-Up Networking profile
A Dial-Up Networking profile is like an address book entry that contains the information and parameters you
need for a secure private connection. You can create this profile by using either the Internet Connection Wizard
or the Make New Connection feature of Dial-Up Networking. The following instructions tell you how to create the
profile with the Make New Connection feature. Do the following:
1. Double-click the My Computer (or whatever you have named it) icon on your desktop.
Open the Dial-Up Networking folder, and then double-click Make New Connection. The Make New
Connection wizard window appears.
2. Type a name for this connection (such as the name of your company, or the computer you are dialing into).
From the pull-down menu, select the device you intend to use for the virtual private network connection.
This can be any device you have installed or connected to your PC. Click the Next button. A screen appears
with fields for you to enter telephone numbers for the computer you want to connect to.
3. Type the directory number or the Virtual Circuit Identifier number.
This number is provided by your ISP or corporate administrator. Depending on the type of device you are
using, the number may or may not resemble an ordinary telephone directory number.
4. Click the Next button.
The final window will give you a chance to accept or change the name you have entered for this profile. If
you are satisfied with it, click the Finish button. Your profile is complete.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-12 User’s Reference Guide
Configuring a Dial-Up Networking profile
Once you have created your Dial-Up Networking profile, you configure it for TCP/ IP networking to allow you to
connect to the Internet through your Internet connection device. Do the following:
1. Double-click the My Computer (or whatever you have named it) icon on your desktop.
Open the Dial-Up Networking folder. You will see the icon for the profile you created in the previous section.
2. Right-click the icon and from the pop-up menu select Properties.
3. In the Properties window click the Server Type button.
From the Type of Dial-up Server pull-down menu select the appropriate type of server for your system
version:
■
■
Windows 95 users select PPP: Windows 95, Windows NT 3.5, Internet
Windows 98 users select PPP: Windows 98, Windows NT Server, Internet
In the Allowed network protocols area check TCP/ IP and uncheck all of the other checkboxes.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Virtual Private Networks 9-13
4. Click the TCP/ IP Settings button.
■
■
If your ISP uses dynamic IP addressing (DHCP), select the Server assigned IP address radio button.
If your ISP uses static IP addressing, select the Specify an IP address radio button and enter your
assigned IP address in the fields provided. Also enter the IP address in the Primary and Secondary
DNS fields.
5. Click the OK button in this window and the next two windows.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-14 User’s Reference Guide
Installing the VPN Client
Before Installing the VPN Client you must have TCP/ IP installed and have an established Internet connection.
Windows 95 VPN installation
1. From your Internet browser navigate to the following URL:
http:/ / www.microsoft.com/ NTServer/ nts/ downloads/ recommended/ dunl3win95/ releasenotes.aso
Download the Microsoft Windows 95 VPN patch dun 1.3 to the Windows 95 computer you intend to use as
a VPN client with PPTP. Follow the installation instructions.
2. From the Windows 95 Start menu select Settings, then Control Panel and click once.
The Control Panel screen appears.
3. Double-click Add/ Remove Programs.
The Add/ Remove Programs screen appears.
4. Click the Windows Setup tab.
The Windows Setup screen will be displayed within the top center box.
5. Highlight Communications and double-click.
This displays a list of possible selections for the communications option. Active components will have a
check in the checkboxes to their left.
6. Check Dial Up Networking at the top of the list and Virtual Private Networking at the bottom of the list.
7. Click OK at the bottom right on each screen until you return to the Control Panel. Close the Control Panel
by clicking the upper right corner X.
8. Double-click the My Computer icon (normally at the left upper corner of the screen).
This will display the devices within My Computer. Scroll down the list to Dial-Up Networking and
double-click it.
9. Double click Make New Connection.
This displays the Make New Connection installation screen. In this screen you will see a box labelled
Select a device. From the pull-down menu to the right, select Microsoft VPN Adapter.
Click the Next button at the bottom of the screen
This displays the VPN Host screen. In the box to the top center of the screen enter your VPN server’s IP
address (for example, 192.168.xxx.xxx. This is not a proper Internet address)
Windows 98 VPN installation
1. From the Windows 98 Start menu select Settings, then Control Panel and click once.
The Control Panel screen appears.
2. Double-click Add/ Remove Programs.
The Add/ Remove Programs screen appears.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Virtual Private Networks 9-15
3. Click the Windows Setup tab.
The Windows Setup screen will be displayed within the top center box.
4. Double-click Communications.
This displays a list of possible selections for the communications option. Active components will have a
check in the checkboxes to their left.
5. Check Dial Up Networking at the top of the list and Virtual Private Networking at the bottom of the list.
6. Click OK at the bottom right on each screen until you return to the Control Panel. Close the Control Panel
by clicking the upper right corner X.
7. Double-click the My Computer icon (normally at the left upper corner of the screen).
This will display the devices within My Computer. Scroll down the list to Dial-Up Networking and
double-click it.
8. Double click Make New Connection.
This displays the Make New Connection installation screen. In this screen you will see a box labelled
Select a device. From the pull-down menu to the right, select Microsoft VPN Adapter.
Click the Next button at the bottom of the screen
This displays the VPN Host screen. In the box to the top center of the screen enter your VPN server’s IP
address (for example, 192.168.xxx.xxx. This is not a proper Internet address)
Connecting using Dial-Up Networking
A Dial-Up Networking connection will be automatically launched whenever you run a TCP/ IP application, such as
a web browser or email client. When you first run the application a Connect To dialog box appears in which you
enter your User name and Password. If you check the Save password checkbox, the system will remember your
User name and Password, and you won’t be prompted for them again.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-16 User’s Reference Guide
About ATMP Tunnels
To set up an ATMP tunnel, you create a Connection Profile including the IP address and other relevant
information for the remote ATMP partner. ATMP uses the terminology of a foreign agent that initiates tunnels
and a home agent that terminates them. You use the same procedure to initiate or terminate an ATMP tunnel.
Used in this way, the terms initiate and terminate mean the beginning and end of the tunnel; they do not mean
activate and deactivate.
ATMP is a tunneling protocol, with two basic aspects. Tunnels are created and torn down using a session
protocol that is UDP-based. User (or client) data is transferred across the tunnel by encapsulating the client
data within Generic Routing Encapsulation (GRE). The GRE data is then routed using standard methods.
ATMP Configuration
ATMP is a Datalink Encapsulation option in Connection Profiles. It is not an option in device or link configuration
screens, since ATMP is not a native encapsulation. The Easy Setup Profile does not offer ATMP datalink
encapsulation. See “Creating a new Connection Profile” on page 7-2 for information on creating Connection
Profiles.
The WAN Event History screens will report VPN tunnel events, such as connections and disconnections, as
Channel 4 (and higher) events.
To define an ATMP tunnel, navigate to the Add Connection Profile menu from the Main Menu.
WAN
Configuration
Main
Menu
Add Connection
Profile
Add Connection Profile
Profile 1
Profile Name:
Profile Enabled:
+-------------+
+-------------+
| PPP
Data Link Encapsulation...
Data Link Options...
|
| Frame Relay |
| ATM FUNI
| ATMP
|
|
|
IP Enabled:
IP Profile Parameters...
| PPTP
+-------------+
ADD PROFILE NOW
CANCEL
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Virtual Private Networks 9-17
When you define a Connection Profile as using ATMP by selecting ATMP as the datalink encapsulation method,
and then select Data Link Options, the ATMP Tunnel Options screen appears.
ATMP Tunnel Options
ATMP Partner IP Address:
Tunnel Via Gateway:
173.167.8.134
0.0.0.0
Network Name:
Password:
sam.net
****
Data Encryption...
Key String:
DES
Initiate Connections:
On Demand:
Yes
Yes
Idle Timeout (seconds):
300
Enter an IP address in decimal and dot form (xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx).
In this Screen you will configure the GRE/ATMP specific connection params.
Note: An ATMP tunnel cannot be assigned a dynamic IP address by the remote server, as in a PPP connection.
When you define an ATMP tunnel profile, the Local WAN IP Address, assigned in the IP Profile Parameters
screen, must be the true IP address, not 0.0.0.0, if NAT is enabled.
Note: Profiles using ATMP do not offer a Telco Options screen.
■
ATMP Partner IP Address specifies the address of the other end of the tunnel. When unspecified, the
gateway can not initiate tunnels (i.e., act as a foreign agent) for this profile; it can only accept tunnel
requests as a home agent.
■
When you specify the ATMP Partner IP Address, and the address is in the same subnet as the Remote IP
Address you specified in the IP Profile Parameters, you can specify the route (Tunnel Via Gateway) by which
the gateway partner is reached. If you do not specify the ATMP Partner IP Address, the router will use the
default gateway to reach the partner and the Tunnel Via Gateway field is hidden. If the partner should be
reached via an alternate port (i.e., the LAN instead of the WAN), the Tunnel Via Gateway field allows this
path to be resolved.
■
You can specify a Network Name. When the tunnel partner is another Netopia router, this name may be
used to match against a Connection Profile. When the partner is an Ascend router in Gateway mode, then
Network Name is used by the Ascend router to match a gateway profile. When the partner is an Ascend
router in Router mode, leave this field blank.
■
■
You must specify a Password, used for authenticating the tunnel.
Note: The Password entry will be the same for both ends of the tunnel.
For Netopia-to-Netopia connections only, you can specify a Data Encryption algorithm for the ATMP
connection from the pop-up menu, either DES or None. None is the default.
Note: Ascend does not support DES encryption for ATMP tunnels.
■
You must specify an 8-byte Key String when DES is selected. When encryption is None, this field is
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-18 User’s Reference Guide
invisible.
■
■
■
You can specify that this router will Initiate Connections, acting as a foreign agent (Yes), or only answer
them, acting as a home agent (No).
Tunnels are normally initiated On Demand; however, you can disable this feature. When disabled, the
You can specify the Idle Timeout, an inactivity timer, whose expiration will terminate the tunnel. A value of
zero disables the timer. Because tunnels are subject to abrupt termination when the underlying datalink is
torn down, use of the Idle Timeout is strongly encouraged.
An alternate way to force a tunnel to stay up is to define a forced up scheduled connection for the profile.
See “Scheduled connections” on page 8-7 for more information.
■
■
Return to the Connection Profile screen by pressing Escape.
Select IP Profile Parameters and press Return. The IP Profile Parameters screen appears.
IP Profile Parameters
Address Translation Enabled:
Yes
NAT Map List...
NAT Server List...
Easy-PAT
Easy-Servers
Local WAN IP Address:
0.0.0.0
Remote IP Address:
Remote IP Mask:
173.167.8.10
255.255.0.0
Filter Set...
Remove Filter Set
Receive RIP:
Both
Enter a subnet mask in decimal and dot form (xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx).
■
Enter the Remote IP Address and Remote IP Mask for the host to which you want to tunnel.
Note: A peculiarity associated with VPNs is that when a foreign agent has NAT applied to a Connection Profile
set for ATMP data link encapsulation, the home agent and devices behind it, cannot Ping the foreign agent's
tunnel end-point IP address. This is because ICMP packets have no port association, and thus will be discarded
rather than being processed by NAT.
Ordinarily, Ping is an excellent troubleshooting tool, but it will not be effective in this circumstance. Instead, use
another TCP- or UDP-based network service for troubleshooting. Since the Netopia Router is capable of serving
Telnet and HTTP, we recommend using these services instead of Ping.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Virtual Private Networks 9-19
Allowing VPNs though a firewall
An administrator interested in securing a network will usually combine the use of VPNs with the use of a firewall
or some similar mechanism. This is because a VPN is not a complete security solution, but rather a component
of overall security. Using a VPN will add security to transactions carried over a public network, but a VPN alone
will not prevent a public network from infiltrating a private network. Therefore, you should combine use of a
firewall with VPNs, where the firewall will secure the private network from infiltration from a public network, and
the VPN will secure the transactions that must cross the public network.
A strict firewall may not be provisioned to allow VPN traffic to pass back and forth as needed. In order to ensure
that a firewall will allow a VPN, certain attributes must be added to the firewall's provisioning. The provisions
necessary vary slightly between ATMP and PPTP, but both protocols operate on the same basic premise: there
are control and negotiation operations, and there is the tunnelled traffic that carries the payload of data
between the VPN endpoints. The difference is that ATMP uses UDP to handle control and negotiation, while
PPTP uses TCP. Then both ATMP and PPTP use GRE to carry the payload.
For PPTP negotiation to work, TCP packets inbound and outbound destined for port 1723 must be allowed.
Likewise, for ATMP negotiation to work, UDP packets inbound and outbound destined for port 5150 must be
allowed. Source ports are dynamic, so, if possible, make this flexible, too. Additionally, PPTP and ATMP both
require a firewall to allow GRE bi-directionally.
The following sections illustrate a sample filtering setup to allow either PPTP or ATMP traffic to cross a firewall:
■
■
“PPTP Example” on page 9-19
“ATMP Example” on page 9-22
Make your own appropriate substitutions. For more information on filters and firewalls, see Chapter 14,
“Security.”
PPTP Example
To enable a firewall to allow PPTP traffic, you must provision the firewall to allow inbound and outbound TCP
packets specifically destined for port 1723. The source port may be dynamic, so often it is not useful to apply
a compare function upon this portion of the control/ negotiation packets. You must also set the firewall to allow
inbound and outbound GRE packets, enabling transport of the tunnel payload.
From the Main Menu navigate to Display/ Change IP Filter Set, and from the pop-up menu select Basic Firewall.
Main
Menu
System
Configuration
Filter
Sets
IP Filter
Sets
Display/ Change
IP Filter Set
Basic
Firewall
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-20 User’s Reference Guide
Select Display/ Change Input Filter.
Display/Change Input Filter screen
+-#----Source IP Addr----Dest IP Addr------Proto-Src.Port-D.Port--On?-Fwd-+
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------+
| 1
| 2
|
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
TCP NC
GRE --
=1723 Yes Yes |
--
Yes Yes |
|
For Input Filter 1 set the Destination Port information as shown below.
Change Input Filter 1
Enabled:
Forward:
Yes
Yes
Source IP Address:
Source IP Address Mask:
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
Dest. IP Address:
Dest. IP Address Mask:
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
Protocol Type:
TCP
Source Port Compare...
Source Port ID:
No Compare
0
Dest. Port Compare...
Dest. Port ID:
Established TCP Conns. Only:
Equal
1723
No
For Input Filter 2 set the Protocol Type to allow GRE as shown below.
Change Input Filter 2
Enabled:
Forward:
Yes
Yes
Source IP Address:
Source IP Address Mask:
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
Dest. IP Address:
Dest. IP Address Mask:
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
Protocol Type:
GRE
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Virtual Private Networks 9-21
In the Display/ Change IP Filter Set screen select Display/ Change Output Filter.
Display/Change Output Filter screen
+-#----Source IP Addr----Dest IP Addr------Proto-Src.Port-D.Port--On?-Fwd-+
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------+
| 1
| 2
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
TCP NC
GRE --
=1723 Yes Yes |
-- Yes Yes |
For Output Filter 1 set the Protocol Type and Destination Port information as shown below.
Change Output Filter 1
Enabled:
Forward:
Yes
Yes
Source IP Address:
Source IP Address Mask:
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
Dest. IP Address:
Dest. IP Address Mask:
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
Protocol Type:
TCP
Source Port Compare...
Source Port ID:
No Compare
0
Dest. Port Compare...
Dest. Port ID:
Established TCP Conns. Only:
Equal
1723
No
For Output Filter 2 set the Protocol Type to allow GRE as shown below.
Change Output Filter 2
Enabled:
Forward:
Yes
Yes
Source IP Address:
Source IP Address Mask:
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
Dest. IP Address:
Dest. IP Address Mask:
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
Protocol Type:
GRE
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-22 User’s Reference Guide
ATMP Example
To enable a firewall to allow ATMP traffic, you must provision the firewall to allow inbound and outbound UDP
packets specifically destined for port 5150. The source port may be dynamic, so often it is not useful to apply
a compare function on this portion of the control/ negotiation packets. You must also set the firewall to allow
inbound and outbound GRE packets (Protocol 47, Internet Assigned Numbers Document, RFC 1700), enabling
transport of the tunnel payload.
From the Main Menu navigate to Display/ Change IP Filter Set, and from the pop-up menu select Basic Firewall.
Main
Menu
System
Configuration
Filter
Sets
IP Filter
Sets
Display/ Change
IP Filter Set
Basic
Firewall
Select Display/ Change Input Filter.
Display/Change Input Filter screen
+-#----Source IP Addr----Dest IP Addr------Proto-Src.Port-D.Port--On?-Fwd-+
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------+
| 1
| 2
|
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
UDP NC
GRE --
=5150 Yes Yes |
--
Yes Yes |
|
For Input Filter 1 set the Destination Port information as shown below.
Change Input Filter 1
Enabled:
Forward:
Yes
Yes
Source IP Address:
Source IP Address Mask:
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
Dest. IP Address:
Dest. IP Address Mask:
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
Protocol Type:
TCP
Source Port Compare...
Source Port ID:
No Compare
0
Dest. Port Compare...
Dest. Port ID:
Established TCP Conns. Only:
Equal
1723
No
For Input Filter 2 set the Protocol Type to allow GRE as shown below.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Virtual Private Networks 9-23
Change Input Filter 2
Enabled:
Forward:
Yes
Yes
Source IP Address:
Source IP Address Mask:
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
Dest. IP Address:
Dest. IP Address Mask:
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
Protocol Type:
GRE
In the Display/ Change IP Filter Set screen select Display/ Change Output Filter.
Display/Change Output Filter screen
+-#----Source IP Addr----Dest IP Addr------Proto-Src.Port-D.Port--On?-Fwd-+
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------+
| 1
| 2
|
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
UDP NC
GRE --
NC
--
Yes Yes |
Yes Yes |
|
For Output Filter 1 set the Protocol Type and Destination Port information as shown below.
Change Output Filter 1
Enabled:
Forward:
Yes
Yes
Source IP Address:
Source IP Address Mask:
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
Dest. IP Address:
Dest. IP Address Mask:
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
Protocol Type:
UDP
Source Port Compare...
Source Port ID:
No Compare
0
Dest. Port Compare...
Dest. Port ID:
No Compare
5150
For Output Filter 2 set the Protocol Type to allow GRE as shown below.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-24 User’s Reference Guide
Change Output Filter 2
Enabled:
Forward:
Yes
Yes
Source IP Address:
Source IP Address Mask:
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
Dest. IP Address:
Dest. IP Address Mask:
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
Protocol Type:
GRE
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Multiple Network Address Translation and IP Setup 10-1
Chapter 10
Multiple Network Address Translation and IP Setup
The Netopia R2020 uses Internet Protocol (IP) to communicate both locally and with remote networks. This
chapter shows you how to configure the Router to route IP traffic. You also learn how to configure the Router to
serve IP addresses to hosts on your local network.
Netopia’s SmartIP features IP address serving and Network Address Translation. This chapter describes how to
use the Network Address Translation feature of SmartIP and Multiple Network Address Translation (MultiNAT).
Note: When you configured your Netopia R2020 using SmartStart, Network Address Translation was enabled by
default. You have the option of disabling it, if you wish. This is done through the System Configuration screens
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
“MultiNAT Configuration Example” on page 10-24
“IP subnets” on page 10-29
“Static routes” on page 10-31
“IP address serving” on page 10-35
Overview
NAT (Network Address Translation) is a means whereby one or more IP addresses and/ or IP service ports are
re-mapped into other values. This aliasing serves two functions:
■
It allows the addresses of many computers to be represented by only one or a few addresses, saving you
money.
■
It can be used as a security feature by obscuring the true addresses of important machines from potential
hackers on the Internet.
To help you understand some of the concepts discussed here, it may be helpful to introduce some NAT
terminology.
The terms mapping or remapping refer to rules that translate one or more addresses on the Netopia Router's
LAN to another address or addresses on the other side of the Netopia Router's WAN link (typically the Internet).
The terms private and internal refer to addresses on the Netopia Router's LAN network that are protected or
obscured from the NAT remappings. These NATed addresses cannot be seen from the Internet side of the
Netopia Router's WAN connection.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-2 User’s Reference Guide
The terms public and external refer to the Internet side of the Netopia Router's connection. A machine on the
public network cannot necessarily access a machine behind a Netopia Router's NAT remapping, unless you
specify that it can.
Multiple Network Address Translation (MultiNAT) introduces several new NAT-related features. These features
can be divided into three categories that can be used simultaneously in different combinations on a
per-Connection Profile basis.
A brief description follows:
■
PAT stands for Port Address Translation (also known as NAPT for Network Address Port Translation). It
allows an entire network or part of a network to be represented to the outside world as a single IP address.
A limitation of PAT is that communication must be initiated from the internal network. A user on the external
side can not access a machine behind a PAT connection. Now, with the Netopia R2020 Router, you can
define multiple PAT remappings. Each of these can optionally alias a section or range of IP addresses of
the internal network. PAT remapping allows only internal users to initiate traffic flow between the internal
and external networks.
■
Static remappings are a way to represent an internal single address or sequence of addresses as an
external address or sequence of addresses on a one-to-one basis. As with PAT remappings, you can
simultaneously use several static rules. Machines on the external network can initiate conversations with
statically remapped internal computers by accessing the aliased values. It is important to note that in most
uses of static remappings a static route on the external router must be created to tell the external network
to go through the NAT Netopia Router to get to the remapped external addresses. Static remapping allows
an entire machine to be available to the external net. Either the internal NATed machine or the external
network can initiate traffic flow to or from the remapped machine.
■
Server Lists are also known as exported services. By creating a server list, you can tell the outside world
that specific services such as Web, ftp, e-mail, etc. can be accessed at specific external addresses. Server
lists differ from static remappings in that the specified service is only available to external users at the
stated alias address. In most uses of server lists you must create a static route on the external router to
tell the external network to go through the NAT Netopia Router to get to the remapped address of the
server lists. Exported servers and Server Lists allow only specific IP services (IP ports) to be available to
the outside world. Services from different internal machines can be presented as a single external IP
address.
Map Lists and Server Lists are completely independent of each other. A Connection Profile can use one or the
other or both.
MultiNAT allows complex mapping and requires some complex configuration. Multiple mapped interior subnets
are supported, and the rules for mapping each of the subnets may be different. The figure below illustrates a
possible multiNAT configuration.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Multiple Network Address Translation and IP Setup 10-3
Public Addresses
Private Addresses IP Host
NAT Type
206.1.1.1
206.1.1.2
206.1.1.3
206.1.1.4
206.1.1.5
206.1.1.6
192.168.1.1
192.168.1.2
192.168.1.3
192.168.1.4
192.168.1.5
Router
1:1 Static
1:1 Static
1:1 Static
Web Server
Mail Server
FTP Server #1 1:1 Static
FTP Server #2 1:1 Static
192.168.1.6 - 254 LAN Users
1:Many PAT
In order to support this type of mapping, the private addresses and public addresses are separated and are
assigned to ranges. Each range consists of a contiguous set of one or more addresses. The router allocates
the addresses in that range based on the type (static or PAT), and other relevant attributes. The range defines
the rules for distributing the exterior addresses. NAT maps, kept in a list similar to a firewall or filter list, contain
the private addresses and the name pointer of the range to use to get a public address. The maps function as
an access control list to the resource contained in the range.
Features
The Netopia R2020 Router features the following:
■
Default behavior consistent with previous firmware versions, including PAT to a DHCP- or PPP-assigned
address.
■
1-to-1 static NAT mapping.
An internal private address is permanently mapped to an external address. TCP and UDP port addresses
are not altered.
■
■
Multiple Many-to-1 PAT mappings on a single interface.
PAT addresses may be assigned to specific private address subnets; not all internal machines need to be
included on a PAT remapping list.
Coexistent mapped and unmapped traffic on a public interface.
If the router's IP address is not included in a NAT list, it will be invisible to the external network.
Mapped services (exports) may use multiple public addresses.
NAT maps per interface, similar to the filter rules.
■
■
Supported traffic
MultiNat supports the following IP protocols:
■
PAT: TCP/ UDP traffic which does not carry source or destination IP addresses or ports in the data stream
(i.e., HTTP, telnet, ‘r’ commands, tftp, NFS, NTP, SMTP, NNTP, etc.).
■
Static NAT: All IP protocol traffic which does not carry or otherwise rely on the source or destination IP
addresses in the data stream.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-4 User’s Reference Guide
NAT configuration
You use the NAT feature sets by defining a series of remapping rules and then grouping them into a list. There
are two kinds of lists -- Map Lists, made up of PAT and Static remapping rules, and Server Lists, a list of internal
services to be presented to the external world. Creating these lists is a four-step process:
1. Define the public range of addresses that external computers should use to get to the NAT internal
machines. These are the addresses that someone on the Internet would see.
2. Create a List name that will act as a rule or server holder.
3. Create an internal map or rule that specifies the internal range of NATed addresses and how they are to be
aliased to the external range.
4. Associate the Map or Server List to your WAN interface via a Connection Profile or the Default Profile.
The three NAT features all operate completely independently of each other, although they can be used
simultaneously on the same Connection Profile.
You can configure a simple 1-to-many PAT (often referred to simply as NAT) mapping using Easy Setup. More
complex setups require configuration using the Network Address Translation item on the IP Setup screen.
An example MultiNAT configuration at the end of this chapter describes some applications for these features.
You configure the MultiNAT features through the console menu in three areas:
■
■
■
Easy Setup Profile, described on page 10-4.
IP setup, described on page 10-5.
IP profile parameters, described on page 10-18.
Easy Setup Profile
Connection Profile 1: Easy Setup Profile
Number to Dial:
2125551212
Address Translation Enabled:
IP Addressing...
Yes
Numbered
Local WAN IP Address:
Local WAN IP Mask:
Remote IP Address:
Remote IP Mask:
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
127.0.0.2
255.255.255.255
PPP Authentication...
Send User Name:
Send Password:
PAP
tony
*****
PREVIOUS SCREEN
NEXT SCREEN
Enter the directory number for the remote network connection.
Enter basic information about your WAN connection with this screen.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Multiple Network Address Translation and IP Setup 10-5
■
The Local WAN IP Address is used to configure a NAT public address range consisting of the Local WAN IP
Address and all its ports. The public address map list is named Easy-PAT List and the port map list is
named Easy-Servers.
When you exit this screen the two map lists, Easy-PAT List and Easy-Servers, are created by default and
255.255.255.255) to your public address. These map lists are bound to the Easy Setup Profile. See
“Binding Map Lists and Server Lists” on page 10-18.
This is all you need to do if you want to continue to use a single PAT, or 1-to-many, NAT configuration.
■
In order to configure the router to make servers on your LAN visible to the Internet, you use advanced
features in the System Configuration screens, described in “IP setup” on page 10-5.
Note: There is no implicit binding between the WAN IP interface address and NAT, as in earlier firmware
versions, so you cannot disallow configuration of NAT simply because the interface is numbered or disallow
configuration of the addressing type (numbered or unnumbered) simply because NAT is enabled.
If the router has a numbered interface, then it is addressable by the IP address. With PAT, when NAT was
enabled the interface would be marked unnumbered and the IP address subsumed by NAT. However, NAT would
allow traffic directed to that IP address to be delivered to the router. This effectively made the interface a
numbered interface. MultiNAT adds the option of true unnumbered NAT. Traffic delivered to the router on an
unnumbered interface which cannot be processed by NAT is dropped.
IP setup
To access the NAT configuration screens, from the Main Menu navigate to IP Setup:
System
Configuration
Main
Menu
Network
Protocols Setup
IP
Setup
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-6 User’s Reference Guide
IP Setup
Ethernet IP Address:
192.168.1.1
255.255.255.0
Ethernet Subnet Mask:
Define Additional Subnets...
Default IP Gateway:
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
Primary Domain Name Server:
Domain Name:
Receive RIP:
Transmit RIP:
Static Routes...
Both
Off
IP Address Serving Setup
Network Address Translation (NAT)...
Filter Sets...
Enter an IP address in decimal and dot form (xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx).
Set up the basic IP attributes of your Netopia in this screen.
Select Network Address Translation (NAT) and press Return.
The Network Address Translation screen appears.
Network Address Translation
Add Public Range...
Show/Change Public Range...
Delete Public Range...
Add Map List...
Show/Change Map List...
Delete Map List...
Add Server List...
Show/Change Server List...
Delete Server List...
NAT Associations...
Return/Enter to configure IP Address redirection.
Public Range: defines an external address range and indicates what type of remapping to apply when using this
range. The types of remapping available are static and pat.
Map Lists: define collections of mapping rules. A rule maps interior range addresses to exterior range
addresses by the mapping techniques defined in the map list.
Server Lists: bind internal IP addresses and ports to external IP addresses and ports so that connections
initiated from the outside can access an interior server.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Multiple Network Address Translation and IP Setup 10-7
NAT rules
The following rules apply to assigning NAT ranges and server lists:
■
Static public address ranges must not overlap other static, PAT, public addresses or the public address
assigned to the router’s WAN interface.
■
A PAT public address must not overlap any static address ranges. It may be the same as another PAT
address or server list address, but the port range must not overlap.
You configure the ranges of exterior addresses by first adding public ranges.
Select Add Public Range and press Return.
The Add NAT Public Range screen appears.
Add NAT Public Range
Range Name:
Type...
my_first_range
pat
Public Address:
1.1.1.1
First Public Port:
Last Public Port:
49152
65535
ADD NAT PUBLIC RANGE
CANCEL
■
■
Select Range Name and give a descriptive name to this range.
Select Type and from the pop-up menu, assign its type. Options are static or pat (the default).
■
If you choose pat as the range type, select Public Address and enter the exterior IP address in the
range you want to assign. Select First and Last Public Port and enter the first and last exterior ports
in the range. These are the ports that will be used for traffic initiated from the private LAN to the out-
side world.
Note: For PAT Map lists and Server lists, if you use the Public Address 0.0.0.0, the list will acquire its
public IP address from the WAN IP address specified by your WAN IP configuration in the Connection
Profile. If that is a static IP address, then the PAT map list and Server lists will acquire that address. If
it is a negotiated IP address, such as may be assigned via DHCP or PPP, the PAT map list and Server
lists will acquire that address each time it is negotiated.
■
If you choose static as the range type, a new menu item, First Public Address, becomes visible.
Select First Public Address and enter the first exterior IP address in the range you want to assign.
Select Last Public Address and enter an IP address at the end of the range.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-8 User’s Reference Guide
■
Select ADD NAT PUBLIC RANGE and press Return. The range will be added to your list and you will be
returned to the Network Address Translation screen.
Once the public ranges have been assigned, the next step is to bind interior addresses to them. Because these
bindings occur in ordered lists, called map lists, you must first define the list, then add mappings to it.
From the Network Address Translation screen select Add Map List and press Return.
The Add NAT Map List screen appears.
Add NAT Map List
Map List Name:
Add Map...
my_map
■
■
Select Map List Name and enter a descriptive name for this map list. A new menu item Add Map appears.
Select Add Map and press Return. The Add NAT Map screen appears.
Add NAT Map ("my_map")
First Private Address:
Last Private Address:
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
Use NAT Public Range...
ADD NAT MAP
CANCEL
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Multiple Network Address Translation and IP Setup 10-9
■
■
Select First and Last Private Address and enter the first and last interior IP addresses you want to assign
to this mapping.
Select Use NAT Public Range and press Return. A screen appears displaying the public ranges you have
defined.
Add NAT Map ("my_map")
+-Public Address Range------------Type----Name-------------+
+----------------------------------------------------------+
| 0.0.0.0
--
pat
pat
Easy-PAT
|
| 1.1.1.1
--
my_first_range |
| 2.2.2.2
| <<NEW RANGE...>>
3.3.3.3
static my_second_range |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
+----------------------------------------------------------+
Up/Down Arrow Keys to select, ESC to cancel, Return/Enter to Delete.
■
■
From the list of public ranges you defined, select the one that you want to map to the interior range for this
mapping and press Return.
If none of your preconfigured ranges are suitable for this mapping, you can select <<NEW RANGE>> and
create a new range. If you choose <<NEW RANGE>>, the Add NAT Public Range screen displays and you
can create a new public range to be used by this map. See “Add NAT Public Range” on page 10-7.
The Add NAT Map screen now displays the range you have assigned.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-10 User’s Reference Guide
Add NAT Map ("my_map")
First Private Address:
5.5.5.4
5.5.5.6
Last Private Address:
Use NAT Public Range...
Public Range Type is:
my_first_range
pat
Public Range Start Address is: 1.1.1.1
ADD NAT MAP
CANCEL
■
Select ADD NAT MAP and press Return. Your mapping is added to your map list.
Modifying map lists
You can make changes to an existing map list after you have created it. Since there may be more than one map
list you must select which one you are modifying.
From the Network Address Translation screen select Show/ Change Map List and press Return.
■
Select the map list you want to modify from the popup menu.
Network Address Translation
+-NAT Map List Name--+
+--------------------+
Add Out| Easy-PAT List
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Show/Ch| my_first_map
Delete | my_second_map
| my_map
Add Map|
Show/Ch|
Delete |
|
Add Ser|
Show/Ch|
Delete |
|
NAT Ass|
|
|
|
+--------------------+
Up/Down Arrow Keys to select, ESC to dismiss, Return/Enter to Edit.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Multiple Network Address Translation and IP Setup 10-11
The Show/ Change NAT Map List screen appears.
Show/Change NAT Map List
my_map
Map List Name:
Add Map...
Show/Change Maps...
Delete Map...
Move Map...
■
■
■
■
Show/ Change Maps allows you to modify the individual maps within the list.
Delete Map allows you to delete a map from the list.
Move Map allows you to change the priority order in which the map is evaluated within the list. See
“Moving maps” on page 10-12.
Selecting Show/ Change Maps, Delete Map, or Move Map displays the same pop-up menu.
Show/Change NAT Map List
+---Private Address Range---------Type----Public Address Range------------+
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------+
| 1.1.1.1
5.5.5.6
7.7.7.9
pat
8.8.8.8
--
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| 7.7.7.7
static 2.2.2.2
3.3.3.3
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------+
Scroll to the map you want to modify using the arrow keys and press Return.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-12 User’s Reference Guide
The Change NAT Map screen appears.
Change NAT Map ("my_map")
First Private Address:
Last Private Address:
7.7.7.7
7.7.7.9
Use NAT Public Range...
Public Range Type is:
my_second_range
static
Public Range Start Address is: 2.2.2.2
Public Range End Address is:
3.3.3.3
CHANGE NAT MAP
CANCEL
Make any modifications you need and then select CHANGE NAT MAP and press Return. Your changes will
become effective and you will be returned to the Show/ Change NAT Map List screen.
Moving maps
The Move Map screen permits reordering the priority of maps in a map list. If you used Easy Setup for your
initial configuration, and added subsequent map and server lists, you may need to reorder their priority.
Show/Change NAT Map List
+---Private Address Range---------Type----Public Address Range------------+
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------+
| 5.5.5.4
5.5.5.6
pat
1.1.1.1
--
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| 7.7.7.7
7.7.7.10
static 2.2.2.2
3.3.3.3
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------+
Up/Down Arrow Keys to select, ESC to dismiss, Return/Enter to Edit.
In the example screen above, you may want to reorder the priority of the maps such that the static map applies
first and any additional traffic is routed via PAT.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Multiple Network Address Translation and IP Setup 10-13
All operations are done from a single pop-up menu.
■
In the Show/ Change Map List screen, select Move Map. A selection mode pop-up menu appears. In this
mode you scroll to the map you want to move and press Return to select it for moving.
■
After pressing Return you are in Move mode. Arrow keys move the selected map up or down. When you
press Return again the map is put in the new location permanently and the pop-up menu is dismissed. You
can press Escape at any time in the pop-up menu to abort the move and restore the map list to its original
ordering.
Adding server lists
Server lists, also known as Exports, are handled similarly to map lists. If you want to make a particular server’s
port accessible (and it isn’t accessible through other means, such as a static mapping), you must create a
Server List.
Select Add Server List from the Network Address Translation screen.
The Add NAT Server List screen appears.
Add NAT Server List
Server List Name:
Add Server...
my_servers
■
■
Select Server List Name and type in a descriptive name. A new menu item, Add Server, appears.
Select Add Server and press Return. The Add NAT Server screen appears.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-14 User’s Reference Guide
Add NAT Server ("my_servers")
Service...
Server Private IP Address:
Public IP Address:
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
ADD NAT SERVER
CANCEL
■
Select Service and press Return. A pop-up menu appears listing a selection of commonly exported
services.
Add NAT Server ("my_servers")
+-Type------Port(s)-------+
+-------------------------+
Service...
| ftp
21
23
25
69
70
79
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| telnet
| smtp
Server Private IP Address:
Public IP Address:
| tftp
| gopher
| finger
| www-http 80
| pop2
| pop3
| snmp
109
110
161 - 162
| timbuktu 407
| pptp
| irc
1723
6665 - 6669 |
|
| Other...
+-------------------------+
CANCEL
ADD NAT SERVER
■
Choose the service you want to export and press Return.
You can choose a preconfigured service from the list, or define your own by selecting Other. If you select
Other, a screen is displayed that allows you to enter the port number range for your customized service.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Multiple Network Address Translation and IP Setup 10-15
Other Exported Port
First Port Number (1..65535):
Last Port Number (1..65535):
0
0
OK
CANCEL
■
Enter the First and Last Port Number between ports 1 and 65535. Select OK and press Return. You
will be returned to the Add NAT Server screen.
■
Enter the Server Private IP Address of the server whose service you are exporting.
Since MultiNAT permits the mapping of multiple private IP addresses to multiple public IP addresses, your
ISP or corporate site's router must be configured such that it knows that your multiple public addresses
correspond to multiple private addresses on your router.
If you want to use static mappings to map internal servers to public addresses, your ISP or corporate site's
router must also be configured for static routes to these public addresses on the Netopia Router.
■
Enter the Public IP Address to which you are exporting the service.
Note: For PAT Map lists and Server lists, if you use the Public Address 0.0.0.0, the list will acquire its
public IP address from the WAN IP address specified by your WAN IP configuration in the Connection Profile.
If that is a static IP address, then the PAT map list and Server lists will acquire that address. If it is a
negotiated IP address, such as may be assigned via DHCP or PPP, the PAT map list and Server lists will
acquire that address each time it is negotiated.
■
Select ADD NAT SERVER and press Return. The server will be added to your server list and you will be
returned to the Add NAT Server List screen.
Note: CUSeeMe (or other services that listen on specific ports) through MultiNAT works as it did for regular NAT
routers. In order to use CUSeeMe through the Netopia R2020 Router, you must export the ports 7648 and
7649. In MultiNAT, you may use a port range export. Without the export, CUSeeMe will fail to work.
Modifying server lists
Once a server list exists, you can select it for modification or deletion.
■
■
Select Show/ Change Server List from the Network Address Translation screen.
Select the Server List Name you want to modify from the pop-up menu and press Return.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-16 User’s Reference Guide
Network Address Translation
+-NAT Server List Name-+
+----------------------+
A| my_servers
|
S|
D|
|
|..
|
|
A|
S|
D|
|
|
|
|
|
A|
S|
D|
|
|
|.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
+----------------------+
Up/Down Arrow Keys to select, ESC to dismiss, Return/Enter to Edit.
The Show/ Change NAT Server List screen appears.
Show/Change NAT Server List
Server List Name:
my_servers
Add Server...
Show/Change Server...
Delete Server...
■
Selecting Show/ Change Server or Delete Server displays the same pop-up menu.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Multiple Network Address Translation and IP Setup 10-17
Show/Change NAT Server List
+-Private Address--Public Address----Port------------+
+----------------------------------------------------+
Se| 1.1.1.1
2.2.2.2
7.7.7.7
6.6.6.6
www-http 80
ftp 21
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| 3.3.3.3
| 5.5.5.5
timbuktu 407
Ad|
|
Sh|
|
De|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
+----------------------------------------------------+
Up/Down Arrow Keys to select, ESC to dismiss, Return/Enter to Edit.
Select any server from the list and press Return. The Change NAT Server screen appears.
Change NAT Server ("My Exports")
Service...
www-http 80
1.1.1.1
Server Private IP Address:
Public IP Address:
2.2.2.2
CHANGE NAT SERVER
CANCEL
You can make changes to the server’s service and port or internal or external address.
Select CHANGE NAT SERVER and press Return. Your changes take effect and you are returned to the
Show/ Change NAT Server List screen.
Deleting a server
To delete a server from the list, select Delete Server from the Show/ Change NAT Server List menu and press
Return.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-18 User’s Reference Guide
A pop-up menu lists your configured servers. Select the one you want to delete and press Return. A dialog box
asks you to confirm your choice.
Show/Change NAT Server List
+-Internal Address-External Address--Port------------+
+----------------------------------------------------+
Se| 1.1.1.1
2.2.2.2
www-http 80
|
| 3.+----------------------------------------------+ |
| 5.+----------------------------------------------+ |
Ad| | Are you sure you want to delete this Server? | |
| |
Sh| |
| |
| |
| |
| |
| |
CANCEL
CONTINUE
De| |
| +----------------------------------------------+ |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
+----------------------------------------------------+
Choose CONTINUE and press Return. The server is deleted from the list.
Once you have created your map lists and server lists, you must bind them to a profile, either a Connection
Profile or the Default Profile. You do this in one of the following screens:
■
■
the IP profile parameters screen (see below) of the Connection Profile configuration menu
the Default Answer Profile screen (see page 10-20)
IP profile parameters
To bind a map list to a Connection Profile, from the Main Menu go to the WAN Configuration screen then the
Display/ Change Connection Profile screen. From the pop-up menu list of your Connection Profiles, choose the
one you want to bind your map list to. Select IP Profile Parameters and press Return.
WAN
Configuration
Main
Menu
Display/ Change
Connection Profile
IP Profile
Parameters
The IP Profile Parameters screen appears.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Multiple Network Address Translation and IP Setup 10-19
IP Profile Parameters
Address Translation Enabled:
IP Addressing...
Yes
Unnumbered
NAT Map List...
NAT Server List...
Easy-PAT List
Easy-Servers
Local WAN IP Address:
0.0.0.0
Remote IP Address:
Remote IP Mask:
127.0.0.2
255.255.255.255
Filter Set...
NetBIOS Filter
Both
Remove Filter Set
Receive RIP:
Return/Enter to select <among/between> ...
Configure IP requirements for a remote network connection here.
■
Select NAT Map List and press Return. A pop-up menu displays a list of your defined map lists.
IP Profile Parameters
+--NAT Map List Name---+
+----------------------+
Address Trans| Easy-PAT
IP Addressing| my_first_map
| my_second_map
NAT Map List.| my_map
NAT Server Li| <<None>>
|
|s
|mbered
|
|sy PAT
|
|
Local WAN IP |
Local WAN IP |
Remote IP Add|
Remote IP Mas|
|
|0.0.0
|0.0.0
|7.0.0.2
|5.255.255.255
|
Filter Set...|
Remove Filter|
|
|tBIOS Filter
|
|
Receive RIP: |
|
|th
|
+----------------------+
Up/Down Arrow Keys to select, ESC to dismiss, Return/Enter to Edit.
■
■
Select the map list you want to bind to this Connection Profile and press Return. The map list you selected
will now be bound to this Connection Profile.
Select NAT Server List and press Return. A pop-up menu displays a list of your defined server lists.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-20 User’s Reference Guide
IP Profile Parameters
+-NAT Server List Name-+
+----------------------+
Address Trans| my_server_list
IP Addressing| my_servers
| <<None>>
|s
|mbered
|
NAT Map List.|
|sy PAT
NAT Server Li|
|
|
|
Local WAN IP |
Local WAN IP |
Remote IP Add|
Remote IP Mas|
|
|0.0.0
|0.0.0
|7.0.0.2
|5.255.255.255
|
Filter Set...|
Remove Filter|
|
|tBIOS Filter
|
|
Receive RIP: |
|
|th
|
+----------------------+
Up/Down Arrow Keys to select, ESC to dismiss, Return/Enter to Edit.
■
Select the server list you want to bind to this Connection Profile and press Return. The server list you
selected will now be bound to this Connection Profile.
Note: There is no interdependency between NAT and IP Addressing. Also, the Local WAN IP Address and Mask
fields’ visibility are dependent only on the IP Addressing type.
Default Answer Profile
When using the default answer profile for dial-in connections, the procedure is similar to binding map lists and
server lists to a Connection Profile.
From the Main Menu go to the WAN Configuration screen, then the WAN (Wide Area Network) Setup screen.
Select Default Answer Profile and press Return.
WAN
Configuration
Main
Menu
Default Answer
Profile
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Multiple Network Address Translation and IP Setup 10-21
The Default Answer Profile screen appears.
Default Answer Profile
Must Match a Defined Profile:
No
IP Enabled:
IP Parameters...
Yes
IPX Enabled:
No
Data Compression...
Max. Receive Packet Size:
Standard LZS
1500
Idle Timeout:
300
Return/Enter accepts * Tab toggles * ESC cancels.
Configure values which may be used when receiving a call in this screen.
If Must Match a Defined Profile is set to Yes, then the NAT attributes of the Connection Profile take
precedence. If you toggle Must Match a Defined Profile to No, IP-related menu options become visible.
■
Select IP Parameters and press Return. The IP Parameters (Default Answer Profile) screen appears.
IP Parameters (Default Answer Profile)
Filter Set (Firewall)...
Remove Filter Set
Address Translation Enabled:
Interface IP Address:
Yes
0.0.0.0
NAT Map List...
NAT Server List...
Receive RIP:
Transmit RIP:
Both
Off
Return/Enter to select a Firewall Filter Set for incoming calls.
Configure IP values to use when no matching Profile can be found.
You can then bind NAT Map Lists and NAT Server Lists in the same fashion as described in the section “IP
profile parameters” on page 10-18.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-22 User’s Reference Guide
NAT Associations
Configuration of map and server lists alone is not sufficient to enable NAT for a WAN connection because map
and server lists must be linked to a profile that controls the WAN interface. This can be a Connection Profile, a
WAN Ethernet interface, a default profile, or a default answer profile. Once you have configured your map and
server lists, you may want to reassign them to different interface-controlling profiles, for example, Connection
Profiles. To permit easy access to this IP Setup functionality, you can use the NAT Associations screen.
You access the NAT Associations screen from the Network Address Translation screen.
System
Configuration
Main
Menu
Network
Protocols Setup
IP
Setup
NAT
Associations
Select NAT Associations and press Return. The NAT Associations screen appears.
NAT Associations
Profile/Interface Name-------------Nat?-Map List Name-----Server List Name
Default Answer Profile
WAN Ethernet Port
Easy Setup Profile
Profile 01
On my_first_map
On my_first_map
On Easy-PAT
my_servers
my_server_list
my_servers
my_servers
my_server_list
<<None>>
On my_second_map
On my_first_map
On <<None>>
Profile 02
Profile 03
Profile 04
On <<None>>
<<None>>
■
■
You can toggle NAT? On or Off for each Profile/ Interface name. You do this by navigating to the NAT? field
associated with each profile using the arrow keys. Toggle NAT on or off by using the Tab key.
You can reassign any of your map lists or server lists to any of the Profile/ Interfaces. You do this by
navigating to the Map List Name or Server List Name field associated with each profile using the arrow
keys. Select the item by pressing Return to display a pop-up menu of all of your configured lists.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Multiple Network Address Translation and IP Setup 10-23
NAT Associations
+NAT Map List Name-+
Profile/Interface Name-------------Nat+------------------+Server List Name
Easy Setup Profile
Profile 01
On | Easy-PAT List
|my_servers
On | my_first_map
|my_servers
Profile 02
On | my_second_map
|my_server_list
Profile 03
Profile 04
On | my_map
|<<None>>
On | <<None>>
|<<None>>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Default Answer Profile
On +------------------+my_servers
Up/Down Arrow Keys to select, ESC to dismiss, Return/Enter to Edit.
■
Select the list name you want to assign and press Return again. Your selection will then be associated with
the corresponding profile or interface.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-24 User’s Reference Guide
MultiNAT Configuration Example
To help you understand a typical MultiNAT configuration, this section describes an example of the type of
configuration you may want to implement on your site. The values shown are for example purposes only. Make
your own appropriate substitutions.
A typical service from an ISP might include five user addresses. Without PAT, you might be able to attach only
five IP hosts. Using simple 1-to-many PAT you can connect more than five devices, but use only one of your
addresses. Using multiNAT you can make full use of the address range. The example assumes the following
range of addresses offered by a typical ISP:
Local WAN IP address:
Local WAN subnet mask:
Remote IP address:
Default gateway:
173.166.100.34
255.255.255.252
173.166.100.33
173.166.100.33
Public IP addresses assigned by the ISP are 206.1.1.1 through 206.1.1.6 (255.255.255.248 subnet mask).
Your internal devices have IP addresses of 192.168.1.1 through 192.168.1.254 (255.255.255.0 subnet
mask).
Netopia router's address is:
Web server's address is:
Mail server's address is:
FTP server's address is:
192.168.1.1
192.168.1.2
192.168.1.3
192.168.1.4
In this example you will statically map the first five public IP addresses (206.1.1.1 - 206.1.1.5) to the first five
corresponding private IP addresses (192.168.1.1 - 192.168.1.5). You will use these 1-to-1 mapped addresses
to give your servers “real” addresses. You will then map 206.1.1.6 to the remaining private IP addresses
(192.168.1.6 - 192.168.1.254) using PAT.
Note: The public side needs a static route indicating that to get to 206.1.1.1 - 206.1.1.5, it is necessary to go
through 173.166.100.34.
The configuration process is as follows:
From the Main Menu go to the Easy Setup and then the Connection Profile screen.
Easy
Setup
Main
Menu
Connection
Profile
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Multiple Network Address Translation and IP Setup 10-25
Enter your ISP-supplied values as shown below.
Connection Profile 1: Easy Setup Profile
Connection Profile Name:
Easy Setup Profile
Address Translation Enabled:
IP Addressing...
Yes
Numbered
Local WAN IP Address:
Local WAN IP Mask:
173.166.100.34
255.255.255.252
PREVIOUS SCREEN
NEXT SCREEN
Enter a subnet mask in decimal and dot form (xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx).
Enter basic information about your WAN connection with this screen.
Select NEXT SCREEN and press Return.
Your IP values are shown here.
IP Easy Setup
Ethernet IP Address:
Ethernet Subnet Mask:
192.168.1.1
255.255.255.0
Domain Name:
Primary Domain Name Server:
Secondary Domain Name Server:
ISP.net
173.166.101.1
173.166.102.1
Default IP Gateway:
IP Address Serving:
173.166.100.33
On
Number of Client IP Addresses:
1st Client Address:
248
192.168.1.6
PREVIOUS SCREEN
NEXT SCREEN
Set up the basic IP & IPX attributes of your Netopia in this screen.
Then navigate to the Network Address Translation (NAT) screen.
System
Configuration
Main
Menu
Network
Protocols Setup
IP
Setup
Network Address
Translation (NAT)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-26 User’s Reference Guide
Select Show/ Change Public Range, then Easy-PAT Range, and press Return. Enter the value your ISP assigned
for your public address (206.1.1.6, in this example). Toggle Type to pat. Your public address is then mapped to
the remaining private IP addresses using PAT. (If you were not using the Easy-PAT Range and Easy-PAT List that
is created by default by using Easy Setup, you would have to define a public range and Map List. For the
purpose of this example you can just alter this range and list.)
Change NAT Public Range
Range Name:
Type...
Easy-PAT Range
pat
Public Address:
206.1.1.6
First Public Port:
Last Public Port:
49152
65535
CHANGE NAT PUBLIC RANGE
CANCEL
Select CHANGE NAT PUBLIC RANGE and press Return. This returns you to the Network Address Translation
screen.
Select Add Public Range and press Return. Type a name for this static range, as shown below. Enter the first
and last public addresses your ISP assigned in their respective fields as shown. The first five public IP
addresses (206.1.1.1 - 206.1.1.5, in this example) are statically mapped to the first five corresponding private
IP addresses (192.168.1.1 - 192.168.1.5).
Add NAT Public Range
Range Name:
Static Range
static
Type...
First Public Address:
Last Public Address:
206.1.1.1
206.1.1.5
ADD NAT PUBLIC RANGE
CANCEL
Return/Enter to commit changes.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Multiple Network Address Translation and IP Setup 10-27
Select ADD NAT PUBLIC RANGE and press Return. You are returned to the Network Address Translation
screen.
Next, select Show/ Change Map List and choose Easy-PAT List. Select Add Map. The Add NAT Map screen
appears. (Now the name Easy-PAT List is a misnomer since it has a static map included in its list.) Enter in
192.168.1.1 for the First Private Address and 192.168.1.5 for the Last Private Address.
Add NAT Map ("Easy-PAT List")
First Private Address:
Last Private Address:
192.168.1.1
192.168.1.5
Use NAT Public Range...
ADD NAT MAP
CANCEL
Select Use NAT Public Range and from the pop-up menu choose Static Range. Select ADD NAT MAP and
press Return.
This will statically map the first five public IP addresses to the first five corresponding private IP addresses and
will map 206.1.1.6 to the remaining private IP addresses using PAT.
Notes on the example
The Easy-Map List and the Easy-PAT List are attached to any new Connection Profile by default. If you want to
use this NAT configuration on a previously defined Connection Profile then you need to bind the Map List to the
profile. You do this through either the NAT Associations screen or the profile’s configuration screens.
The PAT part of this example setup will allow any user on the Netopia Router's LAN with an IP address in the
range of 192.168.1.6 through 192.168.1.254 to initiate traffic flow to the outside world (for example, the
Internet). No one on the Internet would be able to initiate a conversation with them.
The Static Remapping part of this example will allow any of the machines in the range of addresses from
192.168.1.1 through 192.168.1.5 to communicate with the outside world as if they were at the addresses
206.1.1.1 through 206.1.1.5, respectively. It also allows any machine on the Internet to access any service
(port) on any of these five machines.
You may decide this poses a security risk. You may decide that anyone can have complete access to your FTP
server, but not to your router, and only limited access to the desired services (ports) on the Web and Mail
servers.
To make these changes, first limit the range of remapped addresses on the Static Map and then edit the
default Server List called Easy-Servers.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-28 User’s Reference Guide
■
First, navigate to the Show/ Change Map List screen, select Easy-PAT List and then Show/ Change Maps.
Choose the Static Map you created and change the First Private Address from 192.168.1.1 to
192.168.1.4. Now the router, Web, and Mail servers’ IP addresses are no longer included in the range of
static remappings and are therefore no longer accessible to the outside world. Users on the Internet will
not be able to telnet, web, SNMP or ping to them. It is best also to navigate to the public range screen and
change the Static Range to go from 206.1.1.5.
■
Next, navigate to Show/ Change Server List and select Easy-Servers and then Add Server. You should
export both the Web (www-http) and Mail (smtp) ports to one of the now free public addresses. Select
Service... and from the resulting pop-up menu select www-http. In the resulting screen enter your Web
server's address, 192.168.1.2 and the public address, for example, 206.1.1.2 and then select ADD NAT
SERVER. Now return to Add Server, choose the smtp port and enter 192.168.1.3, your Mail server's IP
address for the Server Private IP Address. You can decide if you want to present both your Web and Mail
services as being on the same public address, 206.1.1.2, or if you prefer to have your Mail server appear
to be at a different IP address, 206.1.1.3. For the sake of this example, alias both services to 206.1.1.2.
Now, as before, the PAT configuration will allow any user on the Netopia Router's LAN with an IP address in the
range of 192.168.1.6 through 192.168.1.254 to initiate traffic flow to the Internet. Someone at the FTP server
can access the Internet and the Internet can access all services of the FTP machine as if it were at 206.1.1.5.
The router cannot directly communicate with the outside world. The only communication between the Web
server and the Internet is through port 80, the web port, as if the server were located on a machine at IP
address 206.1.1.2. Similarly, the only communication with the Mail server is through port 25, the SMTP port,
as if it were located at IP address 206.1.1.2
Firmware upgrades and NAT
If you are upgrading from an earlier firmware version, your previous NAT configuration will continue to work as
you have configured it.
A NAT map list, and possibly a server list, will be created for each enabled profile that has NAT enabled. For
each profile with a unique local WAN IP address, a single outside PAT public range will be created whose
address is the profile’s local WAN IP address. A map list will be created with as many maps as there are
enabled subnets on the ethernet. Each of these maps will bind each subnet to the outside public range.
Likewise, if exports exist, a server list will be created for each NAT-enabled Connection Profile with a unique
local WAN IP address that maps the interior server address and port to the local WAN IP address of the profile.
Both the map list and server list that applies to the particular profile will be bound to that profile.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Multiple Network Address Translation and IP Setup 10-29
IP subnets
The IP Subnets screen allows you to configure up to eight Ethernet IP subnets, one “primary” subnet and up to
seven secondary subnets, by entering IP address/ subnet mask pairs:
IP Subnets
IP Address
----------------
#1: 192.128.117.162
Subnet Mask
---------------
255.255.255.0
#2: 0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
#3:
#4:
#5:
#6:
#7:
#8:
Note: You need not use this screen if you have only a single Ethernet IP subnet. In that case, you can continue
to enter or edit the IP address and subnet mask for the single subnet on the IP Setup screen.
This screen displays up to eight rows of two editable columns, preceded by a row number between one and
eight. If you have eight subnets configured, there will be eight rows on this screen. Otherwise, there will be one
more row than the number of configured subnets. The last row will have the value 0.0.0.0 in both the IP
address and subnet mask fields to indicate that you can edit the values in this row to configure an additional
subnet. All eight row labels are always visible, regardless of the number of subnets configured.
■
To add an IP subnet, enter the Netopia R2020’s IP address on the subnet in the IP Address field in a
particular row and the subnet mask for the subnet in the Subnet Mask field in that row.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-30 User’s Reference Guide
For example:
IP Subnets
IP Address
Subnet Mask
---------------
255.255.255.0
----------------
#1: 192.128.117.162
#2: 192.128.152.162
255.255.0.0
0.0.0.0
#3: 0.0.0.0
#4:
#5:
#6:
#7:
#8:
■
To delete a configured subnet, set both the IP address and subnet mask values to 0.0.0.0, either explicitly
or by clearing each field and pressing Return or Enter to commit the change. When a configured subnet is
deleted, the values in subsequent rows adjust up to fill the vacant fields.
Note that the subnets configured on this screen are tied to the address serving pools configured on the IP
Address Pools screen, and that changes on this screen may affect the IP Address Pools screen. In particular,
deleting a subnet configured on this screen will delete the corresponding address serving pool, if any, on the IP
Address Pools screen.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Multiple Network Address Translation and IP Setup 10-31
If you have configured multiple Ethernet IP subnets, the IP Setup screen changes slightly:
IP Setup
Subnet Configuration...
Default IP Gateway:
192.128.117.163
Primary Domain Name Server:
Secondary Domain Name Server:
Domain Name:
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
Receive RIP:
Transmit RIP:
Static Routes...
Both
v2 (multicast)
Address Serving Setup...
Exported Services...
Filter Sets...
The IP address and Subnet mask items are hidden, and the “Define Additional Subnets...” item becomes
“Subnet Configuration...”. If you select Subnet Configuration, you will return to the IP Subnets screen that
allows you to define IP addresses and masks for additional Ethernet IP subnets.
■
Select Static Routes to manually configure IP routes. See the following section.
Static routes
Static routes are IP routes that are maintained manually. Each static route acts as a pointer that tells the
Netopia R2020 how to reach a particular network. However, static routes are used only if they appear in the IP
routing table, which contains all of the routes used by the Netopia R2020 (see “IP routing table” on page 13-8).
Static routes are helpful in situations where a route to a network must be used and other means of finding the
route are unavailable. For example, static routes are useful when you cannot rely on RIP.
To go to the Static Routes screen, select the Static Routes item in the IP Setup screen.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-32 User’s Reference Guide
Static Routes
Display/Change Static Route...
Add Static Route...
Delete Static Route...
Configure/View/Delete Static Routes from this and the following Screens.
Viewing static routes
To display a view-only table of static routes, select Display/ Change Static Route in the Static Routes screen.
+-Dest. Network---Subnet Mask-----Next Gateway----Priority-Enabled-+
+------------------------------------------------------------------+
| 0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
127.0.0.2
Low
Yes
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
+------------------------------------------------------------------+
Select a Static Route to modify.
The table has the following columns:
Dest. Network: The network IP address of the destination network.
Subnet Mask: The subnet mask associated with the destination network.
Next Gateway: The IP address of the router that will be used to reach the destination network.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Multiple Network Address Translation and IP Setup 10-33
Priority: An indication whether the Netopia R2020 will use the static route when it conflicts with information
received from RIP packets.
Enabled: An indication whether the static route should be installed in the IP routing table.
Adding a static route
To add a new static route, select Add Static Route in the Static Routes screen and go to the Add Static Route
screen.
Add Static Route
Static Route Enabled:
Yes
Destination Network IP Address:
0.0.0.0
Destination Network Subnet Mask: 0.0.0.0
Next Gateway IP Address:
Route Priority...
0.0.0.0
High
No
Advertise Route Via RIP:
ADD STATIC ROUTE NOW
CANCEL
Configure a new Static Route in this Screen.
■
■
To install the static route in the IP routing table, select Static Route Enabled and toggle it to Yes. To
remove the static route from the IP routing table, select Static Route Enabled and toggle it to No.
Be sure to read the rules on the installation of static routes in the IP routing table. See “Rules of static
route installation” on page 10-34.
■
■
■
Select Destination Network IP Address and enter the network IP address of the destination network.
Select Destination Network Subnet Mask and enter the subnet mask used by the destination network.
Select Next Gateway IP Address and enter the IP address for the router that the Netopia R2020 will use to
reach the destination network. This router does not necessarily have to be part of the destination network,
but it must at least know where to forward packets destined for that network.
■
Select Route Priority and choose High or Low. High means that the static route takes precedence over RIP
information; Low means that the RIP information takes precedence over the static route.
■
■
If the static route conflicts with a connection profile, the connection profile will always take precedence.
To make sure that the static route is known only to the Netopia R2020, select Advertise Route Via RIP
and toggle it to No. To allow other RIP-capable routers to know about the static route, select Advertise
Route Via RIP and toggle it to Yes. When Advertise Route Via RIP is toggled to Yes, a new item called RIP
Metric appears below Advertise Route Via RIP.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-34 User’s Reference Guide
With RIP Metric you set the number of routers, from 1 to 15, between the sending router and the
destination router. The maximum number of routers on a packet’s route is 15. Setting RIP Metric to 1
means that a route can involve 15 routers, while setting it to 15 means a route can only involve one router.
■
■
Select ADD STATIC ROUTE NOW to save the new static route, or select CANCEL to discard it and return to
the Static Routes screen.
Up to 16 static routes can be created, but one is always reserved for the default gateway, which is
configured using either Easy Setup or the IP Setup screen in System Configuration.
Modifying a static route
To modify a static route, select Display/ Change Static Route in the Static Routes screen to display a table of
static routes.
Select a static route from the table and go to the Change Static Route screen. The parameters in this screen
are the same as the ones in the Add Static Route screen (see “Adding a static route” on page 10-33).
Deleting a static route
To delete a static route, select Delete Static Route in the Static Routes screen to display a table of static
routes. Select a static route from the table and press Return to delete it. To exit the table without deleting the
selected static route, press the Escape key.
Rules of static route installation
The Netopia R2020 applies certain rules before installing enabled static routes in the IP routing table. An
enabled static route will not be installed in the IP routing table if any of the following conditions are true:
■
The static route’s Next Gateway IP Address matches the IP address used by a connection profile or the
Netopia R2020’s Ethernet port.
■
The static route’s Next Gateway IP Address matches an IP address in the range of IP addresses being
distributed by MacIP or DHCP.
■
■
■
The static route’s Next Gateway IP Address is determined to be unreachable by the Netopia R2020.
The static route’s route information conflicts with a connection profile’s route information.
The connection profile associated with the static route is set for dial-in connections only, and there is no
incoming call connected to that connection profile.
■
The connection profile associated with the static route has a disabled dial-on-demand setting, and there is
no current connection using that connection profile.
A static route is already installed in the IP routing table will be removed if any of the conditions listed above
become true for that static route. However, an enabled static route is automatically reinstalled once the
conditions listed above are no longer true for that static route.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Multiple Network Address Translation and IP Setup 10-35
IP address serving
• Serve DHCP Clients
System
Configuration
Main
Menu
IP Address
Serving
• Serve BootP Clients
• Serve Dynamic WAN Clients
• Serve Mac IP/ KIP Clients
In addition to being a router, the Netopia R2020 is also an IP address server. There are four protocols it can
use to distribute IP addresses.
■
The first, called Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP), is widely supported on PC networks, as
well as Apple Macintosh computers using Open Transport and computers using the UNIX operating system.
Addresses assigned via DHCP are “leased” or allocated for a short period of time; if a lease is not
renewed, the address becomes available for use by another computer. DHCP also allows most of the IP
parameters for a computer to be configured by the DHCP server, simplifying setup of each machine.
■
■
■
The second, called BOOTP (also known as Bootstrap Protocol), is the predecessor to DHCP and allows
older IP hosts to obtain most of the information that a DHCP client would obtain. However, in contrast,
BOOTP address assignments are “permanent” since there is no lease renewal mechanism in BOOTP.
The third protocol, called Dynamic WAN, is part of the PPP/ MP suite of wide area protocols used for WAN
connections. It allows remote terminal adapters and NAT-enabled routers to be assigned a temporary IP
address for the duration of their connection.
The fourth protocol, called MacIP, is used only for computers on AppleTalk networks. MacIP provides a
protocol translation (or gateway) function between IP and AppleTalk as well as an IP address assignment
mechanism. Like DHCP, MacIP address assignments are normally temporary, although you may also use
static IP addresses with MacIP.
Since no two hosts can use the same IP address at the same time, make sure that the addresses distributed
by the Netopia R2020, and those that are manually configured are not the same. Each method of distribution
must have its own exclusive range of addresses to draw from.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-36 User’s Reference Guide
To go to the IP Address Serving screen, select IP Address Serving in the System Configuration screen and
press Return.
IP Address Serving
Number of Client IP Addresses:
1st Client Address:
Client Default Gateway...
5
192.168.6.138
192.168.6.137
Serve DHCP Clients:
DHCP NetBios Options...
Yes
Serve BOOTP Clients:
Yes
Yes
Yes
Serve Dynamic WAN Clients
Serve MacIP/KIP Clients:
MacIP/KIP Static Options...
Enter the maximum number of dynamic IP clients to support.
Configure Address Serving (DHCP, BOOTP, etc.) here.
Follow these steps to configure IP Address Serving:
■
If you enabled IP Address Serving either by using SmartStart or in Easy Setup, DHCP, BootP clients,
Dynamic WAN clients, and MacIP/ KIP clients (if you have the AppleTalk kit installed) are automatically
enabled.
■
Select Number of Client IP Addresses and enter the total number of contiguous IP addresses that the
Netopia R2020 will distribute to the client machines on your local area network.
■
■
In the screen example shown above, five Client IP addresses have been allocated.
Select 1st Client Address and enter the first client IP address that you will allocate to your first client
machine. For instance, on your local area network you may first want to figure out what machines are going
to be allocated specific static IP addresses so that you can determine the pool of IP addresses that you will
be serving addresses from via DHCP, BOOTP, Dynamic WAN, and/ or MacIP.
■
■
Example: Your ISP has given your Netopia R2020 the IP address 192.168.6.137, with a subnet mask of
255.255.255.248. The subnet mask allocated will give you six IP addresses to use when connecting to the
ISP over the Internet (for more information on understanding IP addressing refer to Appendix C,
“Understanding IP Addressing.”). Your address range will be from .137-.143. In this example you would
enter 192.168.6.138 as the 1st client address, as the router itself must have an IP address.
To enable DHCP, select Serve DHCP Clients and toggle it to Yes. DHCP serving is automatic when IP
Address Serving is enabled.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Multiple Network Address Translation and IP Setup 10-37
DHCP NetBIOS Options
If your network uses NetBIOS, you can enable the Netopia R2020 to use DHCP to distribute NetBIOS
information.
NetBIOS stands for Network Basic Input/ Output System. It is a layer of software originally developed by IBM
and Sytek to link a network operating system with specific hardware. NetBIOS has been adopted as an industry
standard. It offers LAN applications, a variety of “hooks” to carry out inter-application communications and data
transfer. Essentially, NetBIOS is a way for application programs to talk to the network. To run an application that
works with NetBIOS, a non-IBM network operating system or network interface card must offer a NetBIOS
emulator. Many vendors either provide a version of NetBIOS to interface with their hardware or emulate its
transport layer communications services in their network products. A NetBIOS emulator is a program provided
by NetWare clients that allow workstations to run applications that support IBM’s NetBIOS calls.
■
Select Serve NetBIOS Options and press Return. The DHCP NetBIOS Options screen appears.
DHCP NetBios Options
Serve NetBios Type:
NetBios Type...
Yes
Type B
Serve NetBios Scope:
NetBios Scope:
No
Serve NetBios Name Server:
NetBios Name Server IP Addr:
No
0.0.0.0
Configure DHCP-served NetBIOS options here.
■
■
To serve DHCP clients with the type of NetBIOS used on your network, select Serve NetBIOS Type and
toggle it to Yes.
From the NetBIOS Type pop-up menu, select the type of NetBIOS used on your network.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-38 User’s Reference Guide
DHCP NetBios Options
+--------+
Serve NetBios Type:
+--------+
| Type B |
| Type P |
| Type M |
| Type H |
+--------+
No
NetBios Type...
Serve NetBios Scope:
NetBios Scope:
Serve NetBios Name Server:
NetBios Name Server IP Addr:
0.0.0.0
■
■
To serve DHCP clients with the NetBIOS scope, select Serve NetBIOS Scope and toggle it to Yes.
Select NetBIOS Scope and enter the scope.
To serve DHCP clients with the IP address of a NetBIOS name server, select Serve NetBIOS Name Server
and toggle it to Yes.
Select NetBIOS Name Server IP Address and enter the IP address for the NetBIOS name server.
You are now finished setting up DHCP NetBIOS Options. To return to the IP Address Serving screen press
the Escape key once.
■
To enable BootP’s address serving capability, select Serve BOOTP Clients and toggle to Yes.
Note: Addresses assigned through BOOTP are permanently allocated from the IP Address Serving pool
until you release them.
To view all of the IP addresses currently being served by the Netopia R2020, from the Statistics & Logs menu
select Served IP Addresses.
Statistics
& Logs
Main
Menu
Served IP
Addresses
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Multiple Network Address Translation and IP Setup 10-39
The Served IP Addresses screen appears.
Served IP Addresses
-IP Address-------Type----Expires--Client Identifier--------------------------
----------------------------------SCROLL UP-----------------------------------
192.168.1.100
192.168.1.101
192.168.1.102
192.168.1.103
192.168.1.104
192.168.1.105
192.168.1.106
192.168.1.107
192.168.1.108
192.168.1.109
192.168.1.110
192.168.1.111
192.168.1.112
192.168.1.113
DHCP
00:59
EN: 08-00-07-16-0c-85
EN: 00-00-c5-4a-1f-ea
BOOTP 00:44
---------------------------------SCROLL DOWN----------------------------------
Lease Management...
EN = Ethernet Address; AT = AppleTalk Address; CP = Profile Name; HX = hex
To release these addresses, select Lease Management.
IP Address Lease Management
Reset All Leases
Release BootP Leases
Reclaim Declined Addresses
Hit RETURN/ENTER, you will return to the previous screen.
Select Release BootP Leases and press Return.
For more lease management information see “Served IP Addresses” on page 13-10.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-40 User’s Reference Guide
DHCP Relay Agent
The R2020 offers DHCP Relay Agent functionality, as defined in RFC1542. A DHCP relay agent is a computer
system or a router that is configured to forward DHCP requests from clients on the LAN to a remote DHCP
server, and to pass the replies back to the requesting client systems.
When a DHCP client starts up, it has no IP address, nor does it know the IP address of a DHCP server.
Therefore, it uses an IP broadcast to communicate with one or more DHCP servers. These broadcasts are
normally limited to the network segment on which the client is located, and do not pass through routers such as
the Netopia Router. If the Netopia Router is configured to act as a DHCP server, it will assign the client an
address from an address pool configured locally in the Netopia Router and respond to the client's request
itself.
However, if the Netopia Router is configured to act as a DHCP relay agent, it does not satisfy the DHCP request
itself, but instead forwards the request to one or more remote DHCP servers. These servers process the
request, assign an address from an address pool configured on the remote server, and forward the response
back to the Netopia Router for delivery back to the client. The agent then sends the response to the client on
behalf of the DHCP server. This process is transparent to the client, which doesn't know that it is
communicating through an intermediary rather than directly to a local server. Using DHCP relay, it is possible to
centralize the configuration information for the host computers at many remote sites at single location, easing
the burden of administering configuration management for remote sites.
To configure the Netopia Router to act as a DHCP relay agent, from the Main Menu navigate to the System
Configuration menu.
System
Configuration
Main
Menu
IP Address
Serving
Select IP Address Serving and press Return. The IP Address Serving screen appears.
IP Address Serving
+------------------+
+------------------+
IP Address Serving Mode...
| Disabled
|
|
| DHCP Server
Number of Client IP Addresses: | DHCP Relay Agent |
1st Client Address:
+------------------+
192.168.1.1
Client Default Gateway...
Serve DHCP Clients:
Yes
Yes
DHCP NetBIOS Options...
Serve BOOTP Clients:
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Multiple Network Address Translation and IP Setup 10-41
Select IP Address Serving Mode. The pop-up menu offers the choices of Disabled, DHCP Server (the default),
and DHCP Relay Agent.
If you select DHCP Relay Agent and press Return, the screen changes as shown below.
IP Address Serving
IP Address Serving Mode...
DHCP Relay Agent
Relay Server #1:
Relay Server #2:
Relay Server #3:
10.1.1.1
20.1.1.1
30.1.1.1
Configure Address Serving (DHCP, BOOTP, etc.) here.
Now you can enter the IP address(es) of your remote DHCP server(s), such as might be located in your
company’s corporate headquarters. Each time you enter an IP address and press Return, an additional field
appears. You can enter up to four DHCP server addresses.
In the example above, DHCP requests from clients on the LAN will be relayed to the DHCP servers at IP
addresses 10.1.1.1, 20.1.1.1, and 30.1.1.1.
MacIP (Kip Forwarding) Options
When hosts using AppleTalk (typically those using LocalTalk) are not directly connected to an IP network (usually
an Ethernet), they must use a MacIP (AppleTalk-IP) gateway.
The optional Netopia AppleTalk feature enhancement kit provides for this service. A MacIP gateway converts
network traffic into the correct format for AppleTalk or IP, depending on the traffic’s destination. The MacIP
gateway can also distribute IP addresses to AppleTalk computers on the network.
Note: Macintosh computers that have LocalTalk or EtherTalk selected in the MacTCP control panel, or
“AppleTalk (MacIP)” selected in the TCP/ IP control panel, must use the MacIP gateway to communicate with the
Internet or any other IP network. Users should point their MacTCP or TCP/ IP control panel to look in the
LocalTalk zone for the MacIP server. Macintosh computers that have Ethernet selected in the MacTCP or TCP/ IP
control panel can do their own AppleTalk-IP conversions.
Setting up MacIP involves choosing MacIP dynamic address serving and then configuring that type. KIP
forwarding is simply a method for distributing IP addresses to AppleTalk clients.
To go to the MacIP Setup screen, select MacIP/ KIP Clients in the IP Address Serving screen from the System
Configuration menu.
■
Select Serve Mac IP/ KIP Clients and toggle to Yes, to enable MacIP/ KIP address serving capability. This
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-42 User’s Reference Guide
option is automatically enabled if the AppleTalk kit is installed and IP Address Serving is enabled.
■
Select MacIP/ KIP Static Options and press Return. The MacIP (KIP) Forwarding Setup screen tells the
Netopia R2020 how many static addresses to allocate for MacIP/ KIP clients. The addresses must fall
within the address pool from the previous screen. You will need to enter the number of static MacIP
addresses to reserve in this screen.
Note that the address pool IP range will also be listed for your referral in this screen.
MacIP (KIP) Forwarding Setup
This screen tells the Netopia how many static addresses to allocate for
MacIP/KIP clients. The addresses must fall within one of the address pools
from the previous screen.
Number of Static Addresses:
First Static Client Address:
0
0.0.0.0
Enter the number of static MacIP addresses to reserve here.
Reserve static MacIP addresses for KIP Forwarding here.
You have finished your IP Setup.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IPX Setup 11-1
Chapter 11
IPX Setup
Internetwork Packet Exchange (IPX) is the network protocol used by Novell NetWare networks. This chapter
shows you how to configure the Netopia R2020 for routing data using IPX. You also learn how to configure the
This section covers the following topics:
■
■
■
“IPX Features” on page 11-1
“IPX Definitions” on page 11-1
“IPX routing tables” on page 11-7
IPX Features
The Netopia R2020 supports the following IPX features:
■
■
■
■
■
IPX RIP and SAP
NetBIOS broadcast packet forwarding (IPX type 20)
IPX packet filtering definable by source and destination IPX address and socket number, for added security
IPX SAP filtering to aid in optimizing WAN bandwidth
Dial-on-demand features:
■
■
Spoofing of IPX keep-alive, SPX, and server serialization packets
Configurable RIP/ SAP timers on connection profiles
IPX Definitions
This section defines IPX-related protocols such as RIP, SAP and NetBIOS, in addition to other related terms. See
the next section for setup instructions.
Internetwork Packet Exchange (IPX)
IPX is a datagram, connectionless protocol that Novell adapted from Xerox Network System’s (XNS) Internet
Datagram Protocol (IDP). IPX is dynamically routed, and the routing architecture works by “learning” network
addressing automatically.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11-2 User’s Reference Guide
IPX address
An IPX address consists of a network number, a node number, and a socket number. An IPX network number is
composed of eight hexadecimal digits. The network number must be the same for all nodes on a particular
physical network segment. The node number is composed of twelve hexadecimal digits and is usually the
hardware address of the interface card. The node number must be unique inside the particular IPX network.
Socket numbers correspond to the particular service being accessed.
Socket
A socket in IPX is the equivalent of a port in TCP/ IP. Sockets route packets to different processes within a
single node. Novell has reserved several sockets for use in the NetWare environment:
Field Value
Packet Type
Description
00h
Unknown Packet Type
Used for all packets not clas-
sified by any other type
01h
04h
05h
11h
14h
Routing Information Packet
Service Advertising Packet
Sequenced Packet
Unused for RIP packets
Used for SAP packets
Used for SPX packets
Used for NCP packets
Used for Novell NetBIOS
NetWare Core Protocol Packet
Propagated Packet
Routing Information Protocol (RIP)
RIP, which was also derived from XNS, is a protocol that allows for the bidirectional transfer of routing tables
and provides timing information (ticks), so that the fastest route to a destination can be determined. IPX
routers use RIP to create and dynamically maintain databases of internetwork routing information. See the last
section in this chapter for more information on routing tables.
Service Advertising Protocol (SAP)
SAP is a protocol that provides servers and routers with a method to exchange service information. Using SAP,
servers advertise their services and addresses. Routers collect this information to dynamically update their
routing tables and share it with other routers. These broadcasts keep all routers on the internetwork
synchronized and provide real-time information on accessible servers on the internetwork.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IPX Setup 11-3
The following is a list of common SAP server types:
Unknown
0000h
0003h
0004h
0005h
0007h
0009h
0024h
0047h
8000h
Print Queue
File Server
Job Server
Print Server
Archive Server
Remote Bridge Server
Advertising Print Server
Reserved Up To
NetBIOS
NetBIOS is a protocol that performs tasks related to the Transport and Session layers of the OSI model. It can
operate over IPX, using a special broadcast packet known as “IPX Packet type 20” to communicate with IPX
NetBIOS servers.
IPX Spoofing
The Netopia R2020 has several IPX features designed to restrict the traffic on the dial-up link when the unit is
not sending or receiving IPX data. When the link is idle and a user is logged into a Novell server, the server will
send “keep alive” packets to ensure the user is still there. If the link is idle, the “keep alive” packets will be
sent back to the server by the locally connected Netopia R2020 as though they came back from the user
without bringing up the dial-up link.
Similarly, “SPX keep alive” packets are treated in this manner. IPX RIP, and SAP messages will not be sent if the
link is down. Together these features enable the user to remain connected to a Novell server or SPX peer
without bringing up the dial-up link, except to send and receive actual user data.
IPX setup
Network
Protocols
Setup
System
Configuration
Main
Menu
IPX Setup
The IPX Setup screen is where you configure the Ethernet side of the Netopia R2020. The information you enter
here controls how the Router routes IPX traffic.
Consult your network administrator for the IPX setup information you will need before changing any of the
settings in this screen. Changes made in this screen will take effect only after the Netopia R2020 is reset.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11-4 User’s Reference Guide
To go to the IPX Setup screen, from the Main Menu select System Configuration and then select Network
Protocols Setup and then select IPX Setup.
Note: If you have completed Easy Setup, the information you have already entered will appear in the IP Setup
options screen.
IPX Setup
IPX Routing:
On
Ethernet Encapsulation...
Ethernet Network Address:
802.3
00000000
Ethernet Path Delay:
Ethernet NetBios Forwarding:
Ethernet Inbound SAP Filter Set...
1
No
<<NONE>>
Default Gateway Address:
Filters and Filter Sets...
IPX Wan Pool Base Address
00000000
00000000
Return/Enter accepts * Tab toggles * ESC cancels.
Set up the basic IPX attributes of your Netopia in this screen.
1. To enable IPX routing, select IPX Routing, toggle it to On, and press Return.
2. To change Ethernet encapsulation from the commonly used 802.3 standard, select Ethernet
Encapsulation and choose a different encapsulation method.
3. Select Ethernet Network Address and enter the network address of the IPX network connected to the
Netopia R2020’s Ethernet port.
Note: If the Ethernet network address is set to zero, the Router will attempt to learn the address from any
configured IPX device on the Ethernet network or from the remote IPX network when a call is established.
4. To change the default path delay, select Ethernet Path Delay and enter a value (in ticks). This value is used
to determine the port cost of using the Ethernet port in IPX RIP calculations.
5. To enable NetBIOS packet forwarding, select Ethernet NetBIOS Forwarding and toggle it to Yes. This
parameter will determine whether “IPX Packet type 20” packets are forwarded on the Ethernet interface.
These packets are used by NetBIOS and some other applications.
6. Select Ethernet Inbound SAP Filter Set to filter incoming IPX SAP advertisements on the Ethernet. By
attaching an incoming SAP filter on the Ethernet, you can restrict the number of SAP entries learned on a
large IPX network to only those required by remote users connecting to the Netopia R2020. An Ethernet
SAP filter must be used with networks that have so many servers advertised that the Netopia R2020 would
otherwise exhaust its internal memory storing server entries.
To attach a SAP filter set, first define the filter set using the Filters and Filter Sets option (see step 8
below). Then select the filter set from the Ethernet Incoming SAP Filter Set pop-up menu. To detach the
filter set, select Detach Filter Set.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IPX Setup 11-5
7. Select Default Gateway Address, and enter the network address of the IPX network to which all packets of
unknown destination address should be routed.
Note: The Default Gateway Address is usually set up to match the IPX Address in your network Connection
Profile.
8. To configure filters and filter sets, select Filters and Filter Sets and go to the IPX filters and filter sets
screens. For information on how to configure IPX filters and filter sets, see “IPX filters” on page 14-21.
9. Select IPX Wan Pool Base Address and enter the first IPX network address to be allocated to requesting
IPX WAN clients. The base address you enter must not conflict with other IPX networks assigned to your IPX
internet.
IPX in the answer profile
The answer profile can be configured to accept calls from remote IPX networks. To configure the answer profile
to accept calls from remote IPX networks, from the WAN Configuration menu go to the Default Answer Profile
screen.
WAN
Configuration
Main
Menu
Default Answer
Profile
Note: The Default Answer Profile screen varies according to configuration.
Default Answer Profile
Calling Number Authentication...
Ignored
Must Match a Defined Profile:
Yes
PPP Authentication...
PAP
Configure values which may be used when receiving a call in this screen.
To enable IPX routing in the answer profile, select IPX Enabled and toggle it to Yes. When IPX Enabled is set to
Yes, the item IPX Parameters appears below it.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11-6 User’s Reference Guide
To configure IPX routing in the answer profile, select IPX Parameters and go to the IPX Parameters (Default
Answer Profile) screen. The items in this screen are similar to the IPX Profile Parameters items of the same
name (see page 11-5).
IPX Parameters (Default Answer Profile)
NetBios Packet Forwarding:
Off
Incoming Packet Filter Set...
Outgoing Packet Filter Set...
Incoming SAP Filter Set...
Outgoing SAP Filter Set...
Detach Filter Sets...
Periodic RIP Timer:
Periodic SAP Timer:
60
60
Configure IPX values to use when no matching Profile can be found.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IPX Setup 11-7
IPX routing tables
Main
Menu
• IPX Routing Table
• IPX SAP Bindery Table
Statistics & Logs
IPX routing tables provide information on current IPX routes and services.
To go to the IPX Routing Table screen, select IPX Routing Table in the Routing Tables screen. This table shows
detailed information about current IPX network routes.
IPX Routing Table
Net Addr-Hops-Ticks-Type--Status-Interface--------------via Router------------
-----------------------------------SCROLL UP----------------------------------
00000020 2
00000030 2
00000033 4
00000100 2
00000110 1
3 RIP Active Ethernet
12 RIP Active Ethernet
14 RIP Active Ethernet
7 RIP Active Ethernet
1 RIP Active Ethernet
00000120:00000c465c2f
00000120:00000c465c2f
000000120:00000c465c2f
00000120:00000c465c2f
00000120:00000c465c2f
---------------------------------SCROLL DOWN-----------------------------
UPDATE
To go to the IPX SAP Bindery Table screen, select IPX SAP Bindery Table in the Routing Tables screen. This
table shows detailed information about available IPX services and their location.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11-8 User’s Reference Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AppleTalk Setup 12-1
Chapter 12
AppleTalk Setup
This chapter discusses the concept of AppleTalk routing and how to configure AppleTalk Setup for a Netopia
R2020 with the AppleTalk kit installed.
AppleTalk support is available as a separate kit for the Netopia R2020 Dual Analog Router. Skip this chapter if
This section covers the following topics:
■
■
■
“AppleTalk networks” on page 12-1
“Installing AppleTalk” on page 12-4
“Configuring AppleTalk” on page 12-6
Note: All changes to AppleTalk options require a restart to take effect.
AppleTalk networks
A network is a communication system that connects computers to share information using network services,
such as electronic mail, print spoolers, and file servers. Information is transferred over a cabling system or
WAN using a common set of protocols. You can think of the cabling system as an organization of cities, streets,
and buildings and the protocols as the method of sending letters or packages, as illustrated on the following
pages. A cable is the physical medium (for example, twisted pair or coaxial) over which information travels from
one device to another.
AppleTalk protocol
AppleTalk is a protocol set for local area networks developed by Apple Computer. While initially applied to the
LocalTalk cabling system for connecting Macintosh computers and LaserWriters, it has been expanded to use
other cabling systems, such as Ethernet, as well as the dial-up telephone networks and packet switching
systems. LocalTalk was originally known as the AppleTalk Personal Network system.
Each computer or peripheral device (printer, client, file server) connected to a network is called a node and has
a unique node address, which can be any number from 1 to 254. Whenever you open the Chooser or any
application that communicates with other computers on your network, your application compiles a list of all
node names and addresses. All you see are the names --- for example, “Paul’sMac,” “TechSportsWriter,” or
“2nd Floor AppleShare” --- but your application also knows the node addresses of all these devices.
When you send information, commands, or requests to a printer, server, or another workstation, your
application formats the information into units known as packets. It then attaches the correct address to the
packets and sends them to the AppleTalk software on your computer, which forwards the packets across the
network. Packets also include a return address, so the receiver will know where to reply.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12-2 User’s Reference Guide
If the cabling of your network were a street system, then a node address would correspond to a building’s
street address. Node addresses are not permanent. Each AppleTalk device determines its node address at
startup. Although a Macintosh that is starting up will try to use its previous address, the address will often be
different upon restart. This dynamic node addressing scheme prevents conflicts when devices are moved
between networks and simplifies the administrative tasks of a network. If you have only one network, the node
address alone is all the information AppleTalk needs to send a packet from one computer to another.
However, networks can be connected together through routers, such as the Netopia R2020, into an
internetwork (often shortened to internet). Because devices on different networks can have duplicate node
numbers, AppleTalk tells them apart according to an additional part of their addresses: the network number.
The Netopia R2020 assigns a unique network number to each member network. In terms of the city street
metaphor, the network number is similar to the name of the street. Putting a network number together with a
node number fully specifies the address of a node on an internet.
To make the services on an internet manageable, groups of devices on a network can be grouped into zones.
When this is done, selecting a network service (server, etc.) includes choosing a zone from which the service
can be selected. Like network numbers, zone names are assigned by routers.
A routing table is maintained by each AppleTalk router. The table serves as a map of the internet, specifying
the path and distance, in hops, between its router and other networks. The routing table is used to determine
whether a router will forward a data packet and, if so, to which network.
You can use the information in the AppleTalk routing table to observe and diagnose the Netopia R2020’s
current connections to other AppleTalk routers. To go to the AT Routing Table screen from the Netopia R2020’s
console, select Statistics & Logs from the Main Menu and then select AppleTalk Routing Table.
AT Routing Table
-Net---Range--Def Zone Name----------Hops-State-Next Rtr Addr.--Pkts Fwded
----------------------------------SCROLL UP--------------------------
1
2
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
27
31
Admin
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
Good 46.131
Good 46.131
Good 46.131
Good 46.131
Good 46.131
Good 46.131
Good 46.131
Good 46.131
Good 46.131
Good 46.131
Good 46.131
Good 46.131
Good 46.131
Good 46.131
0
AdMan
0
3
Aspirations
Sales
0
4
0
5
Marketing
Molluscs
Customer Service
Telemarketing
Rio
0
6
1
7
1
8
0
10
11
12
16
*24
28
0
Regiment
Rhinos
Unique Services
Aspirations
Rhinos
0
0
0
79
15
---------------------------------SCROLL DOWN-------------------------
UPDATE
'*' Entries have multiple zone names. Return/Enter on these to see zone list.
A router has multiple communications ports and is capable of forwarding information to other routers and
devices on the internet. The router performs packet forwarding, network and device address maintenance, and
other administrative functions required by the AppleTalk protocols.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AppleTalk Setup 12-3
MacIP
When Macintosh computers encapsulate TCP/ IP packets in AppleTalk, either because they are on LocalTalk or
they are on EtherTalk for administrative reasons, they must use the services of a MacIP gateway. This gateway
converts network traffic into the correct format for AppleTalk or IP, depending on the traffic’s destination.
Setting up MacIP involves enabling the feature and optionally setting up a range of addresses to be static.
See Chapter 10, “Multiple Network Address Translation and IP Setup,” for more information on how to set up
MacIP and other IP addressing schemes.
AURP
AppleTalk Update-Based Routing Protocol (AURP) allows AppleTalk networks to communicate across an IP
network. Your local AppleTalk networks (connected to the Netopia R2020) can exchange data with remote
AppleTalk networks that are also connected to an AURP-capable router.
When two networks using AppleTalk communicate with each other through a network based on the Internet
Protocol, they are said to be tunneling through the IP network. The Netopia R2020 uses AURP to allow your
AppleTalk network to tunnel to designated AppleTalk partner networks, as well as to accept connections from
remote AppleTalk networks tunneling to your AppleTalk LAN.
Routers and seeding
To configure AppleTalk networks, you must understand the concept of seeding. Seeding is the process by which
routers (or more specifically, router ports) agree on what routing information is valid. AppleTalk routers that
have been reset, for example, must decide what zones and network numbers are valid before they begin
routing. In this case, a router may use the information it has stored, or use information it receives from another
router, depending on how it has been configured.
To help ensure agreement between routers on a network, a seed router is configured with the correct
information, and other routers obtain their information from that router when they are turned on or reset.
Routers commonly use one of three types of seeding procedures: hard seeding, soft seeding, and non-seeding.
Hard seeding: When a router that uses hard seeding is turned on or reset, it requests network number and
zone name information from any existing routers on the networks it will serve. If no other routers reply, the
router uses the network numbers and zone names specified in its own configuration. If other routers reply, and
their information matches the router’s own configuration information, the result is the same—the router uses
the values in its own configuration. However, if other routers provide network numbers or zone names that
conflict with those in the router’s configuration, the router disables any of its own ports for which there are
conflicts.
Soft seeding: When a router that uses soft seeding is turned on or reset, it requests network number and zone
name information from any existing routers on the networks it will serve. If no other routers reply, the router
uses the network numbers and zone names specified in its own configuration. If other routers reply, the router
uses the information they provide, regardless of whether or not there are conflicts between the information
received and its configured information. Once a soft- or hard seeding router begins to route, it can serve as a
seed router, providing network number and zone name information to other routers upon request. The default
state of the Netopia R2020’s AppleTalk ports is soft seeding.
Non-seeding: When a router using non-seeding is turned on or reset, it requests network number and zone
name information from any existing routers on the networks it will serve. For any network where no other
routers reply, the non-seeding router will not have any active ports until the next reset.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12-4 User’s Reference Guide
You should set the Netopia R2020’s seeding action to work best in your particular network environment. These
scenarios may guide you in deciding how to set the router’s seeding:
■
■
■
If the Netopia R2020 is the only router on your network, you must set it to either hard seeding or soft
seeding. The default is soft seeding.
If there is another active router on your network, and you want that router to configure the Netopia R2020’s
EtherTalk or LocalTalk parameters, you can set the Netopia R2020 to non-seeding.
If there is another active router on your network, you could set the Netopia R2020 to be soft seeding if you
are unsure that the second router would always be available to configure the Netopia R2020’s EtherTalk or
LocalTalk parameters.
■
If you want the Netopia R2020 to configure the EtherTalk or LocalTalk parameters of other routers on your
network, you must set it to hard seeding. In this case, the other routers must be soft seeding or
non-seeding, and the Netopia R2020 must already be active when those other routers are rebooted.
■
If you want the Netopia R2020 and all other routers on your network to use only their own configurations,
set the Netopia R2020 and all other routers to hard seeding. In this case, any router (including the Netopia
R2020) that is rebooted will not begin routing if it detects a routing conflict between itself and any other
router. This last scenario could be useful for detecting and locating routing errors on your network.
Installing AppleTalk
The AppleTalk kit consists of hardware and firmware components that you enable on your router in order to
connect an AppleTalk network. The LocalTalk connector supplied in the AppleTalk feature expansion kit cable
connects to the Auxiliary port on the Netopia R2020.
Netopia R2020 back panel
Ethernet
8
4
7
3
6
2
5
1
Auxiliary
Console
Power
Line 2
Line 1
Normal/Uplink
1
Auxiliary connection port
HD-15 (female)
You then enable AppleTalk routing through the Console-based management screens.
To install the AppleTalk features from the Main Menu, go to System Configuration and select Upgrade Feature
Set.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AppleTalk Setup 12-5
System
Configuration
Main
Menu
Upgrade
Feature Set
The Netopia Feature Set Upgrade screen appears.
Netopia Feature Set Upgrade
You may be able to extend the features of your Netopia by purchasing a
'Software Upgrade'. For a list of available upgrades, please see the release
notes that came with your Netopia or visit the Netopia Communications web
site at www.netopia.com.
To purchase an upgrade, you must provide your Serial Number, which is:
xx-xx-xx
You will receive an Upgrade Key, which you should enter below.
Upgrade Key:
UPGRADE NOW
CANCEL
Follow the instructions to enable AppleTalk on your router. Once AppleTalk is enabled, you can configure your
network as described in the following sections.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12-6 User’s Reference Guide
Configuring AppleTalk
AppleTalk setup for Netopia R2020s consists of configuring EtherTalk, LocalTalk, and AURP.
EtherTalk Setup
To go to the EtherTalk Setup options screen, select Network Protocols Setup and then select AppleTalk Setup
in the System Configuration screen. Select EtherTalk Phase ll Setup and press Return.
EtherTalk Phase II Setup
EtherTalk Phase II Enabled:
Show Zones...
+---------ET II Zone List----------+
+----------------------------------+
| Unnamed
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Enter New Zone Name:
Delete Zone Name...
Set Default Zone...
Net Low:
Net Hi:
Seeding...
+----------------------------------+
Up/Down Arrow Keys to select, ESC to dismiss.
■
■
■
If you are using EtherTalk Phase ll on the Ethernet network connected to Netopia R2020, select EtherTalk
Phase ll Enabled and toggle it to On.
To view the zones available to EtherTalk Phase ll, select Show Zones and press Return. You can dismiss
the list of zones by pressing the Return or Escape key.
Select Enter New Zone Name to enter a new zone name.
Note: Your EtherTalk network number and zone name must match the values in use on the EtherTalk
network.
If another router is already present on the EtherTalk network that you will be connecting to the Netopia
R2020, use the zone names and network numbers used by that router for that EtherTalk network.
Otherwise, your EtherTalk network may experience routing conflicts. The Netopia R2020 supports creating
up to 32 zone names.
As an alternative, you can set EtherTalk seeding to soft seeding and let the Netopia R2020 receive the
zone name and network number from the other router.
■
■
To remove zones from the list, select Delete Zone Name and press Return to see the zones list. Use the
Up and Down Arrow keys to select the zone to delete. Press the Return key to delete it and exit the list.
Press the Escape key to exit the list without deleting any zones.
Select Set Default Zone to choose a different default zone. This is the zone where the Netopia R2020’s
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AppleTalk Setup 12-7
EtherTalk Phase II port is visible to other AppleTalk nodes. The default zone is also where new AppleTalk
nodes will appear. If you do not set a default zone, the first zone you create will be the default zone.
■
■
You can also set the range of EtherTalk Phase II network numbers. Select Net Low and enter the lower limit
of the network number range. Select Net High and enter the upper limit of the range.
Select the Seeding pop-up menu and choose the seeding method for the Netopia R2020 to use (see
“Routers and seeding” on page 12-3).
You have finished configuring EtherTalk Phase II.
LocalTalk Setup
Note: For instructions on making the physical connections for LocalTalk, see “Connecting to a LocalTalk
network” on page 4-5.
Select LocalTalk Setup in the AppleTalk Setup screen and press Return to the LocalTalk Routing Setup screen.
LocalTalk Setup
LocalTalk Enabled:
LocalTalk Zone Name:
LocalTalk Net Number:
Seeding...
On
Unnamed
33126
Soft-Seeding
Use this screen to set up the LocalTalk Port Routing attributes.
■
If you are using LocalTalk with the Netopia R2020, select LocalTalk Enabled and make sure LocalTalk is
set to On, which is the default.
Note: Since the LocalTalk connector attaches to the Auxiliary port on the router, that port will no longer be
available for a third external modem.
■
Select LocalTalk Zone Name and enter a new or existing zone name.
Note: Your LocalTalk network may already have a zone and network number in place. For the Netopia
R2020’s LocalTalk port to be part of your LocalTalk network, it must have a network number and zone
name that matches the values in use on the LocalTalk network.
If another router is already present on the LocalTalk network that you will be connecting to the Netopia
R2020, use the zone name and network number used by that router for that LocalTalk network. Otherwise,
your LocalTalk network may experience routing conflicts.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12-8 User’s Reference Guide
As an alternative, you can set LocalTalk seeding to soft seeding and let the Netopia R2020 receive the
zone name and network number from the other router.
■
■
Select LocalTalk Network Number and enter the desired network number.
Select Seeding. From the pop-up menu, choose the type of seeding for the Netopia R2020’s LocalTalk port
to use (see “Routers and seeding” on page 12-3).
You have finished configuring LocalTalk.
AURP setup
To set up AURP, select AppleTalk Setup from the Network Protocols screen. Select AURP Setup and press
Return.
AURP Setup
AURP Enable:
On
Display/Change Partner...
Add Partner...
Delete Partner...
Enter Free Trade Zone Name:
Accept Connections From...
Configured Partners Only
Advanced Options...
AURP Allows you to connect remote AppleTalk Networks across IP.
■
To activate AURP and enable connections to and from AURP partners, select AURP Enable and toggle it to
On.
Viewing AURP partners
■
To see a table of existing AURP partners, select Display/ Show Partners and press Return.
Note: The Netopia R2020 can define a total of 32 AURP partners.
AURP Free Trade Zone
The Free Trade Zone is an AURP security feature. It allows the Netopia administrator to specify a single
AppleTalk zone that will be the only one visible to the remote side for partners that have this option enabled.
Example:
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AppleTalk Setup 12-9
Site A has an AURP tunnel to site B. Both sides have multiple zones defined on the EtherTalk port and a unique
zone on their LocalTalk ports. If side A has indicated one of its EtherTalk zones is the Free Trade Zone and has
opted to use the Free Trade Zone option for its tunnel to B, then only this Free Trade Zone will show up on side
B and only those machines or services in the Free Trade Zone will be accessible to side B. All of side A will be
able to see all of side B.
Adding an AURP partner
■
To add a new AURP partner, select Add Partner and press Return to go to the Add AURP Partner screen.
Add AURP Partner
Partner IP Address or Domain Name:
Initiate Connection:
No
No
Restrict to Free Trade Zone:
ADD PARTNER NOW
CANCEL
Enter Information about new Partner.
■
Select Partner IP Address or Domain Name and enter the new AURP partner’s IP address. If you do not
know the remote network’s IP address, enter its domain name. Domain names are the Internet addresses
favored by people (for example, chagall.arts.edu). Domain names are matched to the IP addresses actually
used by IP routers (for example, 163.7.8.202).
■
■
■
To initiate a connection with an AURP partner, select Initiate Connection and toggle it to Yes. This will open
a connection to the remote AppleTalk network after rebooting.
You can choose to restrict this partner to the Free Trade Zone by toggling Restrict to Free Trade Zone to
Yes. See “AURP Free Trade Zone” on page 12-8 for more information.
To add the new AURP partner, select ADD PARTNER NOW. To discard the new AURP partner, select
CANCEL.
Modifying an AURP partner
■
To modify an AURP partner, select Display/ Change Partner in the AURP Setup screen and press Return to
display a table of existing partners.
Use the Up and Down Arrow keys to select a partner, then press Return to go to the Change AURP Partner
screen.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12-10 User’s Reference Guide
Deleting an AURP partner
■
To delete an AURP partner, select Delete Partner in the AURP Setup screen and press Return to display a
table of existing partners.
Use the Up and Down Arrow keys to select an AURP partner, then press Return to delete it. Press the
Escape key to exit without deleting a partner.
Receiving AURP connections
■
To control the acceptance of incoming AURP tunnels, select Accept Connections From and choose Anyone
or Configured Partners Only from the pop-up menu. If you choose Anyone, all incoming AURP connections
will be accepted.
The more secure option is Configured Partners Only, which only accepts connections from recognized
AURP partners (the ones you have set up).
Configuring AURP Options
In the AURP Setup screen, Select AURP Options and go to the AURP Options screen. Using AURP can cause a
problem when two networks, one local and one remote, have the same network number. This may cause
network routing ambiguities than can result in routing errors.
AURP Options
Tickle Interval (HH:MM:SS):
Update Interval (HH:MM:SS):
00:00:00
00:00:30
Enable Network Number Remapping:
Yes
Remap into Range
From:
To:
4096
32768
Cluster Remote Networks:
No
No
Enable Hop-Count Reduction:
Return accepts * ESC cancels * Left/Right moves insertion point * Del deletes.
■
Select Tickle Pkt Rqst Interval (HH:MM:SS) and set the timer to indicate how often a tickle or ‘are you
still there’ packet will be sent to the remote AppleTalk Network.
The AURP tickle timer is a parameter that you can set anywhere between 0 and 100 hours. This parameter
tells the AURP partners when to send out an AURP tickle packet. If this value is set to 0, the Netopia
R2020 will never send out a tickle packet. Tickle packets verify that the remote router is working. The
minimum tickle interval is 90 seconds. The maximum tickle interval setting is 99:59:59 (100 hours), which
is the recommendation for small networks.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AppleTalk Setup 12-11
Raising the tickle packet interval does not ensure that the AURP tunnel is dropped or not brought up. If any
application on the local network generates AppleTalk traffic destined for the network at the remote end of
the AURP tunnel, the tunnel remains up. For example, if a host on the local network connects to a host on
the remote network using remote access software, the AURP tunnel remains up. The AURP tunnel also
remains up if a local user selects the Chooser and uses an AppleTalk service that involves a remote zone,
such as mounting a remote AppleShare volume.
■
In many AppleTalk internets, individual AppleTalk networks come and go. Routers are designed to notify
each other at the end of their Update Interval every time there's such a change in the network topology.
This will cause the Netopia's WAN link to be brought up. You can opt to minimize what may be unnecessary
calls by changing the Update Interval value to some larger value. At the end of this time window if there has
been a local AppleTalk network change the Netopia R2020 will call any remote AURP partner and forward
the new network information.
■
To enable network number remapping, select Enable Network Number Remapping and toggle it to Yes.
You should enable network number remapping if you plan on using AURP when connecting to unknown
AppleTalk networks. for example when “Accept Connections from Anyone” is enabled. With remapping, the
Netopia R2020 will substitute network numbers not used by your network for the numbers of other remote
networks. These safe remappings will only be used by local routers on your network; remote routers will not
be aware of the remapping.
When network number remapping is enabled, you must choose a safe range of network numbers as a
destination for the remapping. A safe range of network numbers does not intersect your local AppleTalk
network’s range of network numbers.
■
■
■
To choose a destination range for the remapping, select From under Remap into Range and enter a
starting value. Then select To and enter an ending value. Make sure the range you choose is large enough
to accommodate all expected incoming AURP network numbers.
To improve the efficiency of remapping network numbers into a safe range, select Cluster Remote
Networks and toggle it to Yes. This setting takes any number of remote networks being remapped and
causes them to be remapped into a continuous range.
To override the AppleTalk maximum limit of 15 hops, select Enable Hop-Count Reduction and toggle it to
Yes. Hosts on a local AppleTalk network will then “see” AppleTalk destinations across the IP tunnel as
being only one hop away.
AppleTalk allows a packet up to 15 hops (going through 15 AppleTalk routers) to reach its destination.
Packets that must reach destinations more than 15 hops away will not succeed, therefore tunneling from
one large AppleTalk network to another could exceed that limit. In such a case, hop count reduction
enables full network to network communication.
You have finished configuring AURP.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12-12 User’s Reference Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Monitoring Tools 13-1
Chapter 13
Monitoring Tools
This chapter discusses the Netopia R2020’s device and network monitoring tools. These tools can provide
statistical information, report on current network status, record events, and help in diagnosing and locating
problems.
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
“Routing Tables” on page 13-7
“Served IP Addresses” on page 13-10
“System Information” on page 13-12
“SNMP” on page 13-12
Quick View status overview
You can get a useful, overall status report from the Netopia R2020 in the Quick View screen. To go to the Quick
View screen, select Quick View in the Main Menu.
Main
Quick View
Menu
The Quick View screen has three status sections:
■
■
■
General status
Current WAN Connection Status
LED Status
The status sections vary according to the interface of your Netopia R2020.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13-2 User’s Reference Guide
General Status
Quick View
6/17/1999 04:40:47 PM
Default IP Gateway: 127.0.0.2
Domain Name Server: 0.0.0.0
Domain Name: netopia.com
CPU Load: 10% Unused Memory: 541 KB
Accounting: Router remaining: 60:00
LocalTalk Address: 34448:149
Current WAN Port: Auxiliary Port
----------------------IP Address-------IPX Address---EtherTalk-------------------
Ethernet Hub:
192.163.1.1
34449: 150
Current WAN Connection Status
Profile Name----------State-%Use-Remote Address-----Est.-More Info--------------
ISP
P1
10% IP 92.163.4.1
Lcl NAT 192.163.100.6
VPN QuickView
LNK RDY CH1 CH2 LNK LNK LNK RDY CH1 CH2 DATA | '-'= Off 'G'= Green
G
- - - -
Y
-
- - - -
- | 'R'= Red 'Y'= Yellow
Current Date: The current date; this can be set with the Date and Time utility (see “Date and Time” on
page 7-11).
Default IP Gateway: The router’s default gateway, which may be either manually configured or learned via
DHCP. This is the value you assigned in the Default IP Gateway field on page 6-5. If you are using the router’s
defaults (DHCP and NAT) this value will be 0.0.0.0. If you have assigned an IP address as your default gateway,
it is shown here.
CPU Load: Percentage of the system’s resources being used by all current transmissions.
Unused Memory: The total remaining system memory available for use.
Domain Name Server: If you are using the router’s defaults (DHCP and NAT) this value will be 0.0.0.0. If you
have assigned an IP address as your default gateway, it is shown here.
Accounting: Shows whether you have enabled or disabled the call accounting features.
Domain Name: the domain name you have assigned, typically the name of your ISP
Current WAN Port: Indicates which port is in use.
IP Address: The Netopia R2020’s IP address, entered in the IP Setup screen.
IPX Address: The Netopia R2020’s IPX address, entered in the IPX Setup screen.
EtherTalk Address: The Netopia R2020’s AppleTalk address on its EtherTalk Phase II interface, entered in the
EtherTalk Phase II Setup screen (only if the optional AppleTalk feature set is installed).
LocalTalk Address: The Netopia R2020’s AppleTalk address on its LocalTalk interface, entered in the LocalTalk
Setup screen (only if the optional AppleTalk feature set is installed).
VPN QuickView. Access point for the VPN QuickView status monitoring screen. See “VPN QuickView” on
page 9-9.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Monitoring Tools 13-3
Current Status
The current status section is a table showing the current status of the WAN. For example:
WAN Status
Current WAN Connection Status
---Profile Name------State---%Use-Remote Address----Est.-More Info----------
ISP
P1
10 IP 92.163.4.1
Lcl NAT 192.163.100.6
Profile Name: Lists the name of the connection profile being used, if any.
State: Lists the ports in use for this connection.
%Use: Indicates the average percent utilization of the maximum capacity of the channels in use for the
connection.
Remote Address: Shows the IP address of the connected remote router if the connection is using IP.
Otherwise, shows the IPX address of the connected remote router, if using IPX. If the directory number was
entered in the WAN configuration (see “Specifying telephone connections” on page 8-1) it shows the called
directory number if locally originated, otherwise the calling directory number (if available).
Est: Indicates whether the connection was locally (“Lcl”) or remotely (“Rmt”) established.
More Info: Indicates, in order of priority, the NAT address in use for this connection, the IPX address in use (if IP
is also in use), or the ISDN caller identification (if available).
Status lights
This section shows the current real-time status of the Netopia R2020’s status lights (LEDs). It is useful for
remotely monitoring the router’s status. The Quick View screen’s arrangement of LEDs corresponds to the
physical arrangement of LEDs on the router.
LED Status
-PWR-+-----WAN1------+--CON--AUX--+-----WAN2------+--EN--+--------LEDS---------
LNK RDY CH1 Ch2 LNK LNK LNK RDY CH1 CH2 DATA | '-'= Off 'G'= Green
G
- G - -
Y
-
- - - -
- | 'R'= Red 'Y'= Yellow
Each LED representation can report one of four states:
R: The letter “R” means the LED is red.
G: The letter “G” means the LED is green.
Y: The letter “Y” means the LED is yellow.
The section “Netopia R2020 Dual Analog Router Status Lights” on page 2-6 describes the meanings of the
colors for each LED.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13-4 User’s Reference Guide
Statistics & Logs
Main
Menu
Statistics & Logs
General Statistics
When you are troubleshooting your Netopia R2020, the Statistics screens provide insight into the recent event
activities of the Router.
From the Main Menu go to Statistics & Logs and select one of the options described in the sections below.
General Statistics
To go to the General Statistics screen, select General Statistics in the Statistics & Logs screen.
General Statistics
General Statistics screen
General Statistics
Physical I/F-----Rx Bytes---Tx Bytes---Rx Pkts---Tx Pkts----Rx Err----Tx Err
Ethernet Hub
LocalTalk
56K Modem 1
56K Modem 2
4404
20958
13294
0
60
0
375
754
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
842
842
0
0
5
0
0
4
0
Network----------Rx Bytes---Tx Bytes---Rx Pkts---Tx Pkts----Rx Err----Tx Err
IP
656
1152
2
2
0
0
AppleTalk
0
23046
0
1115
General Statistics displays information about data traffic on the Netopia R2020’s data ports. This information
is useful for monitoring and troubleshooting your LAN.
The left side of the screen lists total packets received and total packets transmitted for the following protocols:
■
■
■
IP (IP packets on the Ethernet)
IPX (IPX packets on the Ethernet) if IPX is enabled
ET II (AppleTalk packets on Ethernet, using EtherTalk Phase II) if the optional AppleTalk feature set is
installed
■
LT (LocalTalk on the PhoneNET) if the optional AppleTalk feature set is installed
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Monitoring Tools 13-5
The right side of the table lists the total number of occurrences of each of five types of communication
statistics:
EN Rx Packets: The number of Ethernet packets received.
EN Rx Errors: The number of bad Ethernet packets received.
EN Collisions: An error occurring when Ethernet packets are transmitted simultaneously by nodes on the LAN.
WAN Connection Statistics
The WAN Connection Statistics give the following information about each channel of the point-to-point interface:
■
■
The number of bytes and packets received through the channel
The number of bytes and packets transmitted through the channel
Event Histories
The Netopia R2020 records certain relevant occurrences in event histories. Event histories are useful for
diagnosing problems because they list what happened before, during, and after a problem occurs. You can view
two different event histories: one for the router’s system and one for the WAN. The Netopia R2020’s built-in
battery backup prevents loss of event history from a shut down or reset.
The Router’s event histories are structured to display the most recent events first, and to make it easy to
distinguish error messages from informational messages. Error messages are prefixed with an asterisk. Both
the WAN Event History and the Device Event History retain records of the 128 most recent events.
To go to the Event Histories screens, select either WAN Event History or Device Event History in the Statistics
& Logs screen.
Statistics & Logs
WAN Event History...
Device Event History...
IP Routing Table...
IPX Routing Table...
IPX SAP Bindery Table...
AppleTalk Routing Table...
Served IP Addresses...
General Statistics...
System Information...
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13-6 User’s Reference Guide
WAN Event History
The WAN Event History screen lists a total of 128 events on the WAN. The most recent events appear at the
top.
To go to the WAN Event History screen, select WAN Event History in the Statistics & Logs screen.
WAN Event History
Current Date -- 6/17/99 01:57:07 AM
-Date-----Time-----Event------------------------------------------------------
----------------------------------SCROLL UP-----------------------------------
6/17/99 01:56:49 PPP: BACP negotiated, session 1
6/17/99 01:56:49 PPP: CCP negotiated, session 1, type: Ascend LZS
6/17/99 01:56:49 PPP: IPXCP negotiated, session 1
6/17/99 01:56:49 PPP: IPCP negotiated, session 1, rem: 163.176.249.1
6/17/99 01:56:49 PPP: MP negotiated, session 1
6/17/99 01:56:49 PPP: PAP remote accepted us, Channel 1
6/17/99 01:56:49 PPP: NCP up, session 1, Channel 1
6/17/99 01:56:46 PPP: Channel 1 up, Dialout
6/17/99 01:56:46 Received Connect Ind. for DN: 92384175
6/17/99 01:56:46 >>WAN: data link activated at 115 Kbps
6/17/99 01:56:46 ASYNC: Modem carrier detected (more)
6/17/99 01:56:24 >>Issued Speech Setup Request from our DN: (not supplied)
6/17/99 01:56:07 Link 1 down: PPP PAP failure
6/17/99 01:56:07 Issued Clear Response to DN: (not supplied)
---------------------------------SCROLL DOWN----------------------------------
Clear History...
Return/Enter on event item for details or SCROLL [UP/DOWN] item for scrolling.
Each entry in the list contains the following information:
Time: Time of the event.
Date: Date of the event.
Event: A brief description of the event.
Ch.: The channel involved in the event.
Dir. Number: The directory number (number dialed) involved in the event.
The first event in each call sequence is marked with double arrows (>>).
Failures are marked with an asterisk (*).
If the event history exceeds the size of the screen, you can scroll through it by using the SCROLL UP and
SCROLL DOWN items.
To scroll up, select the SCROLL UP item at the top of the list and press the Return key. To scroll down, select
the SCROLL DOWN item at the bottom of the list and press the Return key.
To get more information about any event listed in the WAN Event History, select the event and then press the
Return key. A dialog box containing more information about the selected event will appear. Press Return or the
Escape key to dismiss the dialog box.
To clear the Event History, select Clear History at the bottom of the history screen and press Return.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Monitoring Tools 13-7
Device Event History
The Device Event History screen lists a total of 128 port and system events, giving the time and date for each
event, as well as a brief description. The most recent events appear at the top.
To go to the Device Event History screen, select Device Event History in the Statistics & Logs screen.
Device Event History
Current Date -- 6/17/99 02:03:27 AM
-Date-----Time-----Event------------------------------------------------------
----------------------------------SCROLL UP-----------------------------------
6/17/99 02:03:18 AURP initialization complete
6/17/99 02:03:18 AppleTalk initialization complete
6/17/99 02:03:11 IPX initialization complete
6/17/99 02:03:11 IP address server initialization complete
6/17/99 02:03:11 --BOOT: Warm start v4.3
---------------------------------
6/17/99 02:02:32 IPX initialization complete
6/17/99 02:02:32 IP address server initialization complete
6/17/99 02:02:32 --BOOT: Warm start v4.3
---------------------------------
6/17/99 01:59:50 * IP: Route 0.0.0.0/0.0.0.0 not installed
6/17/99 01:59:50 IPX initialization complete
6/17/99 01:59:50 IP address server initialization complete
6/17/99 01:59:50 --BOOT: Cold start v4.3
---------------------------------
6/17/99 01:55:12 AppleTalk initialization complete
6/17/99 01:55:07 * IP: Route 0.0.0.0/0.0.0.0 not installed
---------------------------------SCROLL DOWN----------------------------------
Clear History...
Return/Enter on event item for details or SCROLL [UP/DOWN] item for scrolling.
If the event history exceeds the size of the screen, you can scroll through it by using the SCROLL UP and
SCROLL DOWN items.
To scroll up, select the SCROLL UP item at the top of the list and press the Return key. To scroll down, select
the SCROLL DOWN item at the bottom of the list and press Return.
To obtain more information about any event listed in the Device Event History, select the event and then press
Return. A dialog box containing more information about the selected event will appear. Press Return or the
Escape key to dismiss the dialog box.
To clear the Device Event History, select Clear Device Event History in the Event Histories screen and press
Return.
Routing Tables
You can view all of the IP, IPX and AppleTalk routes in the Netopia R2020’s IP, IPX and AppleTalk routing tables,
respectively.
To go to a Routing Table screen, select the Routing Table you are interested in from the Statistics & Logs
screen.
Each of the routing table screens represents a “snapshot” of the routing table information at the time the
screen is first invoked. To take a new snapshot, select Update at the bottom of the screen and press Return.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13-8 User’s Reference Guide
Statistics & Logs
WAN Event History...
Device Event History...
IP Routing Table...
IPX Routing Table...
IPX SAP Bindery Table...
AppleTalk Routing Table...
Served IP Addresses...
General Statistics...
System Information...
IP routing table
The IP routing table displays all of the IP routes currently known to the Netopia R2020.
To display the IP Routing Table screen, select IP Routing Table in the Statistics & Logs screen and press
Return.
IP Routing Table
Network Address-Subnet Mask-----via Router------Port------------------Type----
----------------------------------SCROLL UP-----------------------------------
0.0.0.0
255.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
--
Other
Local
Local
Local
Bcast
Other
Bcast
127.0.0.1
192.168.1.0
192.168.1.1
192.168.1.15
224.0.0.0
255.255.255.255 127.0.0.1
255.255.255.240 192.168.1.1
255.255.255.255 192.168.1.1
255.255.255.255 192.168.1.15
Loopback
Ethernet
Ethernet
Ethernet
--
224.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
255.255.255.255 255.255.255.255 255.255.255.255 --
---------------------------------SCROLL DOWN----------------------------------
UPDATE
IPX routing table
The IPX routing table displays all of the IPC routes currently known to the Netopia R2020.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Monitoring Tools 13-9
To display the IPX Routing Table screen, select IPX Routing Table in the Statistics & Logs screen and press
Return.
IPX Sap Bindery table
The IPX Sap Bindery table displays all of the IPX Sap Bindery routes currently known to the Netopia R2020.
To display the IPX SAP Bindery Table screen, select IPX Sap Bindery Table in the Statistics & Logs screen and
press Return.
AppleTalk routing table
The AppleTalk routing table displays information about the current state of AppleTalk networks connected to the
Netopia R2020, including remote AppleTalk networks connected with AURP. This information is gathered from
other active AppleTalk routers.
To display the AppleTalk Routing Table screen, select AppleTalk Routing Table in the Statistics & Logs screen
and press Return.
AT Routing Table
-Net---Range--Def Zone Name----------Hops-State-Next Rtr Addr.--Pkts Fwded
----------------------------------SCROLL UP--------------------------
1
2
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
27
31
Admin
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
Good 46.131
Good 46.131
Good 46.131
Good 46.131
Good 46.131
Good 46.131
Good 46.131
Good 46.131
Good 46.131
Good 46.131
Good 46.131
Good 46.131
Good 46.131
Good 46.131
0
AdMan
0
3
Aspirations
Sales
0
4
0
5
Marketing
Molluscs
Customer Service
Telemarketing
Rio
0
6
1
7
1
8
0
10
11
12
16
*24
28
0
Regiment
Rhinos
Unique Services
Aspirations
Rhinos
0
0
0
79
15
---------------------------------SCROLL DOWN-------------------------
UPDATE
'*' Entries have multiple zone names. Return/Enter on these to see zone list.
Each row in the AppleTalk routing table corresponds to an AppleTalk route or network range. If the list of routes
shown exceeds the size of the screen, you can scroll through it by using the SCROLL UP and SCROLL DOWN
items.
To scroll up, select the SCROLL UP item at the top of the table and press the Return key. To scroll down, select
the SCROLL DOWN item at the bottom of the table and press the Return key.
The table has the following columns:
Net: Displays the starting network number supplied by the AppleTalk router in the ‘Next Rtr Addr. Column’. If a
network number is preceded by an asterisk (*), it has multiple zones. To display the zones, select the network
entry and press Return.
Range: Displays the ending network number for the extended network.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13-10 User’s Reference Guide
(Def) Zone Name: Displays the zone or zones associated with the specified network or network range. The zone
name shown is either the only zone or the default zone name for an extended network. To see the complete list
of zones for an extended network with multiple zones, select the entry in the table and press the Return key.
Press the Return key again to close the list of zones.
Hops: Displays the number of routers between the Netopia R2020 and the specified network.
State: Displays the state of the specified route, based on the frequency of Routing Table Maintenance Protocol
(RTMP) packets received for the route. The state can be Good, Suspect, or Bad. AppleTalk routers regularly
exchange RTMP packets to update AppleTalk routing information.
Next Rtr Addr.: Displays the DDP or IP address of the next hop for the specified route. A DDP address is
displayed if the router shown is on the local AppleTalk network. DDP address means that a connection to the
next hop router is by a native AppleTalk network (e.g.: LocalTalk or EtherTalk Phase II). An IP address is
displayed if the Netopia R2020 is connected to the router shown using AURP. IP address means a connection
transports over AURP (AppleTalk encapsulated IP).
Pkts Fwded: The number of packets sent to the router shown.
Served IP Addresses
You can view all of the IP addresses currently being served by the Netopia R2020 Dual Analog Router from the
Served IP Addresses screen. From the Statistics & Logs menu, select Served IP Addresses.
The Served IP Addresses screen appears.
Served IP Addresses
-IP Address-------Type----Expires--Client Identifier--------------------------
----------------------------------SCROLL UP-----------------------------------
192.168.1.100
192.168.1.101
192.168.1.102
192.168.1.103
192.168.1.104
192.168.1.105
192.168.1.106
192.168.1.107
192.168.1.108
192.168.1.109
192.168.1.110
192.168.1.111
192.168.1.112
192.168.1.113
DHCP
DHCP
00:36
00:58
EN: 00-00-c5-4a-1f-ea
EN: 08-00-07-16-0c-85
---------------------------------SCROLL DOWN----------------------------------
Lease Management...
EN = Ethernet Address; AT = AppleTalk Address; CP = Profile Name; HX = hex
You can manage DHCP leases by selecting Lease Management in this screen.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Monitoring Tools 13-11
The IP Address Lease Management screen appears.
IP Address Lease Management
Reset All Leases
Release BootP Leases
Reclaim Declined Addresses
Hit RETURN/ENTER, you will return to the previous screen.
By selecting each of these options you can:
■
Reset all current IP addresses leased through DHCP without waiting for the default one hour lease period
to elapse
■
■
Release BootP leases that may be in place, and which may no longer be required
Reclaim served leases that have been declined, for example by devices which may no longer be on the
network.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13-12 User’s Reference Guide
System Information
The System Information screen gives a summary view of the general system level values in the Netopia R2020
Dual Analog Router. From the Statistics & Logs menu select System Information.
The System Information screen appears.
System Information
Serial Number
Firmware Version
70-03-48 (7340872)
4.4
Processor Speed (MHz)
Flash ROM Capacity (MBytes)
DRAM Capacity (MBytes)
33
1
4
Ethernet
8 Port 10Base-T
Switched Async
56K Modem
Auxiliary Serial Port
WAN 1 Interface
WAN 2 Interface
Not Installed
AppleTalk Feature Set
Analog Dial-In Kit
Not Installed
Installed
SNMP
The Netopia R2020 includes a Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) agent, allowing monitoring and
configuration by a standard SNMP manager.
The Netopia R2020 supports the following Management Information Base (MIB) documents:
■
■
■
■
■
■
MIB II (RFC 1213)
Interface MIB (RFC 1229)
Ethernet MIB (RFC 1643)
AppleTalk MIB-I (RFC 1243)
Frame Relay DTE MIB (RFC 1315)
Netopia MIB
These MIBs are on the Netopia R2020 CD included with the Netopia R2020. You should load these MIBs into
your SNMP management software in the order they are listed here. Follow the instructions included with your
SNMP manager on how to load MIBs.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Monitoring Tools 13-13
The SNMP Setup screen
To go to the SNMP Setup screen from the Main Menu, select SNMP in the System Configuration screen and
press Return.
System
Configuration
Main
Menu
SNMP
SNMP Setup
System Name:
System Location:
System Contact:
Read-Only Community String:
Read/Write Community String:
public
private
Authentication Traps Enable:
IP Trap Receivers...
Off
Configure optional SNMP parameters from here.
Follow these steps to configure the first three items in the screen:
1. Select System Name and enter a descriptive name for the Netopia R2020’s SNMP agent.
2. Select System Location and enter the router’s physical location (room, floor, building, etc.).
3. Select System Contact and enter the name of the person responsible for maintaining the router.
System Name, System Location, and System Contact set the values returned by the Netopia R2020 SNMP
agent for the SysName, SysLocation, and SysContact objects, respectively, in the MIB-II system group. Although
optional, the information you enter in these items can help a system administrator manage the network more
efficiently.
Community strings
The Read-Only Community String and the Read/ Write Community String are like passwords that must be used
by an SNMP manager querying or configuring the Netopia R2020. An SNMP manager using the Read-Only
Community String can examine statistics and configuration information from the router, but cannot modify the
router’s configuration. An SNMP manager using the Read/ Write Community String can both examine and
modify configuration parameters.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13-14 User’s Reference Guide
By default, the read-only and read/ write community strings are set to “public” and “private,” respectively. You
should change both of the default community strings to values known only to you and trusted system adminis-
trators.
To change a community string, select it and enter a new value.
Starting with the version 4.3 firmware, setting the Read-Only and Read-Write community strings to the empty
string will block all SNMP requests to the router. (The router may still send SNMP Traps if those are properly
enabled.)
Previously, if either community string was the empty string, SNMP Requests specifying an empty community
string were accepted and processed.
This change is designed to allow the administrator to block SNMP access to the router, and to provide more
granular control over the allowed SNMP operations to the router.
■
■
Setting only the Read-Write community string to the empty string will block SNMP Set Requests to the
router, but Get Requests and Get-Next Requests will still be honored using the Read-Only community string
(assuming that is not the empty string).
Setting only the Read-Only community string to the empty string will not block Get Requests or Get-Next
Requests since those operations (and Set Requests) are still allowed using the (non-empty) Read-Write
community string.
Caution!
Even if you decide not to use SNMP, you should change the community strings. This prevents unauthorized
access to the Netopia R2020 through SNMP. For more information on security issues, see “Suggested security
measures” on page 14-1.
SNMP traps
An SNMP trap is an informational message sent from an SNMP agent (in this case, the Netopia R2020) to a
manager. When a manager receives a trap, it may log the trap as well as generate an alert message of its own.
Standard traps generated by the Netopia R2020 include the following:
■
An authentication failure trap is generated when the router detects an incorrect community string in a
received SNMP packet. Authentication Traps Enable must be On for this trap to be generated.
■
■
A cold start trap is generated after the router is reset.
An interface down trap (ifDown) is generated when one of the router’s interfaces, such as a port, stops
functioning or is disabled.
■
An interface up trap (ifUp) is generated when one of the router’s interfaces, such as a port, begins
functioning.
The Netopia R2020 sends traps using UDP (for IP networks).
You can specify which SNMP managers are sent the IP traps generated by the Netopia R2020. Up to eight
receivers can be set. You can also review and remove IP traps.
Go to the IP Trap Receivers screen by selecting IP Trap Receivers in the SNMP Setup screen.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Monitoring Tools 13-15
IP Trap Receivers
Display/Change IP Trap Receiver...
Add IP Trap Receiver...
Delete IP Trap Receiver...
Return/Enter to modify an existing Trap Receiver.
Navigate from here to view, add, modify and delete IP Trap Receivers.
Setting the IP trap receivers
1. Select Add IP Trap Receiver.
2. Select Receiver IP Address or Domain Name. Enter the IP address or domain name of the SNMP manager
you want to receive the trap.
3. Select Community String if you enabled one in the SNMP Setup screen, and enter the appropriate
password.
4. Select Add Trap Receiver Now and press Return. You can add up to seven more receivers.
Viewing IP trap receivers
To display a view-only table of IP trap receivers, select Display/ Change IP Trap Receiver in the IP Trap
Receivers screen.
Modifying IP trap receivers
1. To edit an IP trap receiver, select Display/ Change IP Trap Receiver in the IP Trap Receivers screen.
2. Select an IP trap receiver from the table and press Return.
3. In the Change IP Trap Receiver screen, edit the information as needed and press Return.
Deleting IP trap receivers
1. To delete an IP trap receiver, select Delete IP Trap Receiver in the IP Trap Receivers screen.
2. Select an IP trap receiver from the table and press Return.
3. In the dialog box, select Continue and press Return.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13-16 User’s Reference Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Security 14-1
Chapter 14
Security
The Netopia R2020 provides a number of security features to help protect its configuration screens and your
local network from unauthorized access. Although these features are optional, it is strongly recommended that
you use them.
■
■
“User accounts,” beginning on page 14-2, shows you how to set up name/ password combinations to
■
■
“Dial-in Console Access” on page 14-3
“Telnet access” on page 14-4, shows you how to control access to the Netopia R2020 by those using the
■
beginning on page 14-12, have information on what filters are, how they work, how to customize them, and
how to use them in sets. For information on IPX filters and filter sets, see “IPX filters,” beginning on
page 14-21.
■
■
“Firewall tutorial” on page 14-28
“Token Security Authentication” on page 14-36
Suggested security measures
In addition to setting up user accounts, Telnet access, and filters (all of which are covered later in this chapter),
there are other actions you can take to make the Netopia R2020 and your network more secure:
■
Change the SNMP community strings (or passwords). The default community strings are universal and
could easily be known to a potential intruder.
■
■
■
■
Set the answer profile so it must match incoming calls to a connection profile.
Use CallerID.
Leave the “Enable Dial-in Console Access” option set to No.
Where possible, insist on using PAP, CHAP, or secure authentication token card to authenticate
connections to and from connection profiles.
■
■
When using AURP, accept connections only from configured partners.
Configure the Netopia R2020 through the serial console port to ensure that your communications cannot
be intercepted.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
14-2 User’s Reference Guide
User accounts
When you first set up and configure the Netopia R2020, no passwords are required to access the configuration
screens. Anyone could tamper with the router’s configuration by simply connecting it to a console.
However, by adding user accounts, you can protect the most sensitive screens from unauthorized access. User
accounts are composed of name/ password combinations that can be given to authorized users.
Caution!
You are strongly encouraged to add protection to the configuration screens. Unprotected screens could allow an
unauthorized user to compromise the operation of your entire network.
Once user accounts are created, users who attempt to access protected screens will be challenged. Users who
enter an incorrect name or password are returned to a screen requesting a name/ password combination to
access the Main Menu.
To set up user accounts, select Security in the System Configuration screen and go to the Security Options
screen.
Security Options
Enable Dial-in Console Access:
Yes
Yes
Enable SmartStart/SmartView/Web Server:
Enable Telnet Console Access:
Enable Telnet Access to SNMP Screens:
Yes
Yes
Show Users...
Add User...
Delete User...
Password for This Screen (11 chars max):
Return/Enter accepts * Tab toggles * ESC cancels.
Set up configuration access options here.
Protecting the Security Options screen
The first screen you should protect is the Security Options screen, because it controls access to the
configuration screens. Access to the Security Options screen can be protected with a password.
Select Password for This Screen in the Security Options screen and enter a password. Make sure this
password is secure and is different from any of the user account passwords.
Protecting the configuration screens
You can protect the configuration screens with user accounts. You can administer the accounts from the
Security Options screen. You can create up to four accounts.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Security 14-3
To display a view-only list of user accounts, select Show Users in the Security Options screen.
To add a new user account, select Add User in the Security Options screen and press Return to go to the Add
Name With Write Access screen.
Add Name With Write Access
Enter Name:
Enter Password (11 characters max):
ADD NAME/PASSWORD NOW
CANCEL
Follow these steps to configure the new account:
1. Select Enter Name and enter a descriptive name (for example, the user’s first name).
2. Select Enter Password and enter a password.
3. To accept the new name/ password combination, select ADD NAME/ PASSWORD NOW. To exit the Add
Name With Write Access screen without saving the new account, select CANCEL.
To delete a user account, select Delete User to display a list of accounts. Select an account from the list and
press Return to delete it. To exit the list without deleting the selected account, press the Escape key.
Dial-in Console Access
Remote modem terminal emulator setups can dial in to either internal modem line and establish a remote
console session, even though they are not using PPP. This allows Netopia Inc.'s “Up and Running, Guaranteed!”
department or other administrator with the appropriate security to remotely configure your router for you. If you
used SmartStart to configure your router, this option will be set to “No”.
■
To prevent any remote caller from establishing a remote session, leave the option Enable Dial-in Console
Access set to “No”.
■
To allow access for Up and Running, Guaranteed! with the default name and password in place, toggle this
option to “Yes”.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
14-4 User’s Reference Guide
Enable SmartStart/Web Server
You may wish to restrict access to the web-based screens to prevent inadvertent switching or connecting and
disconnecting of Connection Profiles. Since SmartStart can be used to reconfigure the router, you may wish to
block inadvertent damage resulting from unauthorized use of SmartStart. To prevent access to these features
toggle this option to “No”.
Telnet access
Telnet is a TCP/ IP service that allows remote terminals to access hosts on an IP network. The Netopia R2020
supports Telnet access to its configuration screens.
Caution!
You should consider password-protecting or restricting Telnet access to the Netopia R2020 if you suspect there
is a chance of tampering.
To password-protect the configuration screens, select Easy Setup from the Main Menu, and go to the Easy
Setup Security Configuration screen. By entering a Name and Password pair in this screen, all access via
serial, Telnet, SNMP, and web server will be password-protected.
To restrict Telnet access, select Security in the Advanced Configuration Menu and go to the Security Options
screen. There are two levels of Telnet restriction available:
To restrict Telnet access to the SNMP screens, select Enable Telnet Access to SNMP Screens and toggle it to
No. (See “SNMP traps” on page 13-14.)
To restrict Telnet access to all of the configuration screens, select Enable Telnet Console Access and toggle it
to No.
About filters and filter sets
Security should be a high priority for anyone administering a network connected to the Internet. Using packet
filters to control network communications can greatly improve your network’s security.
The Netopia R2020’s packet filters are designed to provide security for the Internet connections made to and
from your network. You can customize the router’s filter sets for a variety of packet filtering applications.
Typically, you use filters to selectively admit or refuse TCP/ IP connections from certain remote networks and
specific hosts. You will also use filters to screen particular types of connections. This is commonly called
firewalling your network.
Before creating filter sets, you should read the next few sections to learn more about how these powerful
security tools work.
What’s a filter and what’s a filter set?
A filter is a rule that lets you specify what sort of data can flow in and out of your network. A particular filter can
either be an input filter—one that is used on data (packets) coming in to your network from the Internet—or an
output filter—one that is used on data (packets) going out from your network to the Internet.
A filter set is a group of filters that work together to check incoming or outgoing data. A filter set can consist of
a combination of input and output filters.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Security 14-5
How filter sets work
A filter set acts like a team of customs inspectors. Each filter is an inspector through which incoming and
outgoing packages must pass. The inspectors work as a team, but each inspects every package individually.
Each inspector has a specific task. One inspector’s task may be to examine the destination address of all
outgoing packages. That inspector looks for a certain destination—which could be as specific as a street
address or as broad as an entire country—and checks each package’s destination address to see if it matches
that destination.
FROM:
FROM:
FROM:
T
TO:
TO:
A filter inspects data packets like a customs inspector scrutinizing packages.
Filter priority
Continuing the customs inspectors analogy, imagine the inspectors lined up to examine a package. If the
package matches the first inspector’s criteria, the package is either rejected or passed on to its destination,
depending on the first inspector’s particular orders. In this case, the package is never seen by the remaining
inspectors.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
14-6 User’s Reference Guide
packet
first
filter
no
match?
yes
send
to next
filter
pass or
discard?
discard
(delete)
pass
to network
If the package does not match the first inspector’s criteria, it goes to the second inspector, and so on. You can
see that the order of the inspectors in the line is very important.
For example, let’s say the first inspector’s orders are to send along all packages that come from Rome, and the
second inspector’s orders are to reject all packages that come from France. If a package arrives from Rome,
the first inspector sends it along without allowing the second inspector to see it. A package from Paris is
ignored by the first inspector, rejected by the second inspector, and never seen by the others. A package from
London is ignored by the first two inspectors, and so it’s seen by the third inspector.
In the same way, filter sets apply their filters in a particular order. The first filter applied can pass or discard a
packet before that packet ever reaches any of the other filters. If the first filter can neither pass nor discard the
packet (because it cannot match any criteria), the second filter has a chance to pass or reject it, and so on.
Because of this hierarchical structure, each filter is said to have a priority. The first filter has the highest priority,
and the last filter has the lowest priority.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Security 14-7
How individual filters work
As described above, a filter applies criteria to an IP packet and then takes one of three actions:
A filter’s actions
■
■
■
Passes the packet to the local or remote network
Blocks (discards) the packet
Ignores the packet
A filter passes or blocks a packet only if it finds a match after applying its criteria. When no match occurs, the
filter ignores the packet.
The criteria are based on information contained in the packets. A filter is simply a rule that prescribes certain
actions based on certain conditions. For example, the following rule qualifies as a filter:
A filtering rule
Block all Telnet attempts that originate from the remote host 199.211.211.17.
This rule applies to Telnet packets that come from a host with the IP address 199.211.211.17. If a match
occurs, the packet is blocked.
Here is what this rule looks like when implemented as a filter on the Netopia R2020:
+-#--Source IP Addr--Dest IP Addr-----Proto-Src.Port-D.Port--On?-Fwd-+
+--------------------------------------------------------------------+
| 1 199.211.211.17 0.0.0.0
TCP 23
Yes No |
+--------------------------------------------------------------------+
To understand this particular filter, look at the parts of a filter.
Parts of a filter
A filter consists of criteria based on packet attributes. A typical filter can match a packet on any one of the
following attributes:
■
■
■
The source IP address (where the packet was sent from)
The destination IP address (where the packet is going)
The type of higher-layer Internet protocol the packet is carrying, such as TCP or UDP
Port numbers
A filter can also match a packet’s port number attributes, but only if the filter’s protocol type is set to TCP or
UDP, since only those protocols use port numbers. The filter can be configured to match the following:
■
■
The source port number (the port on the sending host that originated the packet)
The destination port number (the port on the receiving host that the packet is destined for)
By matching on a port number, a filter can be applied to selected TCP or UDP services, such as Telnet, FTP, and
World Wide Web. The tables below show a few common services and their associated port numbers.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
14-8 User’s Reference Guide
Internet service
TCP port
Internet service
Finger
TCP port
FTP
20/ 21
23
79
80
Telnet
World Wide Web
News
SMTP (mail)
Gopher
25
144
513
70
rlogin
Internet service
UDP port
Internet service
UDP port
Who Is
43
AppleTalk Routing
202
Maintenance (at-rtmp)
World Wide Web
80
AppleTalk Name Binding
(at-nbp)
202
SNMP
TFTP
161
69
AURP (AppleTalk)
who
387
513
Port number comparisons
A filter can also use a comparison option to evaluate a packet’s source or destination port number. The
comparison options are:
No Compare: No comparison of the port number specified in the filter with the packet’s port number.
Not Equal To: For the filter to match, the packet’s port number cannot equal the port number specified in the
filter.
Less Than: For the filter to match, the packet’s port number must be less than the port number specified in the
filter.
Less Than or Equal: For the filter to match, the packet’s port number must be less than or equal to the port
number specified in the filter.
Equal: For the filter to match, the packet’s port number must equal the port number specified in the filter.
Greater Than: For the filter to match, the packet’s port number must be greater than the port number specified
in the filter.
Greater Than or Equal: For the filter to match, the packet’s port number must be greater than or equal to the
port number specified in the filter.
Other filter attributes
There are three other attributes to each filter:
■
■
■
The filter’s order (i.e., priority) in the filter set
Whether the filter is currently active
Whether the filter is set to pass (forward) packets or to block (discard) packets
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Security 14-9
Putting the parts together
When you display a filter set, its filters are displayed as rows in a table:
+-#---Source IP Addr---Dest IP Addr-----Proto-Src.Port-D.Port--On?-Fwd-+
+----------------------------------------------------------------------+
| 1 192.211.211.17 0.0.0.0
TCP 0
23
Yes No |
| 2 0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
TCP NC
ICMP --
TCP NC
UDP NC
=6000 Yes No |
| 3 0.0.0.0
--
Yes Yes |
| 4 0.0.0.0
>1023 Yes Yes |
| 5 0.0.0.0
>1023 Yes Yes |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
+----------------------------------------------------------------------+
The table’s columns correspond to each filter’s attributes:
#: The filter’s priority in the set. Filter number 1, with the highest priority, is first in the table.
Source IP Addr: The packet source IP address to match.
Dest IP Addr: The packet destination IP address to match.
Proto: The protocol to match. This can be entered as a number (see the table below) or as TCP or UDP if using
those protocols.
Protocol
Number to use
Full name
N/ A
ICMP
TCP
0
1
Ignores protocol type
Internet Control Message Protocol
Transmission Control Protocol
User Datagram Protocol
6
UDP
17
Src. Port: The source port to match. This is the port on the sending host that originated the packet.
D. Port: The destination port to match. This is the port on the receiving host for which the packet is intended.
On?: Displays Yes when the filter is in effect or No when it is not.
Fwd: Shows whether the filter forwards (Yes) a packet or discards (No) it when there’s a match.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
14-10 User’s Reference Guide
Filtering example #1
Returning to our filtering rule example from above (see page 14-7), look at how a rule is translated into a filter.
Start with the rule, then fill in the filter’s attributes:
1. The rule you want to implement as a filter is:
Block all Telnet attempts that originate from the remote host 199.211.211.17.
2. The host 199.211.211.17 is the source of the Telnet packets you want to block, while the destination
address is any IP address. How these IP addresses are masked determines what the final match will be,
although the mask is not displayed in the table that displays the filter sets (you set it when you create the
filter). In fact, since the mask for the destination IP address is 0.0.0.0, the address for Dest IP Addr could
have been anything. The mask for Source IP Addr must be 255.255.255.255 since an exact match is
desired.
■
■
■
■
Source IP Addr = 199.211.211.17
Dest IP Addr = 0.0.0.0
Destination IP address mask = 0.0.0.0
Note: To learn about IP addresses and masks, see Appendix C, “Understanding IP Addressing.”
3. Using the tables on page 14-7, find the destination port and protocol numbers (the local Telnet port):
■
■
Proto = TCP (or 6)
D. Port = 23
4. The filter should be enabled and instructed to block the Telnet packets containing the source address
shown in step 2:
■
■
On? = Yes
Fwd = No
This four-step process is how we produced the following filter from the original rule:
+-#---Source IP Addr---Dest IP Addr-----Proto-Src.Port-D.Port--On?-Fwd-+
+----------------------------------------------------------------------+
| 1 192.211.211.17 0.0.0.0
|
TCP 0
23
Yes No |
|
+----------------------------------------------------------------------+
Filtering example #2
Suppose a filter is configured to block all incoming IP packets with the source IP address of 200.233.14.0,
regardless of the type of connection or its destination. The filter would look like this:
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Security 14-11
+-#---Source IP Addr---Dest IP Addr-----Proto-Src.Port-D.Port--On?-Fwd-+
+----------------------------------------------------------------------+
| 1 200.233.14.0
|
0.0.0.0
0
Yes No |
|
+----------------------------------------------------------------------+
This filter blocks any packets coming from a remote network with the IP network address 200.233.14.0. The 0
at the end of the address signifies any host on the class C IP network 200.233.14.0. If, for example, the filter
is applied to a packet with the source IP address 200.233.14.5, it will block it.
In this case, the mask, which does not appear in the table, must be set to 255.255.255.0. This way, all
packets with a source address of 200.233.14.x will be matched correctly, no matter what the final address byte
is.
Note: The protocol attribute for this filter is 0 by default. This tells the filter to ignore the IP protocol or type of
IP packet.
Design guidelines
Careful thought should go into designing a new filter set. You should consider the following guidelines:
■
Be sure the filter set’s overall purpose is clear from the beginning. A vague purpose can lead to a faulty
set, and that can actually make your network less secure.
■
■
Be sure each individual filter’s purpose is clear.
Determine how filter priority will affect the set’s actions. Test the set (on paper) by determining how the
filters would respond to a number of different hypothetical packets.
■
Consider the combined effect of the filters. If every filter in a set fails to match on a particular packet, the
packet is:
■
■
■
passed if all the filters are configured to discard (not forward).
discarded if all the filters are configured to pass (forward).
discarded if the set contains a combination of pass and discard filters.
Disadvantages of filters
Although using filter sets can greatly enhance network security, there are disadvantages:
■
■
■
Filters are complex. Combining them in filter sets introduces subtle interactions, increasing the likelihood
of implementation errors.
Enabling a large number of filters can have a negative impact on performance. Processing of packets will
take longer if they have to go through many checkpoints.
Too much reliance on packet filters can cause too little reliance on other security methods. Filter sets are
not a substitute for password protection, effective safeguarding of passwords, caller ID, the “must match”
option in the answer profile, PAP or CHAP in connection profiles, callback, and general awareness of how
your network may be vulnerable.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
14-12 User’s Reference Guide
An approach to using filters
The ultimate goal of network security is to prevent unauthorized access to the network without compromising
authorized access. Using filter sets is part of reaching that goal.
Each filter set you design will be based on one of the following approaches:
■
■
That which is not expressly prohibited is permitted.
That which is not expressly permitted is prohibited.
It is strongly recommended that you take the latter, and safer, approach to all of your filter set designs.
Working with IP filters and filter sets
This section covers IP filters and filter sets. For working with IPX filters and filter sets, see “IPX filters” on
page 14-21.
Configuration
Menu
Filter
Sets
IP Filter Sets
To work with filters and filter sets, begin by accessing the filter set screens.
Note: Make sure you understand how filters work before attempting to use them. Read the section “About
filters and filter sets,” beginning on page 14-4.
IP Filter Sets
Display/Change IP Filter Set...
Add IP Filter Set...
Delete IP Filter Set...
Return/Enter to configure and add a new Filter Set
Set Up IP Filter Sets (Firewalls) from this and the following Menus.
The procedure for creating and maintaining filter sets is as follows:
1. Add a new filter set.
2. Create the filters for the new filter set.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Security 14-13
3. View, change, or delete individual filters and filter sets.
The sections below explain how to execute these steps.
Adding a filter set
You can create up to eight different custom filter sets. Each filter set can contain up to 16 output filters and up
to 16 input filters.
To add a new filter set, select Add IP Filter Set in the IP Filter Sets screen and press Return to go to the Add
Filter Set screen.
Note: There are two groups of items in the Add Filter Set screen, one for input filters and one for output filters.
The two groups work in essentially the same way, as you’ll see below.
Add IP Filter Set
Filter Set Name:
Filter Set 2
Display/Change Input Filter...
Add Input Filter...
Delete Input Filter...
Display/Change Output Filter...
Add Output Filter...
Delete Output Filter...
ADD FILTER SET
CANCEL
Configure the Filter Set name and its associated Filters.
Naming a new filter set
All new filter sets have a default name. The first filter set you add will be called Filter Set 1, the next filter will be
Filter Set 2, and so on.
To give a new filter set a different name, select Filter Set Name and enter a new name for the filter set.
To save the filter set, select ADD FILTER SET. The saved filter set is empty (contains no filters), but you can
return to it later to add filters (see “Modifying filter sets” on page 14-17). Or you can add filters to your new set
before saving it (see “Adding filters to a filter set” on page 14-14).
Select CANCEL to leave the Add Filter Set screen without saving the new filter set and return to the Filter Sets
screen.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
14-14 User’s Reference Guide
Input and output filters—source and destination
There are two kinds of filters you can add to a filter set: input and output. Input filters check packets received
from the Internet, destined for your network. Output filters check packets transmitted from your network to the
Internet.
packet
input filter
LAN
WAN
packet
output filter
The Netopia R-series Router
Packets in the Netopia R2020 pass through an input filter if they originate in the WAN and through an output filter if they’re
being sent out to the WAN.
The process for adding input and output filters is exactly the same. The main difference between the two
involves their reference to source and destination. From the perspective of an input filter, your local network is
the destination of the packets it checks, and the remote network is their source. From the perspective of an
output filter, your local network is the source of the packets, and the remote network is their destination.
Type of filter
“source” means
“destination” means
Input filter
the remote network
the local network
the local network
Output filter
the remote network
Adding filters to a filter set
In this section you’ll learn how to add an input filter to a filter set. Adding an output filter works exactly the same
way, providing you keep the different source and destination perspectives in mind.
To add an input filter, select Add Input Filter in the Add IP Filter Set screen and go to the Add Filter screen.
(Select Add Output Filter to add an output filter.)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Security 14-15
Add Filter
Enabled:
Forward:
No
No
Source IP Address:
Source IP Address Mask:
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
Dest. IP Address:
Dest. IP Address Mask:
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
Protocol Type:
0
Source Port Compare...
Source Port ID:
Dest. Port Compare...
Dest. Port ID:
No Compare
0
No Compare
0
ADD THIS FILTER NOW
CANCEL
Enter the IP specific information for this filter.
1. To make the filter active in the filter set, select Enabled and toggle it to Yes. If Enabled is toggled to No, the
filter can still exist in the filter set, but it will have no effect.
2. If you want the filter to forward packets that match its criteria to the destination IP address, select Forward
and toggle it to Yes. If Forward is toggled to No, packets matching the filter’s criteria will be discarded.
3. Select Source IP Address and enter the source IP address this filter will match on. You can enter a subnet
or a host address.
4. Select Source IP Address Mask and enter a mask for the source IP address. This allows you to further
modify the way the filter will match on the source address. Enter 0.0.0.0 to force the filter to match on all
source IP addresses, or enter 255.255.255.255 to match the source IP address exclusively.
5. Select Dest. IP Address and enter the destination IP address this filter will match on. You can enter a
6. Select Dest. IP Address Mask and enter a mask for the destination IP address. This allows you to further
modify the way the filter will match on the destination address. Enter 0.0.0.0 to force the filter to match on
all destination IP addresses.
7. Select Protocol Type and enter ICMP, TCP, UDP, Any, or the number of another IP transport protocol (see
Note: If Protocol Type is set to TCP or UDP, the settings for port comparison that you configure in steps 8
and 9 will appear. These settings only take effect if the Protocol Type is TCP or UDP.
8. Select Source Port Compare and choose a comparison method for the filter to use on a packet’s source
port number. Then select Source Port ID and enter the actual source port number to match on (see the
table on page 14-7).
9. Select Dest. Port Compare and choose a comparison method for the filter to use on a packet’s destination
port number. Then select Dest. Port ID and enter the actual destination port number to match on (see the
table on page 14-7).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
14-16 User’s Reference Guide
10. When you are finished configuring the filter, select ADD THIS FILTER NOW to save the filter in the filter set.
Select CANCEL to discard the filter.
Viewing filters
To display a view-only table of input (output) filters, select Display/ Change Input Filters (Display/ Change
Output Filters) in the Add IP Filter Set screen.
Modifying filters
To modify a filter, select Display/ Change Input Filter (Display/ Change Output Filter) in the Add IP Filter Set
screen to display a table of filters.
Select a filter from the table and press Return to go to the Change Filter screen. The parameters in this screen
are the same as the ones in the Add Filter screen (see “Adding filters to a filter set” on page 14-14).
Change Filter
Enabled:
Forward:
No
No
Source IP Address:
Source IP Address Mask:
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
Dest. IP Address:
Dest. IP Address Mask:
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
Protocol Type:
0
Source Port Compare...
Source Port ID:
Dest. Port Compare...
Dest. Port ID:
No Compare
0
No Compare
0
Enter the IP specific information for this filter.
Deleting filters
To delete a filter, select Delete Input Filter (Delete Output Filter) in the Add Filter Set screen to display a table
of filters.
Select the filter from the table and press Return to delete it. Press the Escape key to exit the table without
deleting the filter.
Viewing filter sets
To display a view-only list of filter sets, select Display/ Change Filter Sets in the IP Filter Sets screen.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Modifying filter sets
To modify a filter set, select Display/ Change Filter Set in the Filter Sets screen to display a list of filter sets.
Select a filter set from the list and press Return to go to the Change IP Filter Set screen. The items in this
screen are the same as the ones in the Add Filter screen (see “Adding filters to a filter set” on page 14-14).
Change IP Filter Set
Filter Set Name:
Basic Firewall
Display/Change Input Filter...
Add Input Filter...
Delete Input Filter...
Display/Change Output Filter...
Add Output Filter...
Delete Output Filter...
Deleting a filter set
Note: If you delete a filter set, all of the filters it contains are deleted as well. To reuse any of these filters in
another set, you’ll have to note their configuration before deleting the current filter set and then recreate them.
To delete a filter set, select Delete Filter Set in the IP Filter Sets screen to display a list of filter sets.
Select a filter set from the list and press Return to delete it. Press the Escape key to exit the list without
deleting the filter set.
A sample IP filter set
This section contains the settings for a filter set, called Basic Firewall, which is part of the Netopia R2020’s
factory configuration.
Basic Firewall blocks undesirable traffic originating from the WAN (in most cases, the Internet), but passes all
traffic originating from the LAN. It follows the conservative “that which is not expressly permitted is prohibited”
approach: unless an incoming packet expressly matches one of the constituent input filters, it will not be
forwarded to the LAN.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
14-18 User’s Reference Guide
The five input filters and one output filter that make up Basic Firewall are shown in the table below.
Input filter Input filter Input filter Input filter Input filter
Output
filter 1
Setting
Enabled
1
2
3
4
5
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Forward
Yes
Source IP
address
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
TCP
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
TCP
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
TCP
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
UDP
0.0.0.0
Source IP
address mask
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
Dest. IP
address
Dest. IP
address mask
Protocol type
ICMP
N/ A
0
Source port
comparison
No
Compare
No
Compare
No
Compare
No
Compare
N/ A
Source port ID
0
0
N/ A
N/ A
0
0
N/ A
N/ A
Dest. port
comparison
Equal
Equal
Greater
Than
Greater
Than
Dest. port ID
2000
6000
N/ A
1023
1023
N/ A
Basic Firewall’s filters play the following roles.
Input filters 1 and 2: These block WAN-originated OpenWindows and X-Windows sessions. Service origination
requests for these protocols use ports 2000 and 6000, respectively. Since these are greater than 1023,
OpenWindows and X-Windows traffic would otherwise be allowed by input filter 4. Input filters 1 and 2 must
precede input filter 4; otherwise they would have no effect as filter 4 would have already passed OpenWindows
and X-Windows traffic.
Input filter 3: This filter explicitly passes all WAN-originated ICMP traffic to permit devices on the WAN to ping
devices on the LAN. Ping is an Internet service that is useful for diagnostic purposes.
Input filters 4 and 5: These filters pass all TCP and UDP traffic, respectively, when the destination port is
greater than 1023. This type of traffic generally does not allow a remote host to connect to the LAN using one
of the potentially intrusive Internet services, such as Telnet, FTP, and WWW.
Output filter 1: This filter passes all outgoing traffic to make sure that no outgoing connections from the LAN
are blocked.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Firewall is suitable for a LAN containing only client hosts that wish to access servers on the WAN, not for
a LAN containing servers providing services to clients on the WAN. Basic Firewall’s general strategy is to
explicitly pass WAN-originated TCP and UDP traffic to ports greater than 1023. Ports lower than 1024 are the
service origination ports for various Internet services such as FTP, Telnet, and the World Wide Web (WWW).
A more complicated filter set would be required to provide WAN access to a LAN-based server. See “Possible
modifications,” below, for ways to allow remote hosts to use services provided by servers on the LAN.
Possible modifications
You can modify the sample filter set Basic Firewall to allow incoming traffic using the examples below. These
modifications are not intended to be combined. Each modification is to be the only one used with Basic Firewall.
The results of combining filter set modifications can be difficult to predict. It is recommended that you take
special care if making more than one modification to the sample filter set.
Trusted host. To allow unlimited access by a trusted remote host with the IP address a.b.c.d (corresponding to
a numbered IP address such as 163.176.8.243), insert the following input filter ahead of the current input filter
1:
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
Enabled: Yes
Forward: Yes
Source IP Address: a.b.c.d
Source IP Address Mask: 255.255.255.255
Dest. IP Address: 0.0.0.0
Dest. IP Address Mask: 0.0.0.0
Protocol Type: 0
Trusted subnet. To allow unlimited access by a trusted remote subnet with subnet address a.b.c.d
(corresponding to a numbered IP address such as 163.176.8.0) and subnet mask e.f.g.h (corresponding to a
numbered IP mask such as 255.255.255.0), insert the following input filter ahead of the current input filter 1:
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
Enabled: Yes
Forward: Yes
Source IP Address: a.b.c.d
Source IP Address Mask: e.f.g.h
Dest. IP Address: 0.0.0.0
Dest. IP Address Mask: 0.0.0.0
Protocol Type: 0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
14-20 User’s Reference Guide
FTP sessions. To allow WAN-originated FTP sessions to a LAN-based FTP server with the IP address a.b.c.d
(corresponding to a numbered IP address such as 163.176.8.243), insert the following input filter ahead of the
current input filter 1:
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
Enabled: Yes
Forward: Yes
Source IP Address: 0.0.0.0
Source IP Address Mask: 0.0.0.0
Dest. IP Address: a.b.c.d
Dest. IP Address Mask: 255.255.255.255
Protocol Type: TCP
Source Port Comparison: No Compare
Source Port ID: 0
Dest. Port Comparison: Equal
Dest. Port ID: 21
Note: A similar filter could be used to permit Telnet or WWW access. Set the Dest. Port ID to 23 for Telnet or
80 for WWW.
AURP tunnel. To allow an AURP tunnel between a remote AURP router with the IP address a.b.c.d
(corresponding to a numbered IP address such as 163.176.8.243) and a local AURP router (including the
Netopia R2020 itself), insert the following input filter ahead of the current input filter 1:
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
Enabled: Yes
Forward: Yes
Source IP Address: a.b.c.d
Source IP Address Mask: 255.255.255.255
Dest. IP Address: 0.0.0.0
Dest. IP Address Mask: 0.0.0.0
Protocol Type: UDP
Source Port Comparison: Equal
Source Port ID: 387
Dest. Port Comparison: Equal
Dest. Port ID: 387
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Security 14-21
IPX filters
Filter Sets
(Firewalls)
IPX Filters
and Filter Sets
System
Configuration
Main
Menu
IPX packet filters work very similarly to IP packet filters. They filter data traffic coming from or going to remote
IPX networks. IPX filters can be set up to pass or discard IPX packets based on a number of user-defined
criteria. Like IP filters, IPX filters must be grouped in sets that are applied to the answer profile or to connection
profiles.
IPX SAP filters are used for filtering server entries not required to pass over the WAN links. When connecting to
a large IPX network via dial-up connection, the transfer of large numbers of SAP entries can consume significant
bandwidth on the WAN link.
Note: Using SAP filtering to prevent a server from being advertised does not provide security against that
server being accessed—IPX packet filtering must be used for that purpose.
Setting up and using IPX filter sets is a four-step process:
1. Create the filters to use.
2. Create the filter sets to use.
3. Add filters to the filter sets.
4. Attach the filter sets to the answer profile or to connection profiles.
You can configure IPX filters and set up IPX filter sets from the IPX Filters and Filter Sets screen.
IPX Filters and Filter Sets
Display/Change IPX Packet Filters...
Add IPX Packet Filter...
Delete IPX Packet Filter...
Display/Change IPX Packet Filter Sets...
Add IPX Packet Filter Set...
Delete IPX Packet Filter Set...
Display/Change IPX Sap Filters...
Add IPX Sap Filter...
Delete IPX Sap Filter...
Display/Change IPX Sap Filter Sets...
Add IPX Sap Filter Set...
Delete IPX Sap Filter Set...
Define your filters 1st. IPX Filter Sets refer to, but don't contain, filters.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
14-22 User’s Reference Guide
The items in the IPX Filters and Filter Sets screen are grouped into four areas:
■
■
■
■
IPX packet filters
IPX packet filter sets
IPX SAP filters
IPX SAP filter sets
The following sections explain the items in each of these areas.
IPX packet filters
For each IPX packet filter, you can configure a set of parameters to match on the source or destination
attributes of IPX data packets coming from or going to the WAN.
Viewing and modifying packet filters
To display a view-only table of IPX packet filters, select Show/ Change IPX Packet Filters in the IPX Filters and
Filter Sets screen.
To modify any of the filters in the table, note the desired filter and press Return to go to the Change Packet Filter
screen. The parameters in this screen are the same as the ones in the Add Packet Filter screen (see the next
section).
Adding a packet filter
To add a new IPX packet filter, select Add IPX Packet Filter in the IPX Filters and Filter Sets screen and press
Return to go to the Add Packet Filter screen.
Add Packet Filter
Filter Name:
IPX Filter 1
Source Network:
Source Node Address:
Source Socket:
00000000
000000000000
0000
Destination Network:
Destination Node Address:
Destination Socket:
00000000
000000000000
0000
ADD FILTER NOW
CANCEL
Configure a new IPX Packet Filter. Finished? ADD or CANCEL to exit.
By default, the filter’s socket numbers and network and node addresses are null (all zeros). This sets the filter
to match on any IPX data packet. You should configure the filter using criteria that meet your security needs.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Security 14-23
1. Select Filter Name and enter a descriptive name for the filter.
2. To specify a source network for the filter to match on, select Source Network and enter an IPX network
address.
3. To specify a source node for the filter to match on, select Source Node Address and enter an IPX node
address.
4. To specify a source socket for the filter to match on, select Source Socket and enter an IPX source socket
number.
5. To specify a destination network for the filter to match on, select Destination Network and enter an IPX
network address.
6. To specify a destination node for the filter to match on, select Destination Node Address and enter an IPX
node address.
7. To specify a destination socket for the filter to match on, select Destination Socket and enter an IPX
destination socket number.
8. Select ADD FILTER NOW to save the current filter. Select CANCEL to exit the Add Packet Filter screen
without saving the new filter.
Deleting a packet filter
To delete a packet filter, select Delete IPX Packet Filter in the IPX Filters and Filter Sets screen to display a
table of filters. Select a filter from the table and press Return to delete it. Press the Escape key to exit the table
without deleting the filter.
IPX packet filter sets
Before the individual filters can be used, IPX packet filters must be grouped into sets. A filter can be part of
more than one filter set.
Viewing and modifying packet filter sets
To display a table of IPX packet filter sets, select Show/ Change IPX Packet Filter Sets in the IPX Filters and
Filter Sets screen.
To modify any of the filter sets in the list, select the desired filter set and press Return to go to the Change
Packet Filter Set screen. The parameters in this screen are the same as the ones in the Add Packet Filter Set
screen (see the next section).
Adding a packet filter set
To add a new IPX packet filter set, select Add IPX Packet Filter Set in the IPX Filters and Filter Sets screen and
press Return to go to the Add Packet Filter Set screen.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
14-24 User’s Reference Guide
Add Packet Filter Set
Filter Set Name:
Show Filters/Change Action on Match...
Append Filter...
Remove Filter...
ADD FILTER SET NOW
CANCEL
Configure an IPX Filter Set here. You must ADD FILTER SET NOW to save.
Follow these steps to configure the new packet filter set:
1. Select Filter Set Name and enter a descriptive name for the filter set.
2. To change the forwarding action of filters in the filter set, select Show Filters/ Change Action on Match
and press Return to go to the Show Filters/ Change Actions on Match screen.
Show Filters/Change Actions on Match
Filter Name---------------------Forward
Filter 1
No
Filter 2
No
<<NO MATCH>>
Yes
Set whether filters forward or drop matching packets here.
Select a filter and toggle the packet forwarding action to Yes (pass) or No (discard).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Security 14-25
3. To add a filter to the filter set, select Append Filter to display a table of filters. Select a filter from the table
and press Return to add it to the filter set. The default action of newly added filters is to not forward
packets that match their criteria.
To exit the table without adding the filter, press the Escape key.
4. To remove a filter from the filter set, select Detach Filter to display a table of appended filters. Select a
filter from the table and press Return to remove it from the set. To exit the table without removing the filter,
press the Escape key.
5. Select ADD FILTER SET NOW to save the current filter set. Select CANCEL to exit the Add Packet Filter Set
screen without saving the new filter set.
Deleting a packet filter set
To delete a packet filter set, select Delete IPX Packet Filter Set in the IPX Filters and Filter Sets screen to
display a list of filter sets. Select a filter set from the list and press Return to delete it. Press the Escape key to
exit the list without deleting the filter set.
Note: Deleting a filter set does not delete the filters in that set. However, the filters in the deleted set are no
longer in effect (unless they are part of another set). The deleted set will no longer appear in the answer profile
or any connection profiles to which it was added.
IPX SAP filters
For each IPX SAP filter, you can configure a set of parameters to match on certain attributes of IPX SAP packet
entries. The filters check IPX SAP packets for entries that match and then act on those entries. The SAP
packets themselves are always allowed to continue after their entries are checked.
The purpose of filtering SAP packets is not to make your network more secure, but to add efficiency to network
bandwidth use. Filtering SAP packets may reduce the size of SAP packets and SAP bindery tables by removing
unwanted entries.
Viewing and modifying SAP filters
To display a table of IPX SAP filters, select Show/ Change IPX SAP Filters in the IPX Filters and Filter Sets
screen.
To modify any of the filters in the table, select the desired filter and press Return to go to the Change SAP Filter
screen. The parameters in this screen are the same as the ones in the Add SAP Filter screen (see the next
section).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
14-26 User’s Reference Guide
Adding a SAP filter
To add a new IPX SAP filter, select Add IPX SAP Filter in the IPX Filters and Filter Sets screen and press Return
to go to the Add SAP Filter screen.
Add Sap Filter
Filter Name:
Server Name:
Socket:
Type:
0000
0000
IPX Network:
IPX Node Address:
00000000
000000000000
ADD FILTER NOW
CANCEL
Configure a new IPX SAP Filter. Finished? ADD or CANCEL to exit.
By default, the filter’s socket and type numbers and network and node addresses are null (all zeros). This sets
the filter to match on any IPX SAP packet entry. You should configure the filter using criteria that meet your
needs.
Follow these steps to configure the new SAP filter:
1. Select Filter Name and enter a descriptive name for the filter.
2. To specify a server name for the filter to match on, select Server Name and enter the name of an IPX
server. You can use the wildcard characters * (asterisk) and ? (question mark). Use * to match any string,
including a null string (no characters), and ? to match any single character in the server’s name. For
example, the filter could match on the server name “NETOPIA” with “NETO*”, “NETO?IA”, and “NETOPIA*”.
3. To specify a socket for the filter to match on, select Socket and enter an IPX socket number.
4. To specify a type number for the filter to match on, select Type and enter an IPX type number.
5. To specify an IPX network address for the filter to match on, select IPX Network and enter an IPX network
address.
6. To specify an IPX node address for the filter to match on, select IPX Node Address and enter an IPX node
address.
7. Select ADD FILTER NOW to save the current filter. Select CANCEL to exit the Add SAP Filter screen without
saving the new filter.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Security 14-27
Deleting a SAP filter
To delete a SAP filter, select Delete IPX SAP filter in the IPX Filters and Filter Sets screen to display a table of
filters. Select a filter from the table and press Return to delete it. Press the Escape key to exit the table without
deleting the filter.
IPX SAP filter sets
Before IPX SAP filters can be used, they must be grouped into sets. A SAP filter can be part of more than one
filter set.
Viewing and modifying SAP filter sets
To display a table of IPX SAP filter sets, select Show/ Change IPX SAP Filter Sets in the IPX Filters and Filter
Sets screen to display a list of filter sets.
To modify any of the filter sets in the list, select the desired filter set and go to the Change SAP Filter Set
screen. The parameters in this screen are the same as the ones in the Add SAP Filter Set screen (see the
previous section).
Adding a SAP filter set
To add a new IPX SAP filter set, select Add IPX SAP Filter Set in the IPX Filters and Filter Sets screen and go to
the Add SAP Filter Set screen.
Add SAP Filter Set
Filter Set Name:
Show Filters/Change Action on Match...
Append Filter...
Remove Filter...
ADD FILTER SET NOW
CANCEL
Configure an IPX Filter Set here. You must ADD FILTER SET NOW to save.
Follow these steps to configure the new SAP filter set:
1. Select Filter Set Name and enter a descriptive name for the filter set.
2. To change the forwarding action of filters in the filter set, select Show Filters/ Change Action on Match
and press Return to go to the Show Filters/ Change Actions on Match screen.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
14-28 User’s Reference Guide
Show Filters/Change Actions on Match
Filter Name---------------------Forward
Filter 1
No
Filter 2
No
<<NO MATCH>>
Yes
Set whether filters forward or drop matching packets here.
Select a filter and toggle the entry forwarding action to Yes (pass) or No (discard).
3. To add a filter to the filter set, select Append Filter to display a table of filters. Select a filter from the table
and press Return to add it to the filter set. The default action of newly added filters is to not forward
(discard) packet entries that match their criteria.
To exit the table without adding the filter, press the Escape key.
4. To remove a filter from the filter set, select Detach Filter to display a table of appended filters. Select a
filter from the table and press Return to remove it from the set. To exit the table without removing the filter,
press the Escape key.
5. Select ADD FILTER SET NOW to save the current filter set. Select CANCEL to exit the Add SAP Filter Set
screen without saving the new filter set.
Deleting a SAP filter set
To delete a SAP filter set, select Delete IPX SAP Filter Set in the IPX Filters and Filter Sets screen to display a
list of filter sets. Select a filter set from the list and press Return to delete it. Press the Escape key to exit the
list without deleting the filter set.
Note: Deleting a filter set does not delete the filters in that set. However, the filters in the deleted set are no
longer in effect (unless they are part of another set). The deleted set will no longer appear in the answer profile
or any connection profiles to which it was added.
Firewall tutorial
General Firewall Terms
Firewall: a component or set of components that restrict access between a protected network and the Internet,
or between two networks.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Security 14-29
Host: A workstation on the Network.
Packet: Unit of communication on the Internet.
Packet Filter: Packet filters allow or deny packets based on source or destination IP addresses, TCP or UDP
ports, or the TCP ACK bit.
Port: A number that defines a particular type of service.
Filter Rule: A filter set is comprised of individual filter rules.
Filter Set: A grouping of individual filter rules.
Basic IP Packet Components
All IP packets contain the same basic “header” information, as follows:
Source IP Address
Destination IP Address
Source Port
Destination Port
Protocol
163.176.132.18
163.176.4.27
2541
80
TCP
ACK Bit
Yes
DATA
User Data
This header information is what the packet filter uses to make filtering decisions. It is important to note that a
packet filter does not look into the IP datastream (the User Data from above) to make filtering decisions.
Basic Protocol Types
TCP: Transmission Control Protocol. TCP provides reliable packet delivery and has a retransmission
mechanism (so packets are not lost). RFC 793 is the specification for TCP.
UDP: User Datagram Protocol. Unlike TCP, UDP does not guarantee reliable, sequenced packet delivery. If data
does not reach its destination, UDP does not re transmit the data. RFC 768 is the specification for UDP.
And there are many more ports defined in the Assigned Addresses RFC.
Example TCP/UDP Ports
TCP Port
20/ 21
Service
FTP
UDP Port
161
Service
SNMP
23
25
Telnet
SMTP
69
TFTP
387
AURP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
14-30 User’s Reference Guide
80
WWW
News
144
Firewall design rules
There are two basic rules to firewall design:
■
“What is not explicitly allowed is denied...”
and
■
“What is not explicitly denied is allowed...”
The first rule is far more secure, and is the best approach to firewall design. It is far easier (and more secure)
to allow in or out only certain services and deny anything else. If the other rule is used, you would have to figure
out everything that you want to disallow, now and future.
Firewall Logic
Firewall design is a test of logic, and filter rule ordering is critical. If a packet is passed through a series of filter
rules and then the packet matches a rule, the appropriate action is taken. The packet will not pass through the
remainder of the filter rules.
For example, if you had the following filter set...
Allow WWW access;
Allow FTP access;
Allow SMTP access;
Deny all other packets.
and a packet goes through these rules destined for FTP, the packet would pass through the first rule (WWW), go
through the second rule (FTP), matches this rule and the packet is allowed through.
If you had this filter set for example....
Allow WWW access;
Allow FTP access;
Deny FTP access;
Deny all other packets.
and a packet goes through these rules destined for FTP, the packet would pass through the first filter rule
(WWW), match the second rule (FTP) and the packet is allowed through. Even though the next rule is to deny all
FTP traffic, the FTP packet will never make it to this rule.
Binary Representation
It is easiest when doing filtering to convert the IP address and mask in question to binary. This will allow you to
perform the logical AND to determine if a packet matches a filter rule.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Security 14-31
Logical ANDing
When a packet is compared (in most cases) a logical AND is performed. First the IP addresses and subnet
masks are converted to binary and then ANDed together. The rules for logical ANDing are as follows:
0 AND 0 = 0
0 AND 1 = 0
1 AND 0 = 0
1 AND 1 = 1
For example:
Filter rule:
Deny
IP: 163.176.1.15
Mask: 255.255.255.255 BINARY: 11111111.11111111.11111111.11111111
Incoming Packet:
IP 163.176.1.15
AND the incoming packet and subnet mask together, the result is:
10100011.10110000.00000001.00001111
BINARY: 10100011.10110000.00000001.00001111
BINARY: 10100011.10110000.00000001.00001111
which matches the IP address in the filter rule and the packet is denied.
Implied Rules
With a given set of filter rules, there is an Implied rule which may or may not be shown to the user. The implied
rule tells the filter set what to do with a packet that does not match any of the filter rules. An example of implied
rules is as follows:
Implied
Meaning
Y+Y+Y=N
N+N+N=Y
Y+N+Y=N
If all filter rules are YES, the implied is NO.
If all filter rules are NO, the implied is YES.
If a mix of YES and NO filters, the implied is NO.
Established Connections
The TCP header contains one bit called the ACK Bit (or TCP Ack bit). This ACK Bit only appears with TCP, not
UDP. The ACK bit is part of the TCP mechanism that guaranteed the delivery of data. The ACK bit is set
whenever one side of a connection has received data from the other side. Only the first TCP packet will not have
the ACK bit set, once the TCP connection is in place the remainder of the TCP packets with have the ACK bit
set.
The ACK bit is helpful for firewall design and reduces the number of potential filter rules. A filter rule could be
created just allowing incoming TCP packets with the ACK bit set, as these packets had to be originated from the
local network.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
14-32 User’s Reference Guide
Example IP Filter Set Screen
This is an example of the Netopia IP filter set screen:
Change Filter
Enabled:
Forward:
Yes
No
Source IP Address:
Source IP Address Mask:
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
Dest. IP Address:
Dest. IP Address Mask:
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
Protocol Type:
TCP
Source Port Compare...
Source Port ID:
No Compare
0
Dest. Port Compare...
Dest. Port ID:
Equal
2000
No
Established TCP Conns. Only:
Return/Enter accepts * Tab toggles * ESC cancels.
Enter the IP specific information for this filter.
Filter Basics
In the source or destination IP address fields, the IP address that is entered MUST be the NETWORK address of
the subnet. A HOST address can be entered, but the applied subnet mask must be 32 bits (255.255.255.255).
The Netopia R2020 has the ability to compare source and destination TCP or UDP ports. These options are as
follows:
Item
No compare
What it means
Does not compare TCP or UDP port
Matches any port other than what is defined
Anything less than the port defined
Any port less than or equal to the port defined
Matches only the port defined
Not Equal To
Less Than
Less Than Or Equal
Equal
Greater Than or Equal Matches the port or any port greater
Greater Than Matches anything greater than the port defined.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Security 14-33
Example Network
Incoming
Packet Filter
Netopia
Internet
DATA
IP: 200.1.1.??
Example Filters
Example 1
Filter Rule:
200.1.1.0
(Source IP Network Address)
(Source IP Mask)
255.255.255.128
Forward = No
(What happens on match)
Incoming packet has the source address of 200.1.1.28
IP Address
200.1.1.28
AND
Binary Representation
00011100
(Source address in incoming IP packet)
255.255.255.128 10000000
00000000
(Perform the logical AND)
(Logical AND result)
This incoming IP packet has a source IP address that matches the network address in the Source IP Address
field (00000000) in the Netopia R2020. This will NOT forward this packet.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
14-34 User’s Reference Guide
Example 2
Filter Rule:
200.1.1.0
(Source IP Network Address)
(Source IP Mask)
255.255.255.128
Forward = No
(What happens on match)
Incoming packet has the source address of 200.1.1.184
IP Address
200.1.1.184
AND
Binary Representation
10111000
(Source address in incoming IP packet)
255.255.255.128 10000000
10000000
(Perform the logical AND)
(Logical AND result)
This incoming IP packet (10000000) has a source IP address that does not match the network address in the
Source IP Address field (00000000) in the Netopia R2020. This rule WILL forward this packet because the
packet does not match.
Example 3
Filter Rule:
200.1.1.96
(Source IP Network Address)
(Source IP Mask)
255.255.255.240
Forward = No
(What happens on match)
Incoming packet has the source address of 200.1.1.184
IP Address
200.1.1.184
AND
Binary Representation
10111000
(Source address in incoming IP packet)
255.255.255.240 11110000
10110000
(Perform the logical AND)
(Logical AND result)
Since the Source IP Network Address in the Netopia R2020 is 01100000, and the source IP address after the
logical AND is 1011000, this rule does NOT match and this packet will be passed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Security 14-35
Example 4
Filter Rule:
200.1.1.96
(Source IP Network Address)
(Source IP Mask)
255.255.255.240
Forward = No
(What happens on match)
Incoming packet has the source address of 200.1.1.104
IP Address
200.1.1.104
AND
Binary Representation
01101000
(Source address in incoming IP packet)
255.255.255.240 11110000
01100000
(Perform the logical AND)
(Logical AND result)
Since the Source IP Network Address in the Netopia R2020 is 01100000, and the source IP address after the
logical AND is 01100000, this rule DOES match and this packet will NOT be passed.
Example 5
Filter Rule:
200.1.1.96
(Source IP Network Address)
(Source IP Mask)
255.255.255.255
Forward = No
(What happens on match)
Incoming packet has the source address of 200.1.1.96
IP Address
200.1.1.96
AND
Binary Representation
01100000
(Source address in incoming IP packet)
255.255.255.255 11111111
01100000
(Perform the logical AND)
(Logical AND result)
Since the Source IP Network Address in the Netopia R2020 is 01100000, and the source IP address after the
logical AND is 01100000, this rule DOES match and this packet will NOT be passed. This rule masks off a
SINGLE IP address.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
14-36 User’s Reference Guide
Token Security Authentication
This section discusses how to configure and use security authentication on the Netopia R2020.
Note: The security authentication feature only applies to Netopia R2020 models connecting over a dial-up line
using the PPP-PAP-TOKEN or PPP-CACHE-TOKEN authentication protocol.
Securing network environments
Unauthorized tampering or theft of information on internal networks causes serious ramifications, given the
reliance on information systems. Network abuse is a serious problem, complicated by the difficulty in detecting
the source of the abuses. An unauthorized user can gain access to networks and copy information without
leaving a trace.
Password protection is one solution, but static passwords are often insecure. They can be compromised,
allowing unauthorized users to disguise themselves as authorized users and enter supposedly secure systems.
However, a company called Security Dynamics™ has patented a security authentication technology to increase
network security.
SecurID is a two-factor authentication process to protect against unauthorized access. This dynamic user
authentication produces a randomly-generated security code mechanism that changes every 60 seconds. At
login, authorized users enter their password and the code displayed on their SecurID token card. While a
password may be compromised, the constantly changing access code, which requires the token card during
system use, bars unauthorized users from entering the network.
Using the SecurID token card
Each SecurID token card is programmed with an algorithm that ensures every code displayed is valid only for
that user at that particular time. The token card has a display that authorizes the individual user access to the
computer. Through this authentication system, the user’s identity is verified when the correct password and
current code are entered from the user’s token.
Personal identification number (PIN)
The user’s password is called a personal identification number, or PIN. The user enters the secret PIN from a
console connection, followed by the current code displayed on the token card. Then the access control module
must authenticate the token’s unique code in combination with the user’s secret PIN before access is granted.
Key Security Authentication Features of the Netopia R2020
As a remote device, the Netopia R2020 offers client/ calling side security authentication. This feature allows
the Netopia R2020 to call a server router and perform security card authentication. The router of the called
server must have access to a server with ACE software loaded on it.
To perform security card authentication, each user must have a security authentication token card and a PIN. In
addition, the user’s identifying information must reside on the remote ACE servers for authentication
negotiation to properly take place.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Security 14-37
The Netopia R2020 supports the following user configurations for security authentication:
■
■
■
■
Single user, calling a single destination (single session)
Single user, calling multiple destinations (two simultaneous and separate sessions)
Multiple users, calling a single destination (single session)
Multiple users, calling multiple destinations (two simultaneous and separate sessions
Security authentication components
To properly identify and authenticate an authorized user, the following are required:
■
■
■
A secret personal identification number (PIN) for each user.
A security authentication token card.
A Security Access Control Module (ACM).
Note: The Netopia R2020 currently only supports Ascend routers as ACMs.
■
An external Netopia R2020 calling into a designated server. For example, a telecommuter dialing into a
remote site from a Netopia R2020 interested in accessing personal email or file sharing services.
Note: The Netopia R2020 does not include a security authentication token card.
Configuring for security authentication
To configure the Netopia R2020 to support security authentication, select an authentication method and set up
a designated connection profile from the System Configuration screen or your first connection profile from Easy
Setup.
1. From the WAN Configuration menu, select Display/ Change Connection Profile. From the pop-up menu that
appears, select a Connection Profile. In the Connection Profile screen select Datalink Options.
WAN
Configuration
Main
Menu
Display/ Change
Connection Profile
Datalink Options
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
14-38 User’s Reference Guide
Datalink (PPP/MP) Options
Data Compression...
Ascend LZS
PAP-TOKEN
Send Authentication...
Send User Name:
Receive User Name:
Receive Password:
Channel Usage...
Dynamic
Auto
Bandwidth Allocation...
Maximum Packet Size:
1500
In this Screen you will configure the PPP/MP specific connection params.
2. Select Send Authentication and press Return. From the pop-up menu, highlight PAP-TOKEN or
CACHE-TOKEN. Your network administrator or the remote network administrator will tell you which method
to select.
If you select PAP-TOKEN, select Send User Name and enter a name for your Netopia R2020. You will not
need to enter a Send Password for PAP-TOKEN. Press Return.
If you select CACHE-TOKEN, select Send User Name and enter a name for your Netopia R2020. Then,
select Send Password and enter a secret name or number. Press Return.
3. Set up a connection profile to use with your authentication method. For information on setting up a
connection profile, see Chapter 6, “Easy Setup.”
Note: If you are setting up your first connection profile, you can also enter your authentication information in
the Easy Setup Connection Profile screen.
Connecting using security authentication
You can initiate a connection call using security authentication in either of two ways:
■
■
establish a dial-on-demand (DOD) connection, or
establish a manual connection.
Establishing a dial-on-demand (DOD) connection call
To establish a connection call using DOD, select Utilities & Diagnostics from the Main Menu and press Return.
Note: The Secure Authentication Monitor field will remain hidden if PAP-TOKEN or CACHE-TOKEN is not the
selected authentication method in the connection profile.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Security 14-39
Utilities & Diagnostics
Ping...
Trace Route...
Telnet...
Secure Authentication Monitor...
Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP)...
X-Modem File Transfer...
Revert to Factory Defaults...
Restart System...
1. Select Secure Authentication Monitor and press Return. The Secure Authentication Monitor screen
appears.
2. Wait for the call to initiate.
Secure Authentication Monitor
Current Connection Status
Profile Name---State---%Use---Remote Address---Est.---More Info---
Status --- Passcode Required
For Connection Profile: Easy Setup Profile
0-Challenge: Enter PASSCODE:
Passcode:
123412345678
3. From the fields that appear, select Enter PASSCODE and press Return. Enter your PIN and the code
displayed on your security authentication token card LED.
4. Once the call is established, and you enter your passcode as prompted, PPP negotiation will continue. If
the call is specified for PAP-TOKEN, and the session involves more than one connection, you will be
prompted for each connection being brought up.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
14-40 User’s Reference Guide
Note: When using CACHE-TOKEN, your passcode is valid for a time interval determined by the network
administrator. When this time interval expires, you must provide a new passcode for the call negotiation.
When using PAP-TOKEN, your passcode is valid for one call negotiation. For a second call negotiation, you must
enter the next passcode provided by the security authentication token card every 60 seconds.
You will be able to access information at the remote site that you are connecting to once authentication is
successfully completed.
Establishing a manual connection call
To establish a Manual connection call, select WAN Configuration from the Main Menu and press Return.
1. Select Establish WAN Connection from the WAN Configuration screen and press Return. The Establish
WAN Connection screen displays a table of all of the connection profiles you have defined. Highlight the
connection profile you wish to manually call. Press Return to initiate the call.
Call Status
Profile Name -- Easy Setup Profile
Connection State -- Dialing
Channel 1 State -- Acquiring
Channel 2 State --
0-Challenge: Enter PASSCODE:
Passcode:
123412345678
Hit ESCAPE/RETURN/ENTER to return to previous menu.
2. From the fields that appear, select Enter PASSCODE and press Return. Enter your PIN and the code
displayed on your security authentication token card LED screen.
3. Once the call is established, and you enter your passcode as prompted, PPP negotiation will continue. If
the call is specified for PAP-TOKEN, and the session involves more than one connection, you will be
prompted for each channel being brought up.
Note: When using CACHE-TOKEN, your passcode is valid for a time interval determined by the network
administrator. When this time interval expires, you must provide a new passcode for the call negotiation.
When using PAP-TOKEN for a dial-up call, your passcode is valid for one call negotiation. For a second call
negotiation, you must enter the next passcode provided by the security authentication token card every 60
seconds.
You will be able to access information at the remote site that you are connecting to once authentication is
successfully completed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Utilities and Diagnostics 15-1
Chapter 15
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
“Transferring configuration and firmware files with TFTP” on page 15-7
“Factory defaults” on page 15-7
“Restarting the system” on page 15-13
Note: These utilities and tests are accessible only through the console-based management screens. See
Chapter 5, “Console-based Management,” for information on accessing the console-based management
screens.
You access the Utilities & Diagnostics screens from the Main Menu.
Utilities & Diagnostics
Ping...
Trace Route...
Telnet...
Secure Authentication Monitor...
Disconnect Telnet Console Session...
Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP)...
Revert to Factory Defaults...
Restart System...
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
15-2 User’s Reference Guide
Ping
The Netopia R2020 includes a standard Ping test utility. A Ping test generates IP packets destined for a
particular (Ping-capable) IP host. Each time the target host receives a Ping packet, it returns a packet to the
original sender.
Ping allows you to see whether a particular IP destination is reachable from the Netopia R2020. You can also
ascertain the quality and reliability of the connection to the desired destination by studying the Ping test’s
statistics.
To use the Ping utility, select Ping in the Statistics, Utilities, Tests screen and press Return to go to the Ping
screen.
ICMP Ping
Name of Host to Ping:
Packets to Send:
Data Size:
5
56
1
Delay (seconds):
START PING
Status:
Packets Out:
Packets In:
Packets Lost:
Round Trip Time
(Min/Max/Avg):
0
0
0 (0%)
0.000 / 0.000 / 0.000 secs
Enter the IP Address/Domain Name of a host to ping.
Send ICMP Echo Requests to a network host.
To configure and initiate a Ping test, follow these steps:
1. Select Name of Host to Ping and enter the destination domain name or IP address.
2. Select Packets to Send to change the default setting. This is the total number of packets to be sent during
the Ping test. The default setting is adequate in most cases, but you may change it to any value from 1 to
4,294,967,295.
3. Select Data Size to change the default setting. This is the size, in bytes, of each Ping packet sent. The
default setting is adequate in most cases, but you may change it to any value from 0 (only header data) to
1664.
4. Select Delay (seconds) to change the default setting. The delay, in seconds, determines the time between
Ping packets sent. The default setting is adequate in most cases, but you may change it to any value from
0 to 4,294,967. A delay of 0 seconds forces packets to be sent immediately one after another.
5. Select START PING and press Return to begin the Ping test. While the test is running, the START PING
item becomes STOP PING. To manually stop the Ping test, select STOP PING and press Return or the
Escape key.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Utilities and Diagnostics 15-3
While the Ping test is running, and when it is over, a status field and a number of statistical items are active on
the screen. These are described below.
Status: The current status of the Ping test. This item can display the following messages:
Message
Description
Resolving host name
Can’t resolve host name
Pinging
Finding the IP address for the domain name-style address
IP address can’t be found for the domain name-style name
Ping test is in progress
Complete
Ping test was completed
Cancelled by user
Ping test was cancelled manually
Destination unreachable from
w.x.y.z
Ping test was able to reach the router with IP address
w.x.y.z, which reported that the test could not reach the
final destination
Couldn’t allocate packet buffer
Couldn’t open ICMP port
Couldn’t proceed with Ping test; try again or reset system
Couldn’t proceed with Ping test; try again or reset system
Packets Out: The number of packets sent by the Ping test.
Packets In: The number of return packets received from the target host. To be considered “on time,” return
packets are expected back before the next packet in the sequence of Ping packets is sent. A count of the
number of late packets appears in parentheses to the right of the Packets In count.
In the example below, a Netopia R2020 is sending Ping packets to another host, which responds with return
Ping packets. Note that the second return Ping packet is considered to be late because it is not received by the
Netopia R2020 before the third Ping packet is sent. The first and third return Ping packets are on time.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
15-4 User’s Reference Guide
time
send Ping packet 1
Netopia
receive Ping packet 1
host
host
send return Ping packet 1
receive return Ping packet 1
Netopia
Netopia
send Ping packet 2
receive Ping packet 2
send return Ping packet 2
host
host
send Ping packet 3
Netopia
Netopia
receive return Ping packet 2
receive Ping packet 3
host
host
send return Ping packet 3
receive return Ping packet 3
Netopia
Packets Lost: The number of packets unaccounted for, shown in total and as a percentage of total packets
sent. This statistic may be updated during the Ping test, and may not be accurate until after the test is over.
However, if an escalating one-to-one correspondence is seen between Packets Out and Packets Lost, and
Packets In is noticeably lagging behind Packets Out, the destination is probably unreachable. In this case, use
STOP PING.
Round Trip Time (Min/ Max/ Avg): Statistics showing the minimum, maximum, and average number of
seconds elapsing between the time each Ping packet was sent and the time its corresponding return Ping
packet was received.
The time-to-live (TTL) value for each Ping packet sent by the Netopia R2020 is 255, the maximum allowed. The
TTL value defines the number of IP routers that the packet can traverse. Ping packets that reach their TTL value
are dropped, and a “destination unreachable” notification is returned to the sender (see the table above). This
ensures that no infinite routing loops occur. The TTL value can be set and retrieved using the SNMP MIB-II ip
group’s ipDefaultTTL object.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Utilities and Diagnostics 15-5
Trace Route
You can count the number of routers between your Netopia Router and a given destination with the Trace Route
utility.
Select Trace Route in the Statistics & Diagnostics screen and press Return to go to the Trace Route screen.
Trace Route
Host Name or IP Address:
Maximum Hops:
Timeout (seconds):
30
5
Use Reverse DNS:
Yes
START TRACE ROUTE
Enter the IP Address/Domain Name of a host.
Trace route to a network host.
To trace a route, follow these steps:
1. Select Host Name or IP Address and enter the name or address of the destination you want to trace.
2. Select Maximum hops (1..64) to set the maximum number of routers to count between the Netopia Router
and the destination router, up to the maximum of 64. The default is 30 hops.
3. Select Timeout per probe (1..10 sec) to set when the trace will timeout for each hop, up to 10 seconds.
The default is 3 seconds.
4. Select Use Reverse DNS to learn the names of the routers between the Netopia Router and the destination
router. The default is Yes.
5. Select START TRACE ROUTE and press Return. The screen will be replaced by a scrolling screen, listing
the destination, the number of hops, the IP addresses of each hop, and the DNS names, if selected.
6. Cancel the trace by pressing Escape. Return to the Trace Route screen by pressing Escape twice.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
15-6 User’s Reference Guide
Telnet client
The Telnet client mode replaces the normal menu mode. Telnet sessions can be cascaded, that is, you can
initiate a Telnet client session when using a Telnet console session. To activate the Telnet client, select Telnet
from the Utilities & Diagnostics menu.
The Telnet client screen appears.
Telnet
Host Name or IP Address:
Control Character to Suspend:
Q
START A TELNET SESSION
Enter the IP Address/Domain Name of a host.
■
Enter the host name or the IP address in dotted decimal format of the machine you want to telnet into and
press Return.
■
■
■
■
Either accept the default control character “Q” used to suspend the Telnet session, or type a different one.
START A TELNET SESSION becomes highlighted.
Press Return and the Telnet session will be initiated.
To suspend the session, press Control-Q, or whatever other control character you specified.
Two new options will appear in the Telnet screen (not shown):
Resume Suspended Session – select this one if you want to go back to your Telnet session
Terminate Suspended Session – select this one if you want to end the session
Secure Authentication Monitor
Note: The Secure Authentication Monitor field will remain hidden if PAP-TOKEN or CACHE-TOKEN is not the
selected authentication method in the Connection Profile.
You use the Secure Authentication Monitor screen when placing one type of SecurID connection call. See
“Connecting using security authentication” on page 14-38 for details.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Utilities and Diagnostics 15-7
Disconnect Telnet Console Session
If you want to close your Telnet Console session, select Disconnect Telnet Console Session and press Return.
A dialog box appears asking you to cancel or continue your selection.
Utilities & Diagnostics
+------------------------------------------------------+
+------------------------------------------------------+
|
|
| Are you sure you want to close this Console Session? |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CANCEL
CONTINUE
+------------------------------------------------------+
X-Modem File Transfer...
Revert to Factory Defaults...
Restart System...
If you select Continue, you will immediately terminate your session.
Factory defaults
You can reset the Netopia R2020 to its factory default settings. Select the Revert to Factory Defaults item in
the Statistics & Diagnostics screen and press Return. Select CONTINUE in the dialog box and press Return.
The Netopia R2020 will reboot and its settings will return to the factory defaults, deleting your configurations.
In an emergency, you can also use the Reset Switch to return the router to its factory default settings. Call
Netopia Tech Support for instructions on using the Reset Switch.
Note: Reset to factory defaults with caution. You will need to reconfigure all your settings in the router.
Transferring configuration and firmware files with TFTP
Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) is a method of transferring data over an IP network. TFTP is a client-server
application, with the Router as the client. To use the Router as a TFTP client, a TFTP server must be available.
Netopia, Inc. has a public access TFTP server on the Internet where you can obtain the latest firmware versions.
To use TFTP, select Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) in the Statistics & Diagnostics screen and press
Return to go to the Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) screen.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
15-8 User’s Reference Guide
Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP)
TFTP Server Name:
Firmware File Name:
GET FIRMWARE FROM SERVER...
GET MODEM FIRMWARE FROM SERVER...
Config File Name:
GET CONFIG FROM SERVER...
SEND CONFIG TO SERVER...
TFTP Transfer State -- Idle
TFTP Current Transfer Bytes -- 0
The sections below describe how to update the Router’s firmware and how to download and upload
configuration files.
Updating firmware
Firmware updates may be available periodically from Netopia or from a site maintained by your organization’s
network administrator.
There are two types of firmware in the Netopia R2020 Dual Analog Router: router firmware and modem
firmware. The router firmware governs how the router communicates with your network and the modems; the
modem firmware governs how the modems communicate with the remote site. Modem firmware, for example to
support the ITU V.90 standard, is included on your Netopia CD for XMODEM transfer and later updates will be
available on the Netopia website. Router firmware updates are also periodically posted on the Netopia website.
To update either the Router’s or the internal modems’ firmware, follow these steps:
■
■
Select TFTP Server Name and enter the server name or IP address of the TFTP server you will use. The
server name or IP address is available from the site where the server is located.
Select Firmware File Name and enter the name of the file you will download. The name of the file is
available from the site where the server is located. You may need to enter a file path along with the file
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Utilities and Diagnostics 15-9
name (for example, bigroot/ config/ myfile).
■
Select Send Firmware to Netopia from TFTP Server and press Return. You will see the following dialog box:
+-----------------------------------------------------------+
+-----------------------------------------------------------+
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Are you sure you want to read the firmware now?
The device will reset when the transfer is complete. |
|
CANCEL
CONTINUE
|
|
+-----------------------------------------------------------+
■
Select CANCEL to exit without downloading the file, or select CONTINUE to download the file. The system
will reset at the end of the file transfer to put the new firmware into effect. While the system resets, the
LEDs will blink on and off.
Caution!
■
Be sure the firmware update you load onto your router is the correct version for your particular model.
Some models do not support all firmware versions. Loading an incorrect firmware version can permanently
damage the unit.
■
■
Do not manually power down or reset the Netopia R2020 while it is automatically resetting or it could be
damaged.
If you choose to download the firmware, the TFTP Transfer State item will change from Idle to Reading
Firmware. The TFTP Current Transfer Bytes item will reflect the number of bytes transferred.
Downloading configuration files
The Router can be configured by downloading a configuration file using TFTP. Once downloaded, the file
reconfigures all of the Router’s parameters as if someone had manually done so through the console port.
To download a configuration file, follow these steps:
■
■
Select TFTP Server Name and enter the server name or IP address of the TFTP server you will use. The
server name or IP address is available from the site where the server is located.
Select Config File Name and enter the name of the file you will download. The name of the file is available
from the site where the server is located. You may need to enter a file path along with the file name (for
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
15-10 User’s Reference Guide
example, bigroot/ config/ myfile).
■
Select Read Config Now and press Return. You will see the following dialog box:
+-----------------------------------------------------------+
+-----------------------------------------------------------+
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Are you sure you want to read the configuration now? |
The device will reset when the transfer is complete. |
|
CANCEL
CONTINUE
|
|
+-----------------------------------------------------------+
■
Select CANCEL to exit without downloading the file, or select CONTINUE to download the file. The system
will reset at the end of the file transfer to put the new configuration into effect.
■
If you choose to download the configuration file, the TFTP Transfer State item will change from Idle to
Uploading configuration files
Using TFTP, you can send a file containing a snapshot of the Router’s current configuration to a TFTP server. The
file can then be downloaded by a different Netopia R2020 unit to configure its parameters (see “Downloading
configuration files” on page 15-9). This is useful for configuring a number of Routers with identical parameters,
or just for creating configuration backup files.
Uploading a file can also be useful for troubleshooting purposes. The uploaded configuration file can be tested
on a different Netopia R2020 unit by Netopia or your network administrator.
To upload a configuration file, follow these steps:
1. Select TFTP Server Name and enter the server name or IP address of the TFTP server you will use. The
server name or IP address is available from the site where the server is located.
2. Select Config File Name and enter a name for the file you will upload. The file will appear with the name you
choose on the TFTP server. You may need to enter a file path along with the file name (for example,
Mypc/ Netopia/ myfile).
3. Select Write Config Now and press Return. Netopia will begin to transfer the file.
4. The TFTP Transfer State item will change from Idle to Writing Config. The TFTP Current Transfer Bytes
item will reflect the number of bytes transferred.
Transferring configuration and firmware files with XMODEM
You can transfer configuration and firmware files with XMODEM through the Netopia R2020’s console port. Be
sure your terminal emulation program supports XMODEM file transfers.
To go to the X-Modem File Transfer screen, select it in the Utilities & Diagnostics screen.
Note: The X-Modem File Transfer screen is only available if you are connected via the Console port.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Utilities and Diagnostics 15-11
X-Modem File Transfer
Send Firmware to Netopia...
Send Config to Netopia...
Receive Config from Netopia...
Send Firmware to Netopia Internal modem...
Modem Firmware Status:
IDLE
Updating firmware
Firmware updates may be available periodically from Netopia or from a site maintained by your organization’s
network administration.
The procedure below applies whether you are using the console or the built-in modems.
Follow these steps to update the Netopia R2020’s firmware:
1. Make sure you have the firmware file on disk and know the path to its location.
2. Select Send Firmware to Netopia (or Send Firmware to Netopia WAN module) and press Return. The
following dialog box appears:
+--------------------------------------------------------------------+
+--------------------------------------------------------------------+
| Are you sure you want to send a firmware file to your Netopia?
|
| If so, when you hit Return/Enter on the CONTINUE button, you will |
| have 10 seconds to begin the transfer from your terminal program. |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CANCEL
CONTINUE
+--------------------------------------------------------------------+
3. Select CANCEL to exit without downloading the file, or select CONTINUE to download the file.
If you choose CONTINUE, you will have ten seconds to use your terminal emulation software to initiate an
XMODEM transfer of the firmware file. If you fail to initiate the transfer in that time, the dialog box will
disappear and the terminal emulation software will inform you of the transfer’s failure. You can then try
again.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
15-12 User’s Reference Guide
The system will reset at the end of a successful file transfer to put the new firmware into effect. While the
system resets, the LEDs will blink on and off.
Caution!
Do not manually power down or reset the Netopia R2020 while it is automatically resetting or it could be
damaged.
Downloading configuration files
The Netopia R2020 can be configured by downloading a configuration file. The downloaded file reconfigures all
of the Router’s parameters.
Configuration files are available from a site maintained by your organization’s network administrator or from
your local site (see “Uploading configuration files,” below).
Follow these steps to download a configuration file:
1. Make sure you have the configuration file on disk and know the path to its location.
2. Select Send Config to Netopia and press Return. The following dialog box appears:
+--------------------------------------------------------------------+
+--------------------------------------------------------------------+
|
|
|
| Do you want to send a saved configuration to your Netopia?
| If so, when you hit Return/Enter on the CONTINUE button, you will |
| have 10 seconds to begin the transfer from your terminal program. |
|
|
|
|
|
|
CANCEL
CONTINUE
+--------------------------------------------------------------------+
3. Select CANCEL to exit without downloading the file, or select CONTINUE to download the file.
If you choose CONTINUE, you will have ten seconds to use your terminal emulation software to initiate an
XMODEM transfer of the configuration file. If you fail to initiate the transfer in that time, the dialog box will
disappear and the terminal emulation software will inform you of the transfer’s failure. You can then try
again.
The system will reset at the end of a successful file transfer to put the new configuration into effect.
Uploading configuration files
A file containing a snapshot of the Netopia R2020’s current configuration can be uploaded from the Router to
disk. The file can then be downloaded by a different Netopia R2020 to configure its parameters (see
“Downloading configuration files” on page 15-12). This is useful for configuring a number of Routers with
identical parameters, or for creating configuration backup files.
Uploading a file can also be useful for troubleshooting purposes. The uploaded configuration file can be tested
on a different Netopia R2020 by Netopia or your network administrator.
The procedure below applies whether you are using the console or the built-in modems.
To upload a configuration file:
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Utilities and Diagnostics 15-13
1. Decide on a name for the file and a path for saving it.
2. Select Receive Config from Netopia and press Return. The following dialog box appears:
+--------------------------------------------------------------------+
|
|
| Are you sure you want to save your current Netopia configuration? |
| If so, when you hit Return/Enter on the CONTINUE button, you will |
| have 10 seconds to begin the transfer from your terminal program. |
|
|
|
|
|
|
CANCEL
CONTINUE
+--------------------------------------------------------------------+
3. Select CANCEL to exit without uploading the file, or select CONTINUE to upload the file.
If you choose CONTINUE, you will have ten seconds to use your terminal emulation software to initiate an
XMODEM transfer of the configuration file. If you fail to initiate the transfer in that time, the dialog box will
disappear and the terminal emulation software will inform you of the transfer’s failure. You can then try
again.
Restarting the system
You can restart the system by selecting the Restart System item in the Utilities & Diagnostics screen.
You must restart the system whenever you reconfigure the Netopia R2020 and want the new parameter values
to take effect. Under certain circumstances, restarting the system may also clear up system or network
malfunctions. Some configuration processes automatically restart the system to apply the changes you have
made.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
15-14 User’s Reference Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
User’s Reference Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting A-1
Appendix A
Troubleshooting
This appendix is intended to help you troubleshoot problems you may encounter while setting up and using the
Netopia R2020. It also includes information on how to contact Netopia Technical Support.
Important information on these problems may be found in the event histories kept by the Netopia R2020.
This section covers the following topics:
■
■
■
“Configuration problems” on page A-1
“Power outages” on page A-3
“Technical support” on page A-3
Configuration problems
If you encounter problems during your initial configuration process, review the following suggestions before
calling for technical support. There are four zones to consider when troubleshooting initial configuration:
1. the computer’s connection to the router;
2. the router’s connection to the telecommunication line(s);
3. the telecommunication line’s connection to your ISP, and
4. the ISP’s connection to the Internet.
If the connection from the computer to the router was not successful, check the following:
■
■
■
■
The Netopia R2020 is turned on.
An Ethernet cable connects your PC’s Ethernet card or built-in Ethernet port to the Netopia R2020.
The SmartStart application is running and able to access the Netopia R2020.
Telnet is available on your PC or Macintosh. (On a PC, it must be specified in your system path. You can
usually find the application as “c:\ windowselnet.exe”.)
■
■
■
Your PC or Macintosh is properly configured for TCP/ IP.
Your PC or Macintosh has an IP address.
Your PC or Macintosh has a subnet mask that matches or is compatible with the Netopia R2020’s subnet
mask.
■
If you are entering a new IP address via SmartStart be sure the correct serial number was entered.
Note: If you are attempting to modify the IP address or subnet mask from a previous, successful configuration
attempt, you will need to clear the IP address or reset your Netopia R2020 to the factory default before
reinitiating the configuration process. For further information on resetting your Netopia R2020 to factory
default, see “Factory defaults” on page 15-7.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A-2 User’s Reference Guide
SmartStart Troubleshooting
The Status field of the SmartStart application will display information and indicate problems as they are
detected.
Console connection problems
Can’t see the configuration screens (nothing appears)
■
Check the cable connection from the Netopia R2020’s console port to the computer being used as a
console.
■
Check that the terminal emulation software is accessing the correct port on the computer that’s being
used as a console.
■
■
Try pressing Ctrl-L or Return or the ▲ up or down ▼ key several times to refresh the terminal screen.
Check that flow control on serial connections is turned off.
Junk characters appear on the screen
■
■
Check that the terminal emulation software is configured correctly.
Check the baud rate. The default values are 9600, N, 8, and 1.
Characters are missing from some of the configuration screens
■
Try changing the Netopia R2020’s default speed of 9600 bps and setting your terminal emulation software
to match the new speed.
Network problems
Problems communicating with remote IP hosts
■
■
Verify the accuracy of the default gateway’s IP address (entered in the IP Setup or Easy Setup screen).
Use the Netopia R2020’s ping utility, in the Statistics, Tests, Utilities screen, and try to ping local and
remote hosts. See “Ping” on page 15-2 for instructions on how to use the ping utility. If you can
successfully ping hosts using their IP addresses but not their domain names (198.34.7.1 but not
garcia.netopia.com, for example), verify that the DNS server’s IP address is correct and that it is reachable
from the Netopia R2020 (use ping).
■
If you are using filters, check that your filter sets are not blocking the type of connections you are trying to
make.
Local routing problems
■
■
Observe the Ethernet LEDs to see if data traffic flow appears to be normal.
Check the WAN Statistics and LAN Statistics screens to see more specific information on data traffic flow
and address serving.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting A-3
Power outages
If you suspect that power was restored after a power outage, and the Netopia R2020 is connected to a remote
site, you may need to switch the Netopia R2020 off and then back on again. After temporary power outages, a
connection that still seems to be up may actually be disconnected. Rebooting the Router should reestablish the
connection.
Technical support
Netopia, Inc. is committed to providing its customers with reliable products and documentation, backed by
excellent technical support.
Before contacting Netopia
Look in this guide for a solution to your problem. You may find a solution in this troubleshooting appendix or in
other sections. Check the index for a reference to the topic of concern. If you cannot find a solution, complete
the environment profile below before contacting technical support.
Environment profile
■
Locate the Netopia R2020’s model number, product serial number, and firmware version. The serial
number is on the bottom side of the Router, along with the model number. The firmware version appears in
the Netopia R2020’s Main Menu screen.
Model number:
Serial number:
Firmware version:
■
What kind of local network(s) do you have, with how many devices?
Ethernet
LocalTalk
EtherTalk
TCP/ IP
IPX
Other:
How to reach us
We can help you with your problem more effectively if you have completed the environment profile in the
previous section. If you contact us by telephone, please be ready to supply Netopia Technical Support with the
information you used to configure the Netopia R2020. Also, please be at the site of the problem and prepared
to reproduce it and to try some troubleshooting steps.
When you are prepared, contact Netopia Customer Service by e-mail, telephone, fax, or post:
Internet: techsports@netopia.com (for technical support)
info@netopia.com (for general information)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A-4 User’s Reference Guide
Phone: 1 800-782-6449
Fax: 1 510-814-5023
Netopia, Inc.
Customer Service
2470 Mariner Square Loop
Alameda, California 94501
USA
Netopia Bulletin Board Service: 1 510-865-1321
Online product information
Product information can be found in the following:
Netopia World Wide Web server via http:/ / www.netopia.com
Internet via anonymous FTP to ftp.netopia.com/ pub
FAX-Back
This service provides technical notes which answer the most commonly asked questions, and offer solutions
for many common problems encountered with Netopia products.
FAX-Back: +1 510-814-5040
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Up Internet Services B-1
Appendix B
Setting Up Internet Services
This section covers the following topics:
■
■
■
“Finding an Internet service provider” on page B-1
“Deciding on an ISP account” on page B-2
“Obtaining information from the ISP” on page B-3
Note: Some companies act as their own ISP. For example, some organizations have branch offices that can
use the Netopia R2020 to access the Internet via the main office in a point-to-point scenario. If you install the
Netopia R2020 in this type of environment, refer to the following sections for specific information you must
receive from the network administrator to configure the Netopia R2020 properly.
Finding an Internet service provider
During the setup session, the SmartStart setup application will provide you with a list of service providers who
support the Netopia R2020 with Dual Analog. You can register with one of these ISPs as part of setting up your
router.
If you have purchased your Netopia R2020 through a Netopia ISP partner, you may have received a customized
configuration file from the ISP that will allow you to make an immediate connection when you run SmartStart.
Internet access is available from other Internet service providers. Typically, there are several ISPs in each area.
To locate ISPs in your area, consult your telephone book, local computer magazines, the business section of a
local newspaper, or the following URL on the Internet: ‘http:/ / thelist.internet.com’. Also see Netopia’s home
page at ‘http:/ / www.netopia.com’ for a list of ISPs with special programs and promotions for Netopia
customers.
If your area has more than one ISP, the following considerations may help you decide which ISP is best suited
for your requirements.
Use an ISP that provides Internet access through a V.90 or K56flex line and supports dual analog LAN
connections using Multilink PPP. If you would like to use an ISP that you already have a relationship with but is
not familiar with the Netopia R2020 Dual Analog Router or using Multilink PPP with analog modems, call us at
1-800-NETOPIA. Our representative can call your ISP and introduce them to the product. As necessary, we can
provide them with the technical background they need to support the product.
See “About 56K Line Access” on page G-1 for more information on 56K modem connections.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B-2 User’s Reference Guide
Unique requirements
Make sure the ISP can meet any unique requirements you may have. Potential requirements include:
■
■
■
■
■
■
Dynamic or static IP addressing
Class C IP address
Custom domain name
Multiple email addresses
Web site hosting
Call back for web site hosting at your site
Pricing and support
Compare pricing, service, and technical support service among various ISPs.
ISP’s Point of presence
Check with your ISP for the location of their nearest point of presence (POP) in reference to your site. In some
instances, the ISP that you choose may not offer a POP in your local area. If that is the case, you may incur
additional fees for long-distance calls.
Endorsements
Consider recommendations from colleagues and reviews in publications. Netopia lists Netopia Certified ISPs on
our web site at ‘http:/ / www.netopia.com’.
Deciding on an ISP account
Your ISP may offer various Internet access account plans. Typically, these plans vary by usage charges and the
number of host IP addresses supplied. Evaluate your networking needs and discuss them with your ISP before
deciding on a plan for your network.
The following checklist is a guide to ensure you obtain the Internet service you require.
Setting up a Netopia R2020 account
Check whether your ISP has the Netopia R2020 on a list of supported products that have been tested with a
particular configuration. If the ISP does not have the Netopia R2020 on such a list, describe the Netopia R2020
in as much detail as needed, so your ISP account can be optimized. As appropriate, you may refer your ISP to
Netopia’s web site for more information.
Obtaining an IP host address
Typically, each computer on the network that requires Internet access requires its own unique IP address. If
some or all network computers require simultaneous Internet access, obtain a block of IP host addresses large
enough for each computer to have its own address, plus one for the Netopia R2020.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Up Internet Services B-3
Consider expected growth in your network when deciding on the number of addresses to obtain. Alternatively,
you may use the Network Address Translation feature of SmartIP.
SmartIP™
Network Address Translation provides Internet access to the network connected to the Netopia R2020 using
only a single IP address. These routers translate between the internal or local area network (LAN) addresses
and a single external IP address and route accordingly.
For more information on Network Address Translation, see Chapter 10, “Multiple Network Address Translation
and IP Setup.”
Obtaining information from the ISP
After your account is set up, the ISP should send you the IP parameter information that will help you to configure
the Netopia R2020.
Local LAN IP address information to obtain (NAT enabled)
If you are using SmartIP (NAT), you should obtain the following:
■
If you are dialing out to a remote site using Network Address Translation on your router, your provider will
not define the IP address information on your local LAN. You can define this information based on
parameters defined by another connection profile such as that to a corporate network, or an IP
configuration that may already be in place for the existing network. Alternatively, you can use the default IP
address range used by the router.
■
■
Primary and Secondary Domain Name Server (DNS) IP Addresses
Domain Name (usually the same as the ISP’s domain name unless you have registered for your own
individual domain name)
Remote WAN IP address information to obtain
■
■
■
Telephone number of the ISP’s local or nearby dial-up POP (point-of-presence).
PPP authentication type for router at the ISP, such as PAP.
Send and receive User Login name and Send and receive User Password if PAP or CHAP security
authentication is used
Local LAN IP address information to obtain (NAT-disabled)
If you are not using SmartIP (NAT), you should obtain:
■
The number of Ethernet IP host addresses available with your account and the first usable IP host address
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B-4 User’s Reference Guide
in the address block
■
■
■
■
■
The Ethernet IP address for your Netopia R2020
The Ethernet IP subnet mask address for your Netopia R2020
The Default Gateway IP Address (same as Remote IP Address in most cases)
Primary and Secondary Domain Name Server IP Addresses
Domain Name (usually the same as the ISP’s domain name unless you have registered for your own
individual domain name)
Note: If you are not using Network Address Translation, you will need to obtain all of the Local LAN IP address
information from your ISP.
Remote WAN IP address information to obtain
■
■
■
■
■
The telephone number of the ISP’s local or nearby dial-up POP (point-of-presence).
Remote IP address of router at ISP or other remote site
Remote IP subnet mask address of router at ISP or other remote site
PPP authentication type for router at the ISP, such as PAP.
Send User Login name and Send User Password if PAP or CHAP security authentication is used
Note: If you are not using Network Address Translation, you will need to obtain all of the Remote WAN IP
address information from your ISP.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding IP Addressing C-1
Appendix C
Understanding IP Addressing
This appendix is a brief general introduction to IP addressing. A basic understanding of IP will help you in
configuring the Netopia R2020 and using some of its powerful features, such as static routes and packet
filtering.
In packets, a header is part of the envelope information that surrounds the actual data being transmitted. In
■
■
■
■
■
“About IP addressing” on page C-1
“Distributing IP addresses” on page C-5
“Nested IP subnets” on page C-11
“Broadcasts” on page C-13
What is IP?
All networks use protocols to establish common standards for communication. One widely used network
protocol is the Internet Protocol, also known as IP. Like many other protocols, IP uses packets, or formatted
chunks of data, to communicate.
Note: This guide uses the term “IP” in a very general and inclusive way, to identify all of the following:
■
Networks that use the Internet Protocol, along with accompanying protocols such as TCP, UDP, and
ICMP
■
■
Packets that include an IP header within their structure
Devices that send IP packets
About IP addressing
Every networking protocol uses some form of addressing in order to ensure that packets are delivered correctly.
In IP, individual network devices that are initial sources and final destinations of packets are usually called
hosts, instead of nodes, but the two terms are interchangeable. Each host on an IP network must have a
unique IP address. An IP address, also called an Internet address, is a 32-bit number usually expressed as four
decimal numbers separated by periods. Each decimal number in an IP address represents a 1-byte (8-bit) binary
number. Thus, values for each of the four numbers range from 00000000 to 11111111 in binary notation, or
from 0 to 255 in decimal notation. The expression 192.168.1.1 is a typical example of an IP address.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C-2 User’s Reference Guide
IP addresses indicate both the identity of the network and the identity of the individual host on the network. The
number of bits used for the network number and the number of bits used for the host number can vary, as long
as certain rules are followed. The local network manager assigns IP host numbers to individual machines.
IP addresses are maintained and assigned by the InterNIC, a quasi-governmental organization now increasingly
under the auspices of private industry.
Note: It’s very common for an organization to obtain an IP address from a third party, usually an Internet
service provider (ISP). ISPs usually issue an IP address when they are contracted to provide Internet access
services.
The InterNIC (the NIC stands for Network Information Center) divides IP addresses into several classes.
Classes A, B, and C are assigned to organizations who request addresses. In Class A networks, the first byte of
an IP address is reserved for the network portion of the address. Class B networks reserve the first two bytes
of an IP address for the network address. Class C networks reserve the first three bytes of an IP address for the
network address. In all cases, a network manager can decide to use subnetting to assign even more bits to the
network portion of the IP address, but never less than the class requires. The following section gives more
information on subnetting.
Class A networks have a small number of possible network numbers, but a large number of possible host
numbers. Conversely, Class C networks have a small number of possible host numbers, but a large number of
possible network numbers. Thus, the InterNIC assigns Class A addresses to large organizations that have very
large numbers of IP hosts, while smaller organizations, with fewer hosts, get Class B or Class C addresses. You
can tell the various classes apart by the value of the first (or high-order) byte. Class A networks use values from
1 to 127, Class B networks use values from 128 to 191, and Class C networks use values from 192 to 223.
The following table summarizes some of the differences between Class A, B, and C networks.
Number of
networks
possible per
class
Number of
hosts
possible per
network
Format of address
(without subnetting)
Class
First byte
Example
A
B
C
1-127
128-191
192-223
127
16,384
16,777,214
65,534
254
net.host.host.host
net.net.host.host
net.net.net.host
97.3.14.250
140.100.10.11
197.204.13.7
2,097,152
Subnets and subnet masks
Often an entire organization is assigned only one IP network number. If the organization has several IP networks
connected together with IP routers, the network manager can use subnetting to distinguish between these
networks, even though they all use the same network number. Each physical network becomes a subnet with a
unique subnet number.
Subnet numbers appear within IP addresses, along with network numbers and host numbers. Since an IP
address is always 32 bits long, using subnet numbers means either the network number or the host numbers
must use fewer bits, in order to leave room for the subnet numbers. Since the InterNIC assigns the network
number proper, it should not change, so the subnet numbers must be created out of bits that would otherwise
be part of the host numbers.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding IP Addressing C-3
Subnet masks
To create subnets, the network manager must define a subnet mask, a 32-bit number that indicates which bits
in an IP address are used for network and subnetwork addresses, and which are used for host addresses. One
subnet mask should apply to all IP networks that are physically connected together and share a single assigned
network number. Subnet masks are often written in decimal notation, like IP addresses, but they are most
easily understood in binary notation. When a subnet mask is written in binary notation, each numeral 1
indicates that the corresponding bit in the IP address is part of the network or subnet address. Each 0
indicates that the corresponding bit is part of the host address. The following table shows the proper subnet
masks to use for each class of network, when no subnets are required.
Class
Subnet mask for a network with no subnets
Binary: 11111111.00000000.00000000.00000000
Decimal: 255.0.0.0
A
Binary: 11111111.11111111.00000000.00000000
Decimal: 255.255.0.0
B
C
Binary: 11111111.11111111.11111111.00000000
Decimal: 255.255.255.0
To know whether subnets are being used or not, you must know what subnet mask is being used—you cannot
determine this information simply from an IP address. Subnet mask information is configured as part of the
process of setting up IP routers and gateways such as the Netopia R2020.
Note: If you receive a routed account from an ISP, there must be a mask associated with your network IP
address. By using the IP address with the mask you can discover exactly how many IP host addresses you
actually have.
To configure subnets properly, you must also be able to convert between binary notation and decimal notation.
Example: Using subnets on a Class C IP internet
When setting up IP routing with a Class A Address, or even multiple Class C Addresses, subnetting is fairly
straightforward. Subnetting a single Class C address between two networks, however, is more complex. This
section describes the general procedures for subnetting a single Class C network between two Netopia routers
so that each can have Internet access.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C-4 User’s Reference Guide
Network configuration
Below is a diagram of a simple network configuration. The ISP is providing a Class C address to the customer
site, and both networks A and B want to gain Internet access through this address. Netopia R2020 B connects
to Netopia R2020 A and is provided Internet access through Routers A and B.
Customer Site A
PC 1:
IP Address: 192.168.1.3
Subnet Mask:
255.255.255.128
Gateway: 192.168.1.1
Router B:
Netopia R2020 A:
IP Address: 192.168.1.1
IP Address: 192.168.1.2
Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.128
Subnet Mask:
Remote IP: 10.0.0.1
LAN
255.255.255.128
Remote Sub: 255.255.255.0
Gateway: 10.0.0.1
ISP Network
Router A:
Remote IP: 192.168.1.129
Remote Sub:
255.255.255.128
Static Route:
192.168.1.128 [network]
255.255.255.128 [mask]
192.168.1.2 [via router]
IP Address: 10.0.0.1
Gateway: 192.168.1.1
Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0
Usable IP Addresses avail-
able to Customer Site A:
192.168.1.1 -->
Usable IP Addresses available to
Customer Site A: 192.168.1.1 -->
192.168.1.126
192.168.1.126
Customer Site B
Netopia R2020 B:
PC 2:
IP Address: 192.168.1.129
IP Address:
Internet
Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.128
Remote IP: 192.168.1.2
192.168.1.130
Subnet Mask:
255.255.255.128
Remote Sub: 255.255.255.128
Gateway: 192.168.1.2
Gateway:
192.168.1.129
Usable IP Addresses available to
Customer Site B: 192.168.1.129
--> 192.168.1.254
LAN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding IP Addressing C-5
Background
The IP Addresses and routing configurations for the devices shown in the diagram are outlined below. In
addition, each individual field and its meaning are described.
The “IP Address” and “Subnet Mask” fields define the IP Address and Subnet Mask of the device's Ethernet
connection to the network while the “Remote IP” and “Remote Sub” fields describe the IP Address and Subnet
mask of the remote router. This information is entered in the Connection Profile of the Netopia R2020.
The “Gateway” field describes the router or workstation's default gateway or, where they will send their packets
if the appropriate route is not known. The “Static Route” field, which is only shown on Router B, tells Router B
what path to take to get to the network defined by Netopia R2020 B. Finally, the “Usable IP Address” field
shows the range of IP Addresses available to the hosts of that network.
Note that the IP Addresses given in this section are for example purposes only. Do not use these addresses
when configuring your network.
With this configuration, both Customer Site A and B can gain Internet access through Routers A and B, with no
reconfiguration of the ISP's equipment. The most important item in this configuration is the Static Route
defined on Router B. This tells Router B what path to take to get to the network defined by Netopia R2020 B.
Without this information, Customer Site B will be able to access Customer Site A, but not the Internet.
If it is not possible to define a Static Route on Router B, RIP could be enabled to serve the same purpose. To
use RIP instead of a Static Route, enable Transmit RIP on Netopia R2020 A and Transmit and Receive RIP on
Router B. This will allow the route from Customer Site B to propagate on Router B and Customer Site A.
Example: Working with a Class C subnet
Suppose that your organization has a site with only 10 hosts, and no plans to add any new hosts. You don’t
need a full Class C address for this site. Many ISPs offer Internet access with only a portion of a full Internet
address.
For example, you may obtain the Class C address 199.14.17.48, with the mask 255.255.255.240. From the
previous example, you can see that this gives you 14 host addresses to distribute to the hosts at your site. In
effect, your existing network of 10 hosts is a subnet of the ISP’s network. Since the Class C address has
already been reduced to subnets, you cannot further subnet your network without the risk of creating network
routing problems (since you must use the mask issued by the ISP). This, however, is not a problematic
limitation for your small network.
The advantages to this situation is the greater ease and lower cost of obtaining a subnet from an ISP rather
than a full Class C address.
Distributing IP addresses
To set up a connection to the Internet, you may have obtained a block of IP host addresses from an Internet
service provider. When configuring the Netopia R2020, you gave one of those addresses to its Ethernet port,
leaving a number of addresses to distribute to computers on your network.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C-6 User’s Reference Guide
There are two schemes for distributing the remaining IP addresses:
■
■
Manually give each computer an address
Let the Netopia R2020 automatically distribute the addresses
These two methods are not mutually exclusive; you can manually issue some of the addresses while the rest
are distributed by the Netopia R2020. Using the Router in this way allows it to function as an address server.
One reason to use the Netopia R2020 as an address server is that it takes less time than manually distributing
the addresses. This is particularly true if you have many addresses to distribute. You only need to enter
information once, rather than having to repeatedly enter it on each host separately. This also reduces the
potential for misconfiguring hosts.
Another reason to use the Netopia R2020 as an address server is that it will only distribute addresses to hosts
that need to use them.
All Netopia R2020s come with an integrated Dynamic Host Control Protocol (DHCP) server. Some routers also
come with a Macintosh Internet Protocol (MacIP) server. These servers provide a means of distributing IP
addresses to either a Mac or PC workstation as needed.
When setting up the DHCP or MacIP servers in the Netopia R2020, it is necessary to understand how
workstations lease, renew, and release their IP addresses. This information will be helpful in determining
dynamic address allocation for a network.
The term “lease” describes the action of a workstation requesting and using an IP address. The address is
dynamic and can be returned to the address pool at a later time.
The term “renew” refers to what the workstations do to keep their leased IP address. At certain intervals, the
workstation talks to the DHCP or MacIP server and renews the lease on that IP address. This renewal allows
the workstation to keep and use the assigned IP address until the next renewal period.
The term “release” refers to a situation where the workstation is no longer using its assigned IP address or has
been shut down. IP addresses can be manually released as well. The IP address goes back into the DHCP or
MacIP address pool to be reassigned to another workstation as needed.
Technical note on subnet masking
Note: The IP address supplied by the Netopia R2020 will be a unique number. You may wish to replace this
number with a number that your ISP supplies if you are configuring the router for a static IP address. The
automatic IP mask supplied by SmartStart is a Class C address. However, the Netopia R2020 and all devices
on the same local network must have the same subnet mask. If you require a different class address, you may
edit the IP Mask field to enter the correct address. Refer to the table below.
Number of Devices (other than
Netopia R2020) on Local Network
Largest Possible Ethernet Subnet
Mask
1
255.255.255.252
255.255.255.248
255.255.255.240
255.255.255.224
2-5
6-13
14-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding IP Addressing C-7
Number of Devices (other than
Netopia R2020) on Local Network
Largest Possible Ethernet Subnet
Mask
30-61
62-125
125-259
255.255.255.192
255.255.255.128
255.255.255.0
Configuration
This section describes the specific IP address lease, renew, and release mechanisms for both the Mac and PC,
with either DHCP or MacIP address serving.
DHCP Address Serving
Windows 95 Workstation:
■
■
■
The Win95 workstation requests and renews its lease every half hour.
The Win95 workstation does NOT relinquish its DHCP address lease when the machine is shut down.
The lease can be manually expired using the WINIPCFG program from the Win95 machine, which is a
command line program executable from the DOS prompt or from the START:RUN menu.
Windows 3.1 Workstation (MSTCP Version 3.11a):
■
■
The Win3.1 workstation requests and renews its lease every half hour.
The Win3.1 workstation does NOT relinquish its DHCP address lease when the user exits Windows and
goes to DOS.
■
The lease can be manually expired by typing IPCONFIG / RELEASE from a DOS window within Windows or
from the DOS prompt.</ UL>
Macintosh Workstation (Open Transport Version 1.1 or later):
■
■
The Mac workstation requests and renews its lease every half hour.
The Mac workstation will relinquish its address upon shutdown in all but one case. If the TCP/ IP control
panel is set to initialize at start-up, and no IP services are used or the TCP/ IP control panel is not opened,
the DHCP address will NOT be relinquished upon shutdown. However, if the TCP/ IP control panel is
opened, or if an IP application is used, the Mac WILL relinquish the lease upon shutdown.
■
If the TCP/ IP control panel is set to acquire an address only when needed (therefore a TCP/ IP application
must have been launched to obtain a lease) the Mac WILL relinquish its lease upon shutdown every time.
Netopia R2020 DHCP Server Characteristics
■
■
■
The Netopia R2020 ignores any lease-time associated with a DHCP request and automatically issues the
DHCP address lease for one hour.
The number of devices a Netopia R2020 can serve DHCP to is 512. This is imposed by global limits on the
size of the address serving database, which is shared by all address serving functions active in the router.
The Netopia R2020 does release the DHCP address back to the available DHCP address pool precisely
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C-8 User’s Reference Guide
one hour after the last heard lease request as some other DHCP implementations may hold on to the lease
for an additional time after the lease expired, to act as a buffer for variances in clocks between the client
and server.
MacIP Serving
Macintosh Workstation (MacTCP or Open Transport):
Once the Mac workstation requests and receives a valid address, the Netopia R2020 will actively check for the
workstation’s existence once every minute.
■
For a DYNAMIC address, the Netopia R2020 will release the address back to the address pool after it has
lost contact with the Mac workstation for over 2 minutes.
■
For a STATIC address, the Netopia R2020 will release the address back to the address pool after it has
lost contact with the Mac workstation for over 20 minutes.
Netopia R2020 MacIP Server Characteristics
The Mac workstation uses ATP to both request and receive an address from the Netopia R2020's MacIP server.
Once acquired, NBP confirm packets will be sent out every minute from the Netopia R2020 to the Mac
workstation.
Manually distributing IP addresses
If you choose to manually distribute IP addresses, you must enter each computer’s address into its TCP/ IP
stack software. Once you manually issue an address to a computer, it possesses that address until you
manually remove it. That’s why manually distributed addresses are sometimes called static addresses.
Static addresses are useful in cases when you want to make sure that a host on your network cannot have its
address taken away by the address server. A network administrator’s computer, a computer dedicated to
communicating with the Internet, and routers are appropriate candidates for a static address.
Using address serving
The Netopia R2020 provides three ways to serve IP addresses to computers on a network. The first, Dynamic
Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP), is supported by PCs with Microsoft Windows and a TCP/ IP stack.
Macintosh computers using Open Transport and computers using the UNIX operating system may also be able
to use DHCP. The second way, MacIP, is for Macintosh computers. The third way, called Serve Dynamic WAN
Clients (IPCP), is used to fulfill WAN client requirements
The Netopia R2020 can use both DHCP and MacIP. Whether you use one or both will depend on your particular
networking environment. If that environment includes both PCs and Macintosh computers that do not use Open
Transport, you will need to use both DHCP and MacIP to distribute IP addresses to all of your computers.
Serve dynamic WAN clients
The third method, used to fulfill WAN client requirements, is called Serve Dynamic WAN Clients. This is a subset
of PPP. Originally, this would apply only to switched WAN interface routers, and not to leased line routers.
However, a new feature can give you Asynchronous PPP dial-in support on the Auxiliary port on any router
including leased line Netopia routers.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding IP Addressing C-9
In any situation where a device is dialing into a Netopia router, the router may need to be configured to serve IP
via the WAN interface. This is only a requirement if the calling device has not been configured locally to know
what its address(es) are. So when a client, dialing into a Netopia router's WAN interface, is expecting
addresses to be served by the answering router, you must set the answering Netopia router to serve IP via its
WAN interface.
You can do this in either of two ways:
■
use the Serve Dynamic WAN Clients option in the Address Serving Setup screen.
Serve Dynamic WAN Clients enabled only allows you to specify a pool of addresses from which the dial-in
client may get an IP address. It does not allow static addressing.
If you want to serve addresses dynamically, use Serve Dynamic WAN Clients.
■
define the address that you want to serve in the Connection Profile's IP Setup screen.
This method requires a static value to be used. Thus any user dialing in can obtain the same IP address for
every connection to the profile.
If you want to serve addresses statically, define the address in the Connection Profile.
Notes:
■
■
The addresses that are to be served cannot be used elsewhere. For example you wouldn't want to
define a static address in a Connection Profile to be served via the WAN that is already defined in the
DHCP pool of addresses.
In order to work correctly, you must define a “host” or “node” address in the IP Profile Parameters of
the Connection Profile.
This is accomplished by specifying the IP address that is to be statically served via the WAN, and then
by entering a mask value of 255.255.255.255.
Tips and rules for distributing IP addresses
■
Before you allocate IP addresses using DHCP and MacIP, consider whether you need to set aside any static
addresses.
■
Note any planned and currently used static addresses before you use DHCP and MacIP.
■
Avoid fragmenting your block of IP addresses. For example, try to use a continuous range for the static
addresses you choose.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C-10 User’s Reference Guide
Distributed to the
1
Netopia R2020
1
(Ethernet IP address)
2
3
4
2
Manually distributed
(static)
5
3
6
4
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Pool of Addresses Distributed
by MacIP and DHCP
Block of IP host addresses
(derived from network IP
address + mask issued by ISP)
The figure above shows an example of a block of IP addresses being distributed correctly.
The example follows these rules:
■
■
■
An IP address must not be used as a static address if it is also in a range of addresses being distributed
by DHCP or MacIP.
A single IP address range is used by all the address-served clients. These include DHCP, BOOTP, MacIP,
and WAN clients, even though BOOTP and static MacIP clients might not be considered served.
The address range specified for address-served clients cannot wrap around from the end of the total
available range back to the beginning. See below for a further explanation and an example.
■
The network address issued by an ISP cannot be used as a host address.
A DHCP example
Suppose, for example, that your ISP gave your network the IP address 199.1.1.32, and a 4-bit subnet mask.
Address 199.1.1.32 is reserved as the network address. Address 199.1.1.47 is reserved as the broadcast
address. This leaves 14 addresses to allocate, from 199.1.1.33 through 199.1.1.46. If you want to allocate a
sub-block of 10 addresses using DHCP, enter “10” in the DHCP Setup screen’s Number of Addresses to
Allocate item. Then, in the same screen’s First Address item, enter the first address in the sub-block to
allocate such that all 10 addresses are within your original block. You could enter 199.1.1.33, or 199.1.1.37,
or any address between them. Note that if you entered 199.1.1.42 as the first address, network routing errors
would probably result because you would be using a range with addresses that do not belong to your network
(199.1.1.49, 199.1.1.50, and 199.1.1.51).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding IP Addressing C-11
Nested IP subnets
Under certain situations, you may wish to create remote subnets from the limited number of IP addresses
issued by your ISP or other authority. You can do this using connection profiles. These subnets can be nested
within the range of IP addresses available to your network.
For example, suppose that you obtain the Class C network address a.b.c.0 to be distributed among three
networks. This network address can be used on your main network while portions of it can be subnetted to the
two remaining networks.
Note: The IP address a.b.c.0 has letters in place of the first three numbers to generalize it for this example.
The figure at left shows a possible network configuration following this scheme. The main network is set up with
the Class C address a.b.c.0, and contains Router A (which could be a Netopia R2020), a Netopia R2020, and a
number of other hosts. Router A maintains a link to the Internet, and may be used as the default gateway.
Internet
a.b.c.16
a.b.c.1
Router A
a.b.c.0
a.b.c.2
Router B
Router C
a.b.c.248
a.b.c.249
a.b.c.128
a.b.c.129
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C-12 User’s Reference Guide
Routers B and C (which could also be Netopia R2020s) serve the two remote networks that are subnets of
a.b.c.0. The subnetting is accomplished by configuring the Netopia R2020 with connection profiles for Routers
B and C (see the following table).
Bits available for host
Connection profile
Remote IP address
Remote IP mask
address
for Router B
for Router C
a.b.c.128
a.b.c.248
255.255.255.192
255.255.255.248
7
3
The Netopia R2020’s connection profiles for Routers B and C create entries in its IP routing table. One entry
points to the subnet a.b.c.128, while a second entry points to the subnet a.b.c.248. The IP routing table might
look similar to the following:
IP Routing Table
Network Address-Subnet Mask-----via Router------Port--Age--------Type------
----------------------------------SCROLL UP--------------------------------
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
a.b.c.1 WAN
3719
Management
Local
127.0.0.1
a.b.c.128
a.b.c.248
255.255.255.255 127.0.0.1 lp1 6423
255.255.255.192 a.b.c.128 WAN 5157
255.255.255.248 a.b.c.248 WAN 6205
Local
Local
---------------------------------SCROLL DOWN-------------------------------
UPDATE
Let’s see how a packet from the Internet gets routed to the host with IP address a.b.c.249, which is served by
Router C. The packet first arrives at Router A, which delivers it to its local network (a.b.c.0). The packet is then
received by the Netopia R2020, which examines its destination IP address.
The Netopia R2020 compares the packet’s destination IP address with the routes in its IP routing table. It
begins with the route at the bottom of the list and works up until there’s a match or the route to the default
gateway is reached.
When a.b.c.249 is masked by the first route’s subnet mask, it yields a.b.c.248, which matches the network
address in the route. The Netopia R2020 uses the connection profile associated with the route to connect to
Router C, and then forwards the packet. Router C delivers the packet to the host on its local network.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding IP Addressing C-13
The following diagram illustrates the IP address space taken up by the two remote IP subnets. You can see from
the diagram why the term nested is appropriate for describing these subnets.
1
Address range
available to
a.b.c.0, less
the two nested
subnets
129
valid addresses used
by a.b.c.128
190
249
valid addresses used
by a.b.c.248
254
Broadcasts
As mentioned earlier, binary IP host or subnet addresses composed entirely of ones or zeros are reserved for
broadcasting. A broadcast packet is a packet that is to be delivered to every host on the network, if both the
host address and the subnet address are all ones or all zeros, or to every host on the subnetwork, if the host
address is all ones or all zeros but the subnet address is a combination or zeros and ones. Instead of making
many copies of the packet, individually addressed to different hosts, all the host machines know to pay
attention to broadcast packets, as well as to packets addressed to their specific individual host addresses.
Depending on the age and type of IP equipment you use, broadcasts will be addressed using either all zeros or
all ones, but not both. If your network requires zeros broadcasting, you must configure this through SNMP.
Packet header types
As previously mentioned, IP works with other protocols to allow communication over IP networks. When IP is
used on an Ethernet network, IP works with the Ethernet or 802.3 framing standards, among other protocols.
These two protocols specify two different ways to organize the very first signals in the sequence of electrical
signals that make up an IP packet travelling over Ethernet. By default, the Netopia R2020 uses Ethernet packet
headers for IP traffic. If your network requires 802.3 IP framing, you must configure this through SNMP.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C-14 User’s Reference Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Binary Conversion Table D-1
Appendix D
Binary Conversion Table
This table is provided to help you choose subnet numbers and host numbers for IP and MacIP networks that
use subnetting for IP addresses.
Decimal
Binary
Decimal
Binary
Decimal
Binary
1000000
1000001
1000010
1000011
1000100
1000101
1000110
1000111
1001000
1001001
1001010
1001011
1001100
1001101
1001110
1001111
1010000
1010001
1010010
1010011
1010100
1010101
1010110
1010111
1011000
1011001
1011010
1011011
1011100
1011101
1011110
1011111
Decimal
Binary
1100000
1100001
1100010
1100011
1100100
1100101
1100110
1100111
1101000
1101001
1101010
1101011
1101100
1101101
1101110
1101111
1110000
1110001
1110010
1110011
1110100
1110101
1110110
1110111
1111000
1111001
1111010
1111011
1111100
1111101
1111110
1111111
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
32
100000
64
96
1
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
1000001
100010
100011
100100
100101
100110
100111
101000
101001
101010
101011
101100
101101
101110
101111
110000
110001
110010
110011
110100
110101
110110
110111
111000
111001
111010
111011
111100
111101
111110
111111
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
97
10
11
98
99
100
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
101
110
111
1000
1001
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
1010
1011
1100
1101
1110
1111
10000
10001
10010
10011
10100
10101
10110
10111
11000
11001
11010
11011
11100
11101
11110
11111
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D-2 User’s Reference Guide
Decimal
Binary
10000000
10000001
10000010
10000011
10000100
10000101
10000110
10000111
10001000
10001001
10001010
10001011
10001100
10001101
10001110
10001111
10010000
10010001
10010010
10010011
10010100
10010101
10010110
10010111
10011000
10011001
10011010
10011011
10011100
10011101
10011110
10011111
Decimal
Binary
10100000
10100001
10100010
10100011
10100100
10100101
10100110
10100111
10101000
10101001
10101010
10101011
10101100
10101101
10101110
10101111
10110000
10110001
10110010
10110011
10110100
10110101
10110110
10110111
10111000
10111001
10111010
10111011
10111100
10111101
10111110
10111111
Decimal
Binary
11000000
11000001
11000010
11000011
11000100
11000101
11000110
11000111
11001000
11001001
11001010
11001011
11001100
11001101
11001110
11001111
11010000
11010001
11010010
11010011
11010100
11010101
11010110
11010111
11011000
11011001
11011010
11011011
11011100
11011101
11011110
11011111
Decimal
Binary
11100000
11100001
11100010
11100011
11100100
11100101
11100110
11100111
11101000
11101001
11101010
11101011
11101100
11101101
11101110
11101111
11110000
11110001
11110010
11110011
11110100
11110101
11110110
11110111
11111000
11111001
11111010
11111011
11111100
11111101
11111110
11111111
128
160
192
224
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Further Reading E-1
Appendix E
Further Reading
Angell, David. ISDN for Dummies, Foster City, CA: IDG Books Worldwide, 1995. Thorough introduction to ISDN
for beginners.
Apple Computer, Inc. AppleTalk Network System Overview. Reading, Massachusetts: Addison-Wesley Publishing
Company, Inc.; 1989.
Apple Computer, Inc. Planning and Managing AppleTalk Networks. Reading, Massachusetts: Addison-Wesley
Publishing Company, Inc.; 1991.
Black, U. Data Networks: Concepts, Theory and Practice. Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey: Prentice Hall; 1989.
Black, U. Physical Level Interfaces and Protocols. Los Alamitos, California: IEEE Computer Society Press; 1988.
Black, Uyless. Emerging Communications Technologies, Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey: PTR Prentice Hall, 1994.
Describes how emerging communications technologies, including ISDN and Frame Relay operate and where
they fit in a computer/ communications network.
Case, J.D., J.R. Davins, M.S. Fedor, and M.L. Schoffstall. "Network Management and the Design of SNMP."
ConneXions: The Interoperability Report, Vol. 3: March 1989.
Case, J.D., J.R. Davins, M.S. Fedor, and M.L. Schoffstall. "Introduction to the Simple Gateway Monitoring
Protocol." IEEE Network: March 1988."
Chapman, D. Brent and Elizabeth D. Zwicky. Building Internet Firewalls, Sebastopol, CA: O’Reilly & Associates,
1995. Dense and technical, but Chapter 6 provides a basic introduction to packet filtering.
Chapman, D. Brent. “Network (In)Security Through IP Packet Filtering,” paper available from Great Circle
Associates, 1057 West Dana Street, Mountain View, CA 94041
Chappell, L. Novell's Guide to NetWare LAN Analysis. San Jose, California: Novell Press; 1993.
Clark, W. "SNA Internetworking." ConneXions: The Interoperability Report, Vol. 6, No. 3: March 1992.
Coltun, R. "OSPF: An Internet Routing Protocol." ConneXions: The Interoperability Report, Vol. 3, No. 8: August
1989.
Comer, D.E. Internetworking with TCP/ IP: Principles, Protocols, and Architecture, Vol. I, 2nd ed. Englewood
Cliffs, New Jersey: Prentice Hall; 1991.
Davidson, J. An Introduction to TCP/ IP. New York, New York: Springer-Verlag; 1992.
Ferrari, D. Computer Systems Performance Evaluation. Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey: Prentice Hall; 1978.
Garcia-Luna-Aceves, J.J. "Loop-Free Routing Using Diffusing Computations." Publication pending in IEEE/ ACM
Transactions on Networking, Vol. 1, No. 1, 1993.
Garfinkel, Simson. PGP: Pretty Good Privacy, Sebastopol, CA: O’Reilly & Associates, 1991. A guide to the free
data encryption program PGP and the issues surrounding encryption.
Green, J.K. Telecommunications, 2nd ed. Homewood, Illinois: Business One Irwin; 1992.
Hagans, R. "Components of OSI: ES-IS Routing." ConneXions: The Interoperability Report, Vol. 3, No. 8: August
1989.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
E-2 User’s Reference Guide
Hares, S. "Components of OSI: Inter-Domain Routing Protocol (IDRP)." ConneXions: The Interoperability Report,
Vol. 6, No. 5: May 1992.
Jones, N.E.H. and D. Kosiur. Macworld Networking Handbook. San Mateo, California: IDG Books Worldwide,
Inc.; 1992.
Joyce, S.T. and J.Q. Walker II. "Advanced Peer-to-Peer Networking (APPN): An Overview." ConneXions: The
Interoperability Report, Vol. 6, No. 10: October 1992.
Kousky, K. "Bridging the Network Gap." LAN Technology, Vol. 6, No. 1: January 1990.
LaQuey, Tracy. The Internet Companion: A Beginner's Guide to Global Networking, Reading, Massachusetts:
Addison-Wesley Publishing Company, Inc.; 1994.
Leinwand, A. and K. Fang. Network Management: A Practical Perspective. Reading, Massachusetts:
Addison-Wesley Publishing Company, Inc.; 1993.
Levine, John R. and Carol Baroudi. The Internet for Dummies, Foster City, CA: IDG Books Worldwide, 1993.
Covers all of the most popular Internet services, including e-mail, newsgroups, and the World Wide Web. Also
has information on setting up individual workstations with TCP/ IP stacks.
Lippis, N. "The Internetwork Decade." Data Communications, Vol. 20, No. 14: October 1991.
McNamara, J.E. Local Area Networks. Digital Press, Educational Services, Digital Equipment Corporation, 12
Crosby Drive, Bedford, MA 01730.
Malamud, C. Analyzing DECnet/ OSI Phase V. New York, New York: Van Nostrand Reinhold; 1991.
Malamud, C. Analyzing Novell Networks. New York, New York: Van Nostrand Reinhold; 1991.
Malamud, C. Analyzing Sun Networks. New York, New York: Van Nostrand Reinhold; 1991.
Martin, J. SNA: IBM's Networking Solution. Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey: Prentice Hall; 1987.
Martin, J., with K.K. Chapman and the ARBEN Group, Inc. Local Area Networks. Architectures and Implementa-
tions. Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey: Prentice Hall; 1989.
Medin, M. "The Great IGP Debate--Part Two: The Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) Routing Protocol."
ConneXions: The Interoperability Report, Vol. 5, No. 10: October 1991.
Meijer, A. Systems Network Architecture: A tutorial. New York, New York: John Wiley & Sons, Inc.; 1987.
Miller, A. Mark. Analyzing Broadband Networks (Frame Relay, SMDS, & ATM), M&T Books: A Division of MIS:
Press, 1994. An intermediate/ advanced reference on Frame Relay technologies.
Miller, M.A. Internetworking: A Guide to Network Communications LAN to LAN; LAN to WAN, 2nd. ed. San Mateo,
California: M&T Books; 1992.
Miller, M.A. LAN Protocol Handbook. San Mateo, California: M&T Books; 1990.
Miller, M.A. LAN Troubleshooting Handbook. San Mateo, California: M&T Books; 1989.
O'Reilly, T. and G. Todino. Managing UUCP and Usenet, 10th ed. Sebastopol, California: O'Reilly & Associates,
Inc.; 1992.
Perlman, R. Interconnections: Bridges and Routers. Reading, Massachusetts: Addison-Wesley Publishing
Company, Inc.; 1992.
Perlman, R. and R. Callon. "The Great IGP Debate--Part One: IS-IS and Integrated Routing." ConneXions: The
Interoperability Report, Vol. 5, No. 10: October 1991.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Further Reading E-3
Rose, M.T. The Open Book: A Practical Perspective on OSI. Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey: Prentice Hall; 1990.
Rose, M.T. The Simple Book: An Introduction to Management of TCP/ IP-based Internets. Englewood Cliffs, New
Jersey: Prentice Hall; 1991.
Ross, F.E. "FDDI--A Tutorial." IEEE Communications Magazine, Vol. 24, No. 5: May 1986.
Schlar, S.K. Inside X.25: A Manager's Guide. New York, New York: McGraw-Hill, Inc.; 1990.
Schwartz, M. Telecommunications Networks: Protocols, Modeling, and Analysis. Reading, Massachusetts:
Addison-Wesley Publishing Company, Inc.; 1987.
Sherman, K. Data Communications: A User's Guide. Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey: Prentice Hall; 1990.
Sidhu, G.S., R.F. Andrews, and A.B. Oppenheimer. Inside AppleTalk, 2nd ed. Reading, Massachusetts:
Addison-Wesley Publishing Company, Inc.; 1990.
Siyan, Karanjit. Internet Firewall and Network Security, Indianapolis: New Riders Publishing, 1995. Similar to the
Chapman and Zwicky book.
Smith, Philip. Frame Relay Principles and Applications, Addison-Wesley Publishing Company, 1996. Covers
information on Frame Relay, including the pros and cons of the technology, description of the theory and
application, and an explanation of the standardization process.
Spragins, J.D. et al. Telecommunications Protocols and Design. Reading, Massachusetts: Addison-Wesley
Publishing Company, Inc.; 1991.
Stallings, W. Data and Computer Communications. New York, New York: Macmillan Publishing Company; 1991.
Stallings, W. Handbook of Computer-Communications Standards, Vols. 1-3. Carmel, Indiana: Howard W. Sams,
Inc.; 1990.
Stallings, W. Local Networks, 3rd ed. New York, New York: Macmillan Publishing Company; 1990.
Stevens, W.R. TCP/ IP Illustrated, Vol 1. Reading, Massachusetts: Addison-Wesley Publishing Company, Inc.;
1994.
Sunshine, C.A. (ed.). Computer Network Architectures and Protocols, 2nd ed. New York, New York: Plenum
Press; 1989.
Tannenbaum, A.S. Computer Networks, 2nd ed. Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey: Prentice Hall; 1988.
Terplan, K. Communication Networks Management. Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey: Prentice Hall; 1992.
Tsuchiya, P. "Components of OSI: IS-IS Intra-Domain Routing." ConneXions: The Interoperability Report, Vol. 3,
No. 8: August 1989.
Tsuchiya, P. "Components of OSI: Routing (An Overview)." ConneXions: The Interoperability Report, Vol. 3, No.
8: August 1989.
Zimmerman, H. "OSI Reference Model--The ISO Model of Architecture for Open Systems Interconnection." IEEE
Transactions on Communications COM-28, No. 4: April 1980.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
E-4 User’s Reference Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical Specifications and Safety Information F-1
Appendix F
Technical Specifications and Safety Information
Pinouts for Auxiliary Port Modem Cable
1300 ohms
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
5
4
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Shield
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Shield
BRAID
HD-15
DB-25
Pin 1
Pin 2
Pin 3
Pin 4
Pin 5
Pin 6
Pin 7
Pin 8
Ground
TDA
Pin 1
Pin 2
Pin 3
Pin 4
Pin 5
Pin 6
Pin 7
Pin 8
(not used)
TD
TDB
RD
RDA
RTS
RDB
CTS
(not used)
DTR
DCE Ready
Ground
RLSD
CTS
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
F-2 User’s Reference Guide
HD-15
DB-25
Pin 9
DSR
DCD
Pin 9
-RSET (EIA-530)
(not used)
Pin 10
Pin 11
Pin 12
Pin 13
Pin 14
Pin 15
Pin 10
Pin 11
Pin 12
Pin 13
Pin 14
Pin 15
Pin 16
Pin 17
Pin 18
Pin 19
Pin 20
Pin 21
Pin 22
Pin 23
Pin 24
Pin 25
(not used)
TCA
-TSET (EIA-530)
(not used)
TCB
(not used)
RCA
-TD (EIA-530) STD (EIA-232)
(not used)
RCB
-RD (EIA-530) SRD (EIA-232)
RSET
(not used)
-RTS (EIA-530) SRTS (EIA-232)
DTE Ready
(not used)
(not used)
Ground
TSET
(not used)
Note: Certain RS-232 modems do not properly accept signals on pins 12/ 24, 13/ 11,
14/ 17, and 15/ 9. For these applications, these pins may need to be cut.
Description
Dimensions: 124.0 cm (w) x 20.0 cm (d) x 5.3 cm (h)
9.4” (w) x 7.9” (d) x 2.1” (h)
Communications interfaces: The Netopia R2020 Dual Analog Router has two RJ-45 jacks for modem
connections; an 8 port 10Base-T Ethernet hub for your LAN connection; a DE-9 Console port; and an HD-15
Auxiliary port that can be used as either a serial or LocalTalk port.
56K Modem Specifications: complies with ITU-T V.90 and/ or K56flex standard
Power requirements
■
12 VDC input
■
1.5 Amps
Environment
Operating temperature: 0° to +40° C
Storage temperature: 0° to +70° C
Relative storage humidity: 20 to 80% non-condensing
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical Specifications and Safety Information F-3
Software and protocols
Software media: Software preloaded on internal flash memory; field upgrades done via download to internal
flash memory via XMODEM or TFTP
Routing: TCP/ IP Internet Protocol Suite, RIP, AppleTalk*, LocalTalk-to-Ethernet routing*, AURP tunneling*,
MacIP*, IPX
* optional add-on feature
WAN support: PPP, MP, HDLC
Security: PAP, CHAP, PAP-TOKEN, CACHE-TOKEN, callback, SecurID, IP/ IPX firewalls, UI password security, and
CallerID
SNMP network management: SNMPv1, MIB-II (RFC 1213), Interface MIB (RFC 1229), Ethernet MIB (RFC
1643), AppleTalk MIB-I (1243), Netopia R2020 MIB
Management/ configuration methods: HTTP (web server), serial console, remote modem console, telnet,
SNMP
Diagnostics: PING, event logging, routing table displays, traceroute, statistics counters, Call Accounting
Agency approvals
The Netopia R2020 Dual Analog Router has met the safety standards (per CSA-950) of the Canadian Standards
Association for Canada.
The Netopia R2020 Dual Analog Router has met the safety standards (per UL-1950) of the Underwriters
Laboratories for United States.
Regulatory notices
Warning
This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference, in which case
the user may be required to take adequate measures. Adequate measures include increasing the physical
distance between this product and other electrical devices.
United States. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device,
pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against
harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates,
uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction
manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential
area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at
his own expense. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
FCC Requirements, Part 68. The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) has established Rules which
permit this device to be directly connected to the telephone network. Standardized jacks are used for these
connections. This equipment should not be used on party lines or coin phones.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
F-4 User’s Reference Guide
If this device is malfunctioning, it may also be causing harm to the telephone network; this device should be
disconnected until the source of the problem can be determined and until repair has been made. If this is not
done, the telephone company may temporarily disconnect service.
The telephone company may make changes in its technical operations and procedures; if such changes affect
the compatibility or use of this device, the telephone company is required to give adequate notice of the
changes. You will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC.
If the telephone company requests information on what equipment is connected to their lines, inform them of:
a) The telephone number to which this unit is connected.
b) The ringer equivalence number
c) The USOC jack required. (RJ11C)
d) The FCC Registration Number. (14 digits provided by FCC)
Items (b) and (d) are indicated on the label. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) is used to determine how
many devices can be connected to your telephone line. In most areas, the sum of the REN's of all devices on
any one line should not exceed five (5.0). If too many devices are attached, they many not ring properly.
Service Requirements. In the event of equipment malfunction, all repairs should be performed by our Company
or an authorized agent. Under FCC rules, no customer is authorized to repair this equipment. This restriction
applies regardless of whether the equipment is in or our of warranty. It is the responsibility of users requiring
service to report the need for service to our Company or to one of our authorized agents. Service can be
obtained at Netopia, Inc., 2470 Mariner Square Loop, Alameda, California, 94501.
Important
This product was tested for FCC compliance under conditions that included the use of shielded cables and
connectors between system components. Changes or modifications to this product not authorized by the
manufacturer could void your authority to operate the equipment.
Canada. This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for radio noise emission from digital
apparatus set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of the Canadian Department of Communications.
Le présent appareil numérique n'émet pas de bruits radioélectriques dépassant les limites applicables aux
appareils numériques de la classe A prescrites dans le Réglement sur le brouillage radioélectrique édicté par le
ministère des Communications du Canada.
Declaration for Canadian users
The Canadian Industry Canada label identifies certified equipment. This certification means that the equipment
meets certain telecommunications network protective, operation and safety requirements. The Department
does not guarantee the equipment will operate to the user’s satisfaction.
Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that it is permissible to be connected to the facilities of
the local telecommunications company. The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of
connection. In some cases, the company’s inside wiring associated with a single line individual service may be
extended by means of a certified connector assembly (telephone extension cord.) The customer should be
aware that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations.
Repairs to the certified equipment should be made by an authorized Canadian maintenance facility designated
by the supplier. Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment, or equipment malfunctions, may
give the telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical Specifications and Safety Information F-5
Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility,
telephone lines and internal metallic water pipe system, if present, are connected together. This precaution
may be particularly important in rural areas.
Caution
Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves, but should contact the appropriate electric
inspection authority, or electrician, as appropriate.
The Load Number (LN) assigned to each terminal device denotes the percentage of the total load to be
connected to a telephone loop which is used by the device, to prevent overloading. The termination on a loop
may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the total of the Load Numbers of
all the devices does not exceed 100.
Important safety instructions
Caution
■
The direct plug-in power supply serves as the main power disconnect; locate the direct plug-in power supply
near the product for easy access.
■
For use only with CSA Certified Class 2 power supply, rated 12VDC, 1.5A.
Telecommunication installation cautions
■
■
■
Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm.
Never install telephone jacks in wet locations unless the jack is specifically designed for wet locations.
Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone line has been disconnected at
the network interface.
■
■
Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines.
Avoid using a telephone (other than a cordless type) during an electrical storm. There may be a remote risk
of electric shock from lightning.
■
Do not use the telephone to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak.
Battery
The Netopia R2020’s lithium battery is designed to last for the life of the product. The battery is not user-ser-
viceable.
Caution!
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer. Dispose of used batteries
according to the manufacturer's instructions.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
F-6 User’s Reference Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
About 56K Line Access G-1
Appendix G
About 56K Line Access
The Netopia R2020 is capable of 56Kbps per line connections. This means that if you use both onboard
modems, you can achieve inbound data transfer rates of up to 112Kbps. Using a third modem bumps the
theoretical speed limit to 168Kbps.
This section describes some practical limitations on the previous statements.
A current FCC limitation will only permit a maximum speed of 52Kbps over analog phone lines using combined
analog/ digital technology. Also, the data transfer rates are for inbound data only. Outbound data is limited to
the current transfer rates for analog phone lines alone which is 33.6Kbps. So, using both onboard modems
under optimal conditions, will yield an inbound data transfer rate of 104Kbps and an outbound rate of
67.2Kbps. This means that your incoming email, file transfers and downloads, web browsing, and so on, occur
at 104Kbps, while your outgoing information, such as outbound email, travels at 67.2Kbps. With a third
modem, the rates become 156Kbps inbound and 100.8Kbps outbound. Also, to achieve the maximum inbound
rates, the ISP-side data must be digitally sourced.
Outbound data
33.6K
67.2K
33.6K
Inbound data
56K
112K
56K
Above a certain threshold (called Shannon's Limit) the signal-to-noise ratio of any medium becomes too low to
reliably transfer data. The analog phone line is the limiting factor in the speed of data transmission because of
the inherent noise it contributes.
Today's telephone network is increasingly digital. In particular, the portion of the phone connection between the
phone company and the Internet Service Provider (ISP) is often digital. Digital lines still have noise, and are still
subject to Shannon's limit, but they have less noise and a higher ceiling.
Several companies have created techniques that take advantage of the digital portion of the phone network to
achieve higher speeds than were possible with a purely analog pathway.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
G-2 User’s Reference Guide
These new techniques treat the phone system as a mostly digital network that just happens to have an analog
portion. There are several consequences to the reliance on a half-digital connection. Your Internet Service
Provider must have digital phone lines to the public switched telephone network (PSTN). That's the easy part: if
your ISP offers 56Kbps, they have the digital lines.
Getting the most out of 56K technology requires that you have optimal conditions on your telephone line. Any
noise in the line will degrade your connection. Statistics show that most people connect somewhere between
45 and 50K. Many connect at 52K. Connect rates between 40 and 50K are in no way a failure on the part of
the Internet Service Provider, but simply a fact of life in trying to extend the limitations of noisy analog
telephone lines.
The Netopia R2020 ships with the unified ITU V.90 standard firmware, also known as V.PCM, which merges the
K56flex standard with the competing x2 standard. Modem firmware updates that may from time to time become
available will be made available on the Netopia website. See “Transferring configuration and firmware files with
TFTP,” and “Transferring configuration and firmware files with XMODEM,” in Chapter 15, “Utilities and
Diagnostics.”
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Glossary 1
Glossary
Access Line: A telephone line reaching from the telephone company central office to a point usually on your
premises. Beyond this point the wire is considered inside wiring. See also Trunk Line.
analog: In telecommunications, telephone transmission and/ or switching that is not digital. An analog phone
transmission is one that was originally intended to carry speech or voice, but may with appropriate
modifications be used to carry data of other types.
ANSI (American National Standards Institute): Devises and proposes recommendations for international
communications standards. See also Comite Consultatif International Telegraphique et Telephonique (CCITT).
AppleTalk: A comprehensive network system designed and developed by Apple Computer, Inc. AppleTalk
allows many different types of computer systems, printers, and servers to communicate on a variety of cabling
schemes, including LocalTalk and Ethernet cabling. In this manual, AppleTalk refers especially to the protocols
or rule sets that govern this communication.
AppleTalk address: A unique identifier for each device using AppleTalk that allows information to be sent and
received correctly. An AppleTalk address always includes a network number wherever two or more AppleTalk
networks are connected together by routers.
AURP (Apple Update-based Router Protocol): An enhanced AppleTalk routing protocol. AURP provides
improved support for AppleTalk over wide area networks (WANs) and tunneling through non-AppleTalk (IP)
networks. AURP features include network number remapping, clustering of remote network numbers, and hop
count reduction.
backbone: A network topology consisting of a single length of cable with multiple network connection points.
Bandwidth: The range of frequencies, expressed in Kilobits per second, that can pass over a given data
transmission channel within a network. The bandwidth determines the rate at which information can be sent
through a channel - the greater the bandwidth, the more information that can be sent in a given amount of time.
BAP: Bandwidth Allocation Protocol. Manages the dynamic bandwidth allocation of implementations
supporting the PPP multilink protocol. This is done by defining the Bandwidth Allocation Protocol (BAP),
as well as its associated control protocol, the Bandwidth Allocation Control Protocol (BACP). BAP can be
used to manage the number of links in a multilink bundle.
baud rate: The rate of the signaling speed of a transmission medium.
bit: A binary digit; the smallest unit of data in the binary counting system. A bit has a value of either 0 or 1.
bits per second (bps): A measure of the actual data transmission rate. The bps rate may be equal to or greater
than the baud rate depending on the modulation technique used to encode bits into each baud interval. The
correct term to use when describing modem data transfer speeds.
bps: See bits per second.
branch: A length of cable in a star network that goes from the center of the star to a wall jack.
broadcast: A network transaction that sends data to all hosts connected to the network.
Burstiness: Data that uses bandwidth only sporadically; that is, information that does not use the total
bandwidth of a circuit 100 percent of the time. During pauses, channels are idle; and no traffic flows across
them in either direction. Interactive and LAN-to-LAN data is bursty in nature, because it is sent intermittently,
and in between data transmission the channel experiences idle time waiting for the DTEs to respond to the
transmitted data user’s input of waiting for the user to send more data.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 User’s Reference Guide
byte: A group of bits, normally eight, which represent one data character.
CallerID: See CND.
CCITT (Comite Consultatif International Telegraphique et Telephonique): International Consultative
Committee for Telegraphy and Telephony, a standards organization that devises and proposes recommenda-
tions for international communications. See also ANSI (American National Standards Institute).
CHAP (challenge handshake protocol): A method for ensuring secure network access and communications.
Class A, B, and C networks: The values assigned to the first few bits in an IP network address determine
which class designation the network has. In decimal notation, Class A network addresses range from 1.X.X.X to
126.X.X.X, Class B network addresses range from 128.1.X.X to 191.254.X.X, and Class C addresses range
from 192.0.1.X to 223.255.254.X. For more information on IP network address classes, see Appendix C,
“Understanding IP Addressing.”
client: An intelligent workstation that makes requests to other computers known as servers. PC computers on
a LAN can be clients.
clustering: A feature that clusters remapped network numbers into a range of sequential network numbers.
CNA (Calling Number Authentication): A security feature that will reject an incoming call if it does not match
the Calling Number field in one of the Netopia ISDN Router’s Connection Profiles.
CND (Calling Number Delivery): Also known as caller ID, a feature that allows the Called Customer Premises
Equipment (CPE) to receive a calling party’s directory number during the call establishment phase.
community strings: Sequences of characters that serve much like passwords for devices using SNMP.
Different community strings may be used to allow an SNMP user to gather device information or change device
configurations.
CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check): A computational means to ensure the integrity of a block of data. The
mathematical function is computed, before the data is transmitted at the originating device. Its numerical value
is computed based on the content of the data. This value is compared with a recomputed value of the function
at the destination device.
DCE (Data Communications Equipment): Term defined by standards committees, that applies to
communications equipment, typically modems or printers, as distinct from other devices that attach to the
network, typically personal computers or data terminals (DTE). The distinction generally refers to which pins in
an RS-232-C connection transmit or receive data. Also see DTE.
DDP (Datagram Delivery Protocol): Defines socket-to-socket delivery of datagrams over an AppleTalk internet.
DTE (Data Terminal Equipment): Term defined by standards committees, that applies to communications
equipment, typically personal computers or data terminals, as distinct from other devices that attach to the
network, typically modems or printers (DCE). The distinction generally refers to which pins in an RS-232-C
connection transmit or receive data. Pins 2 and 3 are reversed. Also see DCE.
default zone: When a Phase II EtherTalk network includes more than one zone, all routers on that network
must be configured to assign one of these zones as a default zone. The default zone is temporarily assigned to
any Phase II EtherTalk node that hasn’t chosen a zone. The user may choose another zone by opening the
Network Control Panel, selecting the correct physical connection, and then choosing a zone in the scrolling field
displayed.
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol): A service that lets clients on a LAN request configuration
information, such as IP host addresses, from a server.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Glossary 3
DNS (Domain Name Service): A TCP/ IP protocol for discovering and maintaining network resource information
distributed among different servers.
download: The process of transferring a file from a server to a client.
EIA (Electronic Industry Association): A North American standards association.
Ethernet: A networking protocol that defines a type of LAN characterized by a 10 Mbps (megabits per second)
data rate. Ethernet is used in many mainframe, PC, and UNIX networks, as well as for EtherTalk.
Ethernet address: Sometimes referred to as a hardware address. A 48-bits long number assigned to every
Ethernet hardware device. Ethernet addresses are usually expressed as 12-character hexadecimal numbers,
where each hexadecimal character (0 through F) represents four binary bits. Do not confuse the Ethernet
address of a device with its network address.
EtherTalk: Apple’s data-link software that allows an AppleTalk network to be connected by Ethernet cables.
EtherTalk is a protocol within the AppleTalk protocol set. Two versions of EtherTalk are in common use,
designated as Phase I and Phase II EtherTalk.
extended network: A network using AppleTalk Phase II protocols; EtherTalk 2.0 and TokenTalk are extended
networks. LocalTalk networks are compatible with Phase II but are not extended because a single LocalTalk
network cannot have multiple network numbers or multiple zone names.
firmware: System software stored in a device’s memory that controls the device. The Netopia ISDN Router’s
firmware can be updated.
gateway: A device that connects two or more networks that use different protocols. Gateways provide address
translation services, but do not translate data. Gateways must be used in conjunction with special software
packages that allow computers to use networking protocols not originally designed for them.
hard seeding: A router setting. In hard seeding, if a router that has just been reset detects a network number
or zone name conflict between its configured information and the information provided by another router, it
disables the router port for which there is a conflict. See also non-seeding, seeding, seed router, and soft
seeding.
HDLC (High Level Data Link Control): A generic link-level communications protocol developed by the
International Organization for Standardization (ISO). HDLC manages synchronous, code-transparent, serial
information transfer over a link connection. See also SDLC (Synchronous Data Link Control).
header: In packets, a header is part of the envelope information that surrounds the actual data being
transmitted. In e-mail, a header is usually the address and routing information found at the top of messages.
hop: A single traverse from one node to another on a LAN.
hop count: The number of nodes (routers or other devices) a packet has gone through. If there are six routers
between source and destination nodes, the hop count for the packet will be six when it arrives at its destination
node. The maximum allowable hop count is usually 15.
hop count reduction: A feature of AURP supported by the Netopia ISDN Router. Tunnels and point-to-point
links over WANs can often exceed the maximum allowable hop count of 15 routers. Network administrators can
use the hop count reduction feature to set up tunnels and point-to-point links that exceed the 15-router limit.
host: A single, addressable device on a network. Computers, networked printers, and routers are hosts.
Host Computer: A communications device that enables users to run applications programs to perform such
functions as text editing, program execution, access to data bases, etc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 User’s Reference Guide
internet: A set of networks connected together by routers. This is a general term, not to be confused with the
large, multi-organizational collection of IP networks known as the Internet. An internet is sometimes also known
as an internetwork.
internet address, IP address: Any computing device that uses the Internet Protocol (IP) must be assigned an
internet or IP address. This is a 32-bit number assigned by the system administrator, usually written in the form
of 4 decimal fields separated by periods, e.g., 192.9.200.1. Part of the internet address is the IP network
number (IP network address), and part is the host address (IP host address). All machines on a given IP
network use the same IP network number, and each machine has a unique IP host address. The system
administrator sets the subnet mask to specify how much of the address is network number and how much is
host address. See also Class A, B, and C networks.
IP (Internet Protocol): A networking protocol developed for use on computer systems that use the UNIX
operating system. Often used with Ethernet cabling systems. In this manual, IP is used as an umbrella term to
cover all packets and networking operations that include the use of the Internet Protocol. See also TCP/ IP.
IP address, IP host address, IP network address: See internet address.
IP broadcast: See broadcast.
IP tunneling: See AURP.
IPX (Internet Package Exchange): A protocol used by Novell Netware networks.
ISDN (Integrated Services Digital Network): A method of transmitting data digitally over telephone lines.
ISP (Internet service provider): A company that provides Internet-related services. Most importantly, an ISP
provides Internet access services and products to other companies and consumers.
ITU (International Telecommunication Union): United Nations specialized agency for telecommunications.
Successor to CCITT.
K56flex: A modem data transmission technology standard created by Lucent Technologies and Rockwell
International. Its purpose is to take advantage of the largely digital portions of the telephone system in order to
exceed the theoretical speed limitations of data transmission over analog telephone lines. A competing
technology called “x2,” created by U.S. Robotics/ 3Com, performs a similar function. In February, 1998, the
interested parties agreed on a unified standard called V.90, also known as V.PCM, which merges the K56flex
standard with the competing x2 standard. In September, 1998, the International Telecommunications Union is
expected to ratify the unified standard, thereby allowing interoperability of modems and ISPs’ central site
equipment, with appropriate firmware upgrades.
LAN (Local Area Network): A privately owned network that offers high-speed communications channels to
connect information processing equipment in a limited geographic area.
LocalTalk: The cabling specification for AppleTalk running at a speed of 230.4 kbps (kilobits per second).
MacIP: A protocol in which IP packets are encapsulated within AppleTalk headers, for transmission over
AppleTalk networks. MacIP requires the presence of at least one AppleTalk–IP gateway. MacIP is usually used to
allow an AppleTalk computer to communicate with an IP computer.
MacIP client: A Macintosh computer that is using the MacIP protocol to communicate with an IP computer.
MIB (Management Information Base): A standardized structure for SNMP management information.
modem: A device used to convert digital signals from a computer into analog signals that can be transmitted
across standard analog (not ISDN) telephone lines. Modem is a contraction of modulator-demodulator.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Glossary 5
NAT (Network Address Translation): A feature that allows communication between the LAN connected to the
Netopia ISDN Router and the Internet using a single IP address, instead of having a separate IP address for
each computer on the network.
NetBIOS: A network communications protocol used on PC LANs.
network: A group of computer systems and other computer devices that communicate with one another.
network administrator: A person who coordinates the design, installation, and management of a network. A
network administrator is also responsible for troubleshooting and for adding new users to the network.
network log: A record of the names of devices, location of wire pairs, wall-jack numbers, and other information
about the network.
network number: A unique number for each network in an internet. AppleTalk network numbers are assigned
by seed routers, to which the network is directly connected. An isolated AppleTalk network does not need a
network number.
network number remapping: Resolves network number conflicts when two or more AppleTalk networks that
may have duplicate network numbers are connected together. The Netopia ISDN Router lets you set up a range
of network numbers into which remote AppleTalk network numbers are remapped.
network range: A unique set of contiguous numbers associated with an extended network; each number in a
network range can be associated with up to 253 node addresses.
node: See host.
non-seeding: A router setting that causes it to request network number and zone information from any other
routers on the network connected to the non-seeding port. If it receives this information, it begins to route
packets through that port. See also hard seeding, seeding, seed router, and soft seeding.
packet: A group of fixed-length binary digits, including the data and call control signals, that are transmitted
through an X.25 packet-switching network as a composite whole. The data, call control signals, and possible
error control information are arranged in a predetermined format. Packets do not always travel the same
pathway but are arranged in proper sequence at the destination side before forwarding the complete message
to an addressee.
Packet-Switching Network: A telecommunications network based on packet-switching technology, wherein a
transmission channel is occupied only for the duration of the transmission of the packet.
PAP (PPP authentication protocol): A method for ensuring secure network access.
Parameter: A numerical code that controls an aspect of terminal and/ or network operation. Parameters
control such aspects as page size, data transmission speed, and timing options.
port: A location for passing data in and out of a device, and, in some cases, for attaching other devices or
cables.
port number: A number that identifies a TCP/ IP-based service. Telnet, for example, is identified with TCP port
23.
PPP (Point to Point Protocol): A protocol for framing IP packets and transmitting them over a serial line.
protocol: A set of rules for communication, sometimes made up of several smaller sets of rules also called
protocols. AppleTalk is a protocol that includes the LocalTalk, EtherTalk, and TokenTalk protocols.
remapping: See network number remapping.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6 User’s Reference Guide
RFC (Request for Comment): A series of documents used to exchange information and standards about the
Internet.
RIP (Routing Information Protocol): A protocol used for the transmission of IP routing information.
RJ-11: A telephone-industry standard connector type, usually containing four pins.
RJ-45: A telephone-industry standard connector type usually containing eight pins.
router: A device that supports network communications. A router can connect identical network types, such as
LocalTalk-to-LocalTalk, or dissimilar network types, such as LocalTalk-to-Ethernet. However—unless a gateway is
available—a common protocol, such as TCP/ IP, must be used over both networks. Routers may be equipped to
provide WAN line support to the LAN devices they serve. They may also provide various management and
monitoring functions as well as a variety of configuration capabilities.
router port: A physical or logical connection between a router and a network. Where a network only allows the
use of one protocol, each physical connection corresponds to one logical router port. An example is the Netopia
ISDN Router’s LocalTalk port. Where a network allows the use of several protocols, each physical connection
may correspond to several logical router ports—one for each protocol used. Each router port has its own
network address.
routing table: A list of networks maintained by each router on an internet. Information in the routing table
helps the router determine the next router to forward packets to.
seeding: A method for ensuring that two or more routers agree about which physical networks correspond to
which network numbers and zone names. There are three options: non-seeding, soft seeding, and hard seeding.
Seeding can often be set separately for each router port. See also hard seeding, non-seeding, seed router, and
soft seeding.
seed router: A router that provides network number and zone information to any router that starts up on the
same network. See also hard seeding, non-seeding, seeding, and soft seeding.
serial port: A connector on the back of the workstation through which data flows to and from a serial device.
server: A device or system that has been specifically configured to provide a service, usually to a group of
clients.
SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol): A protocol used for communication between management
consoles and network devices. The Netopia ISDN Router can be managed through SNMP.
soft seeding: A router setting. In soft seeding, if a router that has just been reset detects a network number or
zone name conflict between its configured information for a particular port and the information provided by
another router connected to that port, it updates its configuration using the information provided by the other
router. See also hard seeding, non-seeding, seeding, and seed router.
subnet: A network address created by using a subnet mask to specify that a number of bits in an internet
address will be used as a subnet number rather than a host address.
subnet mask: A 32-bit number to specify which part of an internet address is the network number, and which
part is the host address. When written in binary notation, each bit written as 1 corresponds to 1 bit of network
address information. One subnet mask applies to all IP devices on an individual IP network.
SDLC (Synchronous Data Link Control): A link-level communications protocol used in an International
Business Machines (IBM) Systems Network Architecture (SNA) network that manages synchronous,
code-transparent, serial information transfer over a link connection. SDLC is a subset of the more generic HDLC
(High-Level Data Link Control) protocol developed by the International Organization for Standardization (ISO).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Glossary 7
TCP/ IP (Transmission Control Protocol/ Internet Protocol): An open network standard that defines how
devices from different manufacturers communicate with each other over one or more interconnected networks.
TCP/ IP protocols are the foundation of the Internet, a worldwide network of networks connecting businesses,
governments, researchers, and educators.
telephone wall cable: 2-pair, 4-pair, or 8-pair, 22- or 24-gauge solid copper wire cable. Telephone wall cable is
sometimes called telephone station cable or twisted-pair cable.
TFTP (Trivial File Transfer Protocol/ Internet Protocol): A protocol used to transfer files between IP nodes.
TFTP is often used to transfer firmware and configuration information from a UNIX computer acting as a TFTP
server to an IP networking device, such as the Netopia ISDN Router.
thicknet: Industry jargon for 10Base-5 coaxial cable, the original Ethernet cabling.
thinnet: Industry jargon for 10Base-2 coaxial cable, which is thinner (smaller in diameter) than the original
Ethernet cabling.
UDP (User Datagram Protocol): A TCP/ IP protocol describing how packets reach applications in destination
nodes.
V.90: A modem data transmission standard, also known as V.PCM, which merges the K56flex standard with
the competing x2 standard. In September, 1998, the International Telecommunications Union is expected to
ratify the unified standard, thereby allowing interoperability of modems and ISPs’ central site equipment, with
appropriate firmware upgrades.
wall jack: A small hardware component used to tap into telephone wall cable. An RJ-11 wall jack usually has
four pins; an RJ-45 wall jack usually has eight pins.
WAN (wide area network): A network that consists of nodes connected by long-distance transmission media,
such as telephone lines. WANs can span a state, a country, or even the world.
WAN IP: In addition to being a router, the Netopia ISDN Router is also an IP address server. There are four
protocols it can use to distribute IP addresses over the WAN which include: DHCP, BOOTP, IPCP and MacIP. WAN
IP is a feature for both the Small Office and Corporate Netopia ISDN Router models.
wiring closet: A central location where a building’s telephone and network wiring is connected. Multi-story
buildings often have a main wiring closet in the basement and satellite wiring closets on each floor.
zone: An arbitrary subset of nodes within an AppleTalk internet. Creating multiple zones makes it easier for
users to locate network services. The network administrator defines zones when he or she configures routers.
Isolated networks have no zones. LocalTalk and EtherTalk Phase I networks may have no more than one zone
each. EtherTalk Phase II and TokenTalk networks may have more than one zone each. Several networks of any
AppleTalk type may share a zone name.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8 User’s Reference Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index-1
Index
Numerics
receiving connections 12-10
setup 12-3, 12-8
10Base-T 4-3
10Base-T, connecting 4-3
56k, about G-1
tunnel 14-20
authentication
A
accounting configuration 8-23
add static route 10-33
adding a filter set 14-13
features 7-8
answer profile
defined 8-4
answering calls 8-4
capabilities 1-1
change static route 10-34
and answer profile 8-6
configuration files
AppleTalk 1-2
routing table 13-9
AppleTalk routing table 13-9
AppleTalk setup 12-1
AURP
application software 4-2
ATMP 9-7
tunnel options 9-16
AURP
downloading with TFTP 15-9
downloading with XMODEM 15-12
uploading with XMODEM 15-12
SmartPhone 8-1
telephone connections 8-1
adding a partner 12-9
configuration 12-10
connecting to a partner 12-9
hop-count reduction 12-11
network number remapping 12-11
with console-based management 5-1, 6-1,
7-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index-2
configuring profiles for incoming calls. 8-6
connecting to an Ethernet network 4-3
connection metering 8-12
connection profiles
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP)
10-35
DHCP
defined 6-3
IP setup 6-4
navigating 5-4
overview 6-1
encryption 9-7
scheduling 8-1, 8-7
console
configuring 7-11
screens, connecting to 7-7
console connection problems A-2
console-based management
4-2
D
device 13-7
WAN 13-6
date and time
setting 7-11
deciding on an ISP account B-2
4
deleting a packet filter 14-23
deleting filters 14-16
filter priority 14-5
adding 14-13
defined 14-4
deleting 14-17
deleting IP trap receivers 13-15
DHCP
disadvantages 14-11
modifying 14-17
sample (Basic Firewall) 14-17
using 14-12
defined C-8
DHCP NetBIOS options 10-37
display a filter set 14-9
distributing IP addresses C-5
downloading a configuration file 15-9
downloading configuration files 15-12
with TFTP 15-9
filters
actions a filter can take 14-7
adding to a filter set 14-14
defined 14-4
deleting 14-16
input 14-14
with XMODEM 15-12
modifying 14-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index-3
output 14-14
parts of 14-7
priority 14-5
using 14-12
viewing 14-16
IP addressing C-1
IPX setup 11-1
finding an ISP B-1
firewall 14-17
firmware files
IPX spoofing 11-3
updating with TFTP 15-8
FTP sessions 14-20
further reading E-1
finding B-1
G
LocalTalk 12-7
connecting 4-5
setup 12-7
General Statistics 13-4
Glossary GL-1
H
hard seeding 12-3
hops 13-10
MacIP 10-35
defined C-8
I
input filter 3 14-18
input filters 1 and 2 14-18
Internetwork Packet Exchange (IPX) 11-1
IP address serving 10-35
IP addresses
MacIP/ KIP clients 10-41
MPPE 9-7
multiple subnets 10-29
N
about C-1
distribution rules C-10
static C-8
NAT
defined 10-1
firmware upgrades 10-28
IP profile parameters 10-18
IP setup 10-5
map lists 10-6
modifying map lists 10-10
moving maps 10-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index-4
outside ranges 10-6
navigating
configuration screens 7-8
Easy Setup 5-4
auxiliary port modem cable F-1
NCSA Telnet 5-3
tunnel options 9-4
nested IP subnets C-11
NetBIOS 10-37, 11-3
NetBIOS scope 10-38
Netopia
answering calls 8-4
connecting to Ethernet, rules 4-3
distributing IP addresses 10-35, C-5
IP setup 6-4
IPX setup 6-4
monitoring 13-1
R
security 14-1
Network Address Translation
see NAT 10-1
network problems A-2
next router address 13-10
non-seeding 12-3
AppleTalk 13-9
IP 10-31, 13-8
S
SAP server types 11-3
adding 8-8
O
defined 8-1, 8-7
output filter 1 14-18
overview 1-1
deleting 8-12
modifying 8-11
once-only 8-10
P
viewing 8-8
packet
weekly 8-10
header C-13
screens, connecting to 7-7
security
PAP
and answer profile 8-6
parts of a filter 14-7
password
filters 14-4–14-20
measures to increase 14-1
telnet 14-4
to protect security screen 14-2
user accounts 14-2
user accounts (passwords) 14-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index-5
Security Options screen 14-2
seeding 12-3
T
Service Advertising Protocol (SAP) 11-2
show static soutes 10-32
SNMP
technical specifications F-2
telnet 5-2
access 7-7, 14-4
configuring 5-3
SmartIP 10-1
SmartPhone
configuring 8-1
default settings 5-4
SmartStart
requirements
updating firmware 15-8
Macintosh 3-1
PC 3-1
troubleshooting
PC A-1
Windows 95 3-3
SNMP
SmartStart
MIBs supported 13-12
traps 13-14
PC A-1
ATMP 9-16
PPTP 9-4
SNMP Setup screen 13-13
socket 11-2
soft seeding 12-3
specifications
technical F-2
Src. Port
14-9
state 13-10
static routes 10-31
statistics, WAN 13-4
subnet masks C-3
subnets C-2–C-5
multiple 10-29
U
updating firmware
with TFTP 15-8
with XMODEM 15-11
updating Netopia’s firmware 15-8
uploading a configuration file 15-10
uploading configuration files
with TFTP 15-10
nested C-11
with XMODEM 15-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index-6
user accounts 14-2
using filters 14-12
utilities and tests 15-1
V
viewing IP trap receivers 13-15
Virtual Private Networks (VPN) 9-1
VPN 9-1
allowing through a firewall 9-19
ATMP tunnel options 9-16
PPTP tunnel options 9-4
W
WAN
event history 13-6
statistics 13-4
WAN configuration 8-1
WAN event history 13-6
WAN statistics 13-4, 13-5
web-based management
budget statistics 8-20
connect/ disconnect 8-16
connection budgets 8-18
connection status 8-15
system information 8-13
Windows 95
SmartStart 3-3
X
XMODEM 15-10
XMODEM file transfers
downloading configuration files 15-12
updating firmware 15-11
uploading configuration files 15-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Limited Warranty and Limitation of Remedies
1
Limited Warranty and Limitation of Remedies
Netopia warrants to you, the end user, that the Netopia R2020 Dual Analog Router (the “Product”) will be free
from defects in materials and workmanship under normal use for a period of one (1) year from date of
purchase. Netopia’s entire liability and your sole remedy under this warranty during the warranty period is that
Netopia shall, at its option, either repair the Product or refund the original purchase price of the Product.
In order to make a claim under this warranty you must comply with the following procedure:
1. Contact Netopia Customer Service within the warranty period to obtain a Return Materials Authorization
(“RMA”) number.
2. Return the defective Product and proof of purchase, shipping prepaid, to Netopia with the RMA number
prominently displayed on the outside of the package.
If you are located outside of the United States or Canada, please contact your dealer in order to arrange for
warranty service.
THE ABOVE WARRANTIES ARE MADE BY NETOPIA ALONE, AND THEY ARE THE ONLY WARRANTIES MADE BY
ANYONE REGARDING THE ENCLOSED PRODUCT. NETOPIA AND ITS LICENSOR(S) MAKE NO OTHER
WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MER-
CHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, REGARDING THE ENCLOSED PRODUCT. EXCEPT AS
OTHERWISE EXPRESSLY PROVIDED ABOVE, NETOPIA AND ITS LICENSOR(S) DO NOT WARRANT, GUARANTEE OR
MAKE ANY REPRESENTATION REGARDING THE USE OR THE RESULTS OF THE USE OF THE PRODUCT IN TERMS
OF ITS CORRECTNESS, ACCURACY, RELIABILITY, CURRENTNESS, OR OTHERWISE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE
RESULTS AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PRODUCT IS ASSUMED BY YOU. THE EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED
WARRANTIES IS NOT PERMITTED BY SOME STATES OR JURISDICTIONS, SO THE ABOVE EXCLUSION MAY NOT
APPLY TO YOU. IN THAT CASE, ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES ARE LIMITED IN DURATION TO NINETY (90) DAYS
FROM THE DATE OF DELIVERY OF THE PRODUCT. THERE MAY BE OTHER RIGHTS THAT YOU MAY HAVE WHICH
VARY FROM JURISDICTION TO JURISDICTION.
REGARDLESS OF WHETHER OR NOT ANY REMEDY SET FORTH HEREIN FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE, IN
NO EVENT WILL NETOPIA, ITS LICENSOR(S) AND THE DIRECTORS, OFFICERS, EMPLOYEES OR AGENTS OF ANY
OF THEM BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL, INCIDENTAL OR INDIRECT DAMAGES (INCLUDING
DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF BUSINESS PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, LOSS OF BUSINESS INFORMATION,
AND THE LIKE) ARISING OUT THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PRODUCT EVEN IF NETOPIA OR ITS
LICENSOR(S) HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. BECAUSE SOME STATES OR
JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL OR
INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. NETOPIA AND ITS LICENSOR(S)
LIABILITY TO YOU FOR ACTUAL DAMAGES FROM ANY CAUSE WHATSOEVER, AND REGARDLESS OF THE FORM
OF THE ACTION (WHETHER IN CONTRACT, TORT [INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE], PRODUCT LIABILITY OR
OTHERWISE), WILL BE LIMITED TO $50. v.697
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2
User’s Reference Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|